Under Drake's flag : a tale of the Spanish Main

UNDER DRAKE'S

FLAG

flDS MOD

:#

U.C.

Under Drake's Flag

G. A. HENTY'S BOOKS

Illustrated by Eminent Artists

St. George for England : A Tale of Crecy and Poitiers.

With Kitchener in the Soudan: A Story of Atbara and Omdurman.

At Aboukir and Acre: A Story of Napoleon's Invasion of Egypt.

At Agincourt : A Tale of the White Hoods of Paris.

At the Point of the Bayonet: A Tale of the Mahratta War.

Both Sides the Border: A Tale of Hotspur and Glendower.

The Bravest of the Brave : or, With Peterborough in Spain.

By England's Aid : The Freeing of the Netherlands.

By Pike and Dyke: A Tale of the Rise of the Dutch Republic.

By Right of Conquest : With Cortez in Mexico.

Captain Bayley's Heir: A Tale of the Goldfields of California.

The Cat of Bubastes: A Story of Ancient Egypt

A Chapter of Adventures: Through the Bombardment of Alexandria.

Condemned as a Nihilist: A Story of Escape from Siberia.

The Dragon and the Raven: The Days of King Alfred.

Facing Death : A Tale of the Coal Mines.

A Final Reckoning : A Tale of Bush Life in Australia.

For the Temple : A Tale of the Fall of Jerusalem.

In Freedom's Cause : A Story of Wallace and Bruce.

In Greek Waters : The Grecian War of Independence.

In the Irish Brigade: A Tale of War in Flanders and Spain.

A Jacobite Exile : In the Service of Charles XII of Sweden.

A Knight of the White Cross: A Tale of the Siege of Rhodes.

The Lion of St. Mark: A Tale of Venice.

The Lion of the North: A Tale of Gustavus Adolphus.

Maori and Settler: A Story of the New Zealand War.

A March on London: A Story of Wat Tyler's Insurrection.

On the Irrawaddy : The First Burmese War.

One of the 28th: A Tale of Waterloo.

Orange and Green : A Tale of the Boyne and Limerick.

St. Bartholomew's Eve: A Tale of the Huguenot Wars.

Through Russian Snows : A Story of Napoleon's Retreat from Moscow.

Through the Fray: A Story of the Luddite Riots.

Through the Sikh War: The Conquest of the Punjaub.

Through Three Campaigns: A Story of Chitral, Tirah, and Ashanti.

The Tiger of Mysore : A Story of the War with Tippoo Saib.

True to the Old Flag: Tho American War of Independence.

Under Drake's Flag: A Tale of the Spanish Main.

Under Wellington's Command: A Tale of the Peninsular War.

With Clive in India: The Beginnings of an Empire.

With Cochrane the Dauntless: A Tale of his Exploits.

With Frederick the Great: A Tale of the Seven Years' War.

With Moore at Corunna: A Tale of the Peninsular War.

The Young Carthaginian : A Story of the Times of Hannibal.

The Young Colonists : A Tale of the Zulu and Boer Wars.

LONDON: BLACKIE AND SON, LTD., 50 OLD BAILEY, E.G.

CAPTAIN DRAKE ON BOARD THE "GOLDEN HIND

Page 266

Under Drake's Flag

A Tale of the Spanish Main

BY

G. A. HENTY

Author of "True to the Old Flag" "St. George for England" "In Freedom's
Cause" "With dive in India" "With Buller in Natal" &c.

ILLUSTRATED

BLACKIE AND SON LIMITED

LONDON GLASGOW AND BOMBAY

Contents

CHAP.

I. THE WRECK ON THE DEVON COAST ... 9

II. FRIENDS AND FOES 22

III. ON THE SPANISH MAIN 35

IV. AN UNSUCCESSFUL ATTACK 52

V. CAST ASHORE 77

VI. IN THE WOODS 93

VII. AN ATTACK IN FORCE 109

VIII. THE FOREST FASTNESS • • • • * - 124

IX. BAFFLED 140

X. SOUTHWARD Ho! *59

XI. THE MARVEL OF FIRE 17*

XII. ACROSS A CONTINENT 185

XIII. THROUGH THE CORDILLERAS 197

XIV. ON THE PACIFIC COAST - • • * * - 212
XV. THE PRISON OF THE INQUISITION - - * ..- 225

XVI. THE RESCUE * , • 242

XVII. THE "GOLDEN HIND" • '• » • • -260

XVIII. SAN FRANCISCO BAY - - « « • - 277

XIX. SOUTH SEA IDOLS - • • • • • - 294

XX. A PORTUGUESE SETTLEMENT - * * . .* * 314

XXI. WHOLESALE CONVERSION • • • » * . 332

XXII. HOME • • • • * • • • ' 3S2

Illustrations

Page

CAPTAIN DRAKE ON BOARD THE ''GOLDEN HIND"

Coloured frontispiece

ALONE IN MID-OCEAN - - - . . • . •' * * 32

THE BARRICADE - * - - 136

SAFE ON BOARD AGAIN - z64

THE MESSAGE FROM THE GOVERNOR 336

UNDER DRAKE'S FLAG

CHAPTER I

The Wreck on the Devon Coast

IT was a stormy morning in the month of May, 1572, and
the fishermen of the little village of Westport, situate
about five miles from Plymouth, clustered in the public-
house of the place, and discussed, not the storm, for that
was a common topic, but the fact that Master Francis
Drake, whose ships lay now at Plymouth, was visiting
the Squire of Treadwood, had passed through the village
overnight, and might go through it again to-day. There
was not one of the hardy fishermen there but would gladly
have joined Drake's expedition; for marvellous tales had
been told of the great booty which he and other well-
known captains had already obtained from the Dons on
the Spanish Main. The number, however, who could go
was limited, and even of these the seafaring men were
but a small proportion; for in those days, although a
certain number of sailors were required to trim the sails
and navigate the ship, the strength of the company were
the fighting men, who were soldiers by trade and fought
on board ship as if on land. Captain Drake was accom-

io Under Drake's Flag

panied by many men of good Devon blood, for that county
was then ahead of all England in its enterprise and its
seamanship, and no captain of name or repute ever had
any difficulty in getting together a band of adventurers
from the sturdy population of her shores.

" I went over myself last week," said a finely-built young
sailor, "and I prayed the captain on my knees to take me
on board; but he said the tale had been full long ago, and
that so many were the applicants that Master Drake and
himself had sworn a great oath that they would take none
beyond those already engaged."

"Aye! I would have gone myself," said a grizzly,
weather-beaten old sailor, "if they would have had me.
There was Will Trelawney, who went on such another
expedition as this, and came back with more bags of
Spanish dollars than he could carry. Truly they are a
gold mine, these Western seas; but even better than
getting gold is the thrashing of those haughty Spaniards,
who seem to look upon themselves as gods, and on all
others as fit only to clean their worships' boots."

"They cannot fight neither, can they?" asked a young
sailor.

"They can fight, boy, and have fought as well as we
could; but somehow they cannot stand against us in those
seas. Whether it is that the curse of the poor natives whom
they kill, enslave, and ill-treat in every way rises against
them, and takes away their courage and their nerve, but
certain is it that when our little craft lay alongside their
big galleons, fight as they will, the battle is as good as
over. Nothing less than four to one, at the very least,
has any chance against our buccaneers."

"They ill-treat those that fall into their hands, do they
not?"

The Wreck on the Devon Coast n

" Ay do they!" said the old sailor. " They tear off their
flesh with hot pincers, wrench out their nails, and play all
sorts of devil's games, and then at last they burn what is
left of them in the market-places. I have heard tell of
fearsome tales, lad; but the Spaniards outwit themselves.
Were our men to have fair treatment as prisoners of war,
it may be that the Spaniards would often be able to hold
their own against us; but the knowledge that if we are
taken this horrible fate is certain to be ours, makes our men
fight with a desperate fury, and never to give in as long as
one is left. This it is that accounts for the wonderful
victories which we have gained there. He would be a
coward, indeed, who would not fight with thumbscrews
and a bonfire behind him."

"It is said that the queen and her ministers favour,
though not openly, these adventures."

" She cannot do it openly," said the old man, " for here
in Europe we are at peace with Spain — worse luck."

" How is it, then, that if we are at peace here we can be
at war in the Indian Seas?"

"That is more than I can tell thee, lad. I guess the
queen's writ runs not so far as that, and while her majesty's
commands must be obeyed, and the Spanish flag suffered
to pass unchallenged on these seas, on the Spanish Main
there are none to keep the peace, and the Don and the
Englishman go at each other's throats as a thing of
nature."

"The storm is rising, methinks. It is not often I have
heard the wind howl more loudly. It is well that the
adventurers have not yet started, it would be bad for any
craft caught in the Channel to-day."

As he spoke he looked from the casement. Several
people were seen hurrying towards the beach.

12 Under Drake's Flag

" Something is the matter, lads; maybe a ship is driving
on the rocks even now."

Seizing their hats and cloaks, the party sallied out and
hurried down to the shore. There they saw a large ship
driving in before the wind into the bay. She was making
every effort that seamanship could suggest to beat clear of
the head, but the sailors saw at once that her case was
hopeless.

" She will go on the Black Shoal, to a certainty," the
old sailor said, "and then, may God have mercy on their
souls!"

"Can we do nothing to help them?" a woman standing
near asked.

" No, no," the sailor said; " we could not launch a boat
in the teeth of this tremendous sea. All we can do is to
look out and throw a line to any who may be washed
ashore on a spar when she goes to pieces."

Presently a group of men, whose dress belonged to the
upper class, moved down through the street to the beach.

"Aye! there is Mr. Trevelyan," said the sailor, "and
the gentleman beside him is Captain Drake himself."

The group moved on to where the fishermen were stand
ing.

" Is there no hope," they asked, " of helping the ship?"

The seamen shook their heads.

"You will see for yourself, Master Drake, that no boat
could live in such a sea as this."

"It could not put out from here," the Captain said;
"but if they could lower one from the ship, it might live
until it got into the breakers."

"Aye, aye," said a sailor; "but there is no lowering a
boat from a ship which has begun to beat on the Black
Shoal."

The Wreck on the Devon Coast 13

"Another minute and she will strike," the old sailor
said.

All gazed intently at the ship. The whole population
of the village were now on the shore, and were eager
to render any assistance, if it were possible. In another
minute or two a general cry announced that the ship had
struck. Rising high on a wave she came down with a
force which caused her mainmast at once to go over the
side, another lift on the next sea and then high and fast
she was jammed on the rocks of the Black Shoal. The
distance from shore was but small, not more than three
hundred yards, and the shouts of the sailors on board
could be heard in the storm.

" Why does not one of them jump over with a rope?"
Captain Drake said impatiently. " Are the men all cowards,
or can none of them swim? It would be easy to swim
from that ship to the shore, while it is next to impossible
for anyone to make his way out through these breakers.
Is there no one who can reach her from here?" he said,
looking round.

"No one among us, your honour," the old sailor said;
"few here can keep themselves up in the water in a calm
sea, but if man or boy could swim through that surf, it is
the lad who is just coming down from behind us. The
' Otter ', as we call him, for he seems to be able to live in
water as well as on land."

The lad of whom they were speaking was a bright-faced
boy of some fifteen years of age. He was squarely built,
and his dress differed a little from that of the fisher lads
standing on the beach.

" Who is he?" asked Captain Drake.

" He is the son of the schoolmaster here, a learned man,
and they do say one who was once wealthy. The lad

14 Under Drake's Flag

himself would fain go to sea, but his father keeps him
here. It is a pity, for he is a bold boy, and would make a
fine sailor."

The " Otter ", as he had been called, had now come
down to the beach, and, with his hands shading his eyes
from the spray, sheets of which the wind carried along
with blinding force, he gazed at the ship and the sea with
a steady intentness.

" I think I can get out to her," he said to the fisher
men.

"It is madness, boy," Captain Drake said. "There
are few men, indeed, so far as I know, in these climes —
I talk not of the heathens of the Western Islands — who
could swim through a breaking sea like yonder."

"I think I can do it," the boy said quietly. "I have
been out in as heavy seas before, and if one does but
choose one's time, and humour them a bit, the waves are
not much to be feared after all. Get me the light line,"
he said to the sailors, "and I will be off at once." So
saying he carelessly threw off his clothes. The fishermen
brought a light line, one end they fastened round his
shoulders, and with a cheerful goodbye he ran down to
the water's edge. The sea was breaking with tremendous
violence, and the chance of the lad's getting out through
the breakers appeared slight indeed. He watched, how
ever, quietly for three or four minutes, when a wave larger
than usual broke on the beach. Following it out he stood
knee- deep till the next great wave advanced, then with
a plunge he dived in beneath it. It seemed an age before
he was again seen, and Captain Drake expressed his fear
that his head must have been dashed against a rock beneath
the water. But the men said, " He dives like a duck, sir,
and has often frighted us by the time he keeps under

The Wreck on the Devon Coast 15

water. You will see he will come up beyond the second
line of waves."

It seemed an age to the watchers before a black spot
appeared suddenly beyond the foaming line of breakers.
There was a general shout of " There he is!" But they
had scarce time to note the position of the swimmer
when he again disappeared. Again and again he came
up, each time rapidly decreasing the distance between
himself and the shipwrecked vessel, and keeping his head
above the waves for a few seconds only at each appear
ance.

The people in the vessel were watching the progress of
the lad with attention and interest even greater than was
manifested by those on shore, and as he approached the
ship, which already showed signs of breaking up, a line
was thrown to him. He caught it, but instead of holding
on and being lifted to the ship, he fastened the light rope
which he had brought out to it, and made signs to them to
haul.

"Fasten a thicker rope to it," he shouted, "and they
will haul it in from the shore." It would have been no
easy matter to get on board the ship; so, having done his
work, the lad turned to make his way back to the shore.
A thick rope was fastened at once by those of the crew
who still remained on the deck of the vessel to the lighter
one, and those on shore began to pull it rapidly in, but
ere the knotted joint reached the shore a cry from all
gathered on the beach showed that the brave attempt of
the "Otter" had been useless. A tremendous sea had
struck the ship, and in a moment it broke up, and a number
of floating fragments alone showed where a fine vessel had
a few minutes before floated on the sea.

The lad paused in his course towards the s4iore, and,

16 Under Drake's Flag

looking round, endeavoured to face the driving wind and
spray in hopes that he might see among the fragments of
the wreck someone to whom his assistance might be of
use. For a time he could see no signs of a human being
among the floating masses of wreck, and indeed he was
obliged to use great caution in keeping away from these,
as a blow from any of the larger spars might have been
fatal. Presently close to him he heard a short muffled
bark, and looking round saw a large dog with a child in its
mouth. The animal, which was of the mastiff breed,
appeared already exhausted. The Otter looked hastily
round, and seeing a piece of wreck of suitable size he
seized it, and with some difficulty succeeded in bringing
it close to the dog. Fortunately the spar was a portion
of one of the yards, and still had a quantity of rope con
nected to it. He now took hold of the child's clothes, the
dog readily yielding up the treasure he had carried, seeing
that the newcomer was likely to afford better assistance
than himself. In a few moments the child was fastened to
the spar, and the Otter began steadily to push it towards
the shore, the dog swimming alongside, evidently much
relieved at getting rid of his burden. When he neared
the line of breakers the lad waved his hand as a sign
to them to prepare to rush forward and lend a hand
when th« spar approached. He then paddled forward
quietly, and keeping just outside the line of the breakers
waved to those on shore to throw, if possible, a rope.
Several attempts were made to hurl a stone, fastened to
the end of a light line, within his reach.

After many failures he at last caught the line. This
he fastened to the spar, and signalled to those on shore
to pull it in, then side by side with the dog he followed.
Looking round behind him he watched a great breaker

(162)

The Wreck on the Devon Coast 17

rolling in, and, as before, dived as it passed over his
and rode forward on the swell towards the shore. Then
there was a desperate struggle: at one moment his feet
touched the ground, at another he was hauled back and
tossed into the whirling sed; sometimes almost losing his
consciousness, but ever keeping his head cool and striving
steadily to make progress. Several times he was dashed
against the beach with great force, and it was his know
ledge that the only safe way of approaching shore through
a heavy surf is to keep sideways to the waves, arid allow
them to roll one over and over, that he escaped death — for
had he advanced straight towards the shore the Force of
the waves would have rolled him heels-over-head, and
would almost certainly have broken his neck.

At last, just as consciousness was leaving him, and he
thought that he could struggle no more, a hand grasped
his arm. The fishermen, joining hand in hand, had gone
down into the surf, and after many ineffectual efforts had
at last seized him as a retiring wave was carrying hirii out
again for the fifth time. With the consciousness of rescue
all feeling left him, and it was some minutes before he
recovered his senses. His first question was for the safety
of the child on the spar, and he was glad to hear that it
had come to shore without hurt. The dog, too, had been
rolled up the beach, and seized befdre taken off again, but
had broken one of its legs.

The Otter was soon on his feet again, and saying, u I
must make my way home, they will be alarmed about me,'*
was about to turn away when a group of gentlemen stand
ing near advanced.

^You are a fine lad," one of them said to him. "A
fine lad, and an honour to the south of Devonshire. My
name is Francis Drake, and if there be aught that I can

(162) 2

i8 Under Drake's Flag

do for you, now or hereafter, I shall be glad indeed to do
my utmost for so gallant a youth as yourself."

"Oh, sir!" the boy exclaimed, his cheek flushing with
excitement. "If you are Master Francis Drake, will you
let me join your ship for the voyage to the Indies?"

"Ah! my boy," the gentleman said, "you have asked
the only thing, perhaps, which I should feel obliged to
refuse you. Already we have more than our number, and
to avoid the importunity of the many who wish to go,
or of my powerful friends who desired to place sons or
relations in my charge, I have been obliged to swear that
I would take no other sailor in addition to those already
shipped. You are, however, young," he said, as he marked
the change in the boy's face, " and I promise you that if I
come back, and again sail on an expedition like that on
which I now start, that you shall be one of my crew.
What is your name, lad? I hear them call you Otter, and
truly the beast is no better swimmer than you are."

" My name, sir, is Ned Hearne, my father is the school
master here."

"Will he consent, think you, to your taking to a sea
faring life?"

" Methinks he will, sir, he knows that my heart is set
upon it, for he hath often said if I loved my lessons with
one-tenth of the love I bear for the sea, I should make
a good scholar and be a credit to him."

" I will not forget you, lad. Trust me, and when you
hear of my return, fail not to send a reminder, and to
claim a place in my next adventure."

Ned Hearne, delighted at the assurance, ran off at full
speed to the cottage where his father resided at the end of
the village. The dominie, who was an old man, wore the
huge tortoise-shell rimmed spectacles of the time.

The Wreck on the Devon Coast 19

" Wet again," he said, as his son burst into the room in
which he was sitting studying a Greek tome. " Truly thou
earnest the name of which thou art so proud, Otter, hardly.
What tempted thee to go into the water on a day like
this?"

Ned briefly explained what had taken place. The story
was no unusual one, for this was the third time that he
had swum out to vessels on the rocks between Westport
and Plymouth. Then he related to his father how Captain
Francis Drake had spoken to him and praised him, and
how he had promised that, on his next trip to the West
Indies, he would take him with him.

" I would not have you count too much upon that,"
the dominie said dryly. "It is like, indeed, that he may
never come back from this harebrain adventure, and if
he brings home his skin safe, he will, methinks, have
had enough of burning in the sun and fighting the
Spaniards."

"But hath he not already made two or three voyages
thither, father?" the boy asked.

"That is true enough," said his father; " but from what
I gather these were mere trips to spy out the land. This
affair on which he starts now will be, I wot, a very differ
ent matter. "

" How is it, father," the boy said on the following
morning, resuming the conversation from the point which
they were at when he went up to change his wet clothes
the day before, "that when England is at peace with
Spain, our sailors and the Spanish do fight bloodily in the
West Indies?"

"That, my son, is a point upon which the Roman law
telleth us nothing. I have in my shelves some very learned
treatises on war, but in none do I find mention of a state

20 Under Drake's Flag

of things in which two powers at peace at home, do fight
desperately at the extreme end of the earth."

"But, father, do you think it not lawful to kill the
Spaniard, and to take the treasures which he robbeth from
the poor heathen of the West?"

" I know not about lawful, my son, but I see no warrant
whatsoever for it; and as for heathen, indeed, it appears
to me that the attacks upon him do touch very closely
upon piracy upon the high seas. However, as the country
in general appeareth to approve of it, and as it is said that
the queen's most gracious majesty doth gladly hear of the
beating of the Spaniards in those seas, it becometh not me
to question the rights of the case."

"At any rate, father, you would not object when the
time comes for me to sail with Mr. Francis Drake?"

"No, my boy; thou hast never shown any aptitude
whatever for learning. Thou canst read and write, but
beyond that thy knowledge runneth not. Your mind seems
to be set on the water, and when you are not in it you are
on it, therefore it appears to me to be flying in the face of
Providence to try to keep you on shore. Had your poor
mother lived, it would have been a different thing. Her
mind was set upon your becoming a clerk ; but there, one
might as well try to make a silk purse from the ear of
a sow. But I tell you again, count not too much upon
this promise, it may be years before Mr. Francis Drake
may be in a position to keep it."

Had Ned Hearne waited for Captain Drake's second
voyage, he would indeed, as his father had said, have
waited long. Three days after the conversation, however,
a horseman from Plymouth rode into the little village, and
enquired for the house of Master Hearne. Being directed
thither, he rode up in haste to the gate.

The Wreck on the Devon Coast 21

" Here is a letter!" he cried, " for the son of the school
master, who goes by the name of the ' Otter '."

" I am he," Ned cried. " What is it, and who can have
written to me?"

"It is a letter from His Honour the Worshipful Mr.
Francis Drake."

Seizing the letter, Ned broke the seal, read a few lines,
threw his cap into the air with a shout of joy, and rushed
in to his father.

"Father," he said, "Captain Drake has written to
acquaint me that one of the boys in his ship has been
taken ill and cannot go, and that it has pleased him to
appoint me to go in his place, and that I am to be at Ply
mouth in three days at the utmost, bringing with me what
gear I may require for the expedition."

The schoolmaster was a little taken aback at this sudden
prospect of departure, but he had always been wholly
indulgent to his son, and it was not in his nature to refuse
to allow him to avail himself of an opportunity which
appeared to be an excellent one. The danger of these
expeditions was no doubt very great, but the spoils were
in proportion, and there was not a boy or man of the sea
faring population of Devon who would not gladly have
gone with the adventurous captains.

CHAPTER II

Friends and Foes

THREE days after the receipt of the letter, Ned Hearne
stood with his bundle on the quay at Plymouth. Near
him lay a large row-boat from the ships, waiting to take
off the last comers. A little way behind, Captain Francis
Drake and his brother, Captain John Drake, talked with
the notable people of Plymouth, who had come down to
bid them farewell, the more since this was a holiday, being
Whitsun Eve, the 24th May, and all in the town who could
spare time had made their way down to the Hove to watch
the departure of the expedition, for none could say how
famous this might become, or how great deeds would be
accomplished by the two little craft lying there. Each
looker-on thought to himself that it might be that to the
end of his life he should tell his children and his children's
children with pride, "I saw Mr. Drake start for his great
voyage."

Small indeed did the fleet appear in comparison to the
work which it had to do. It was composed of but two
vessels. The first, the Pacha, of seventy tons, carrying
forty -seven men and boys, was commanded by Captain
Francis Drake himself. By her side was the Sinanne, ot
twenty-five tons, carrying twenty-six men and boys, and
commanded by Captain John Drake. This was truly but
a small affair to undertake so great a voyage. In those
days the Spaniards were masters of the whole of South

Friends and Foes 23

America and of the Isles of the West Indies. They had
many very large towns full of troops, and great fleets
armed to carry the treasure which was collected there, to
Spain. It did seem almost like an act of madness that
two vessels, which by the side of those of the Spaniards
were mere cockle-shells, manned in all by less than eighty
men, should attempt to enter a region where they would
be regarded, and rightly, as enemies, and where the hand
of every man would be against them.

Captain Drake and his men thought little of these things.
The success which had attended their predecessors had
inspired the English sailors with a belief in their own
invincibility when opposed to the Spaniards. They looked
to a certain extent upon their mission as a crusade. In
those days England had a horror of Popery, and Spain
was the mainstay and supporter of this religion. The
escape which England had had of having Popery forced
upon it during the reign of Mary, by her spouse, Philip of
Spain, had been a narrow one, and even now it was by no
means certain that Spain would not sooner or later endea
vour to carry out the pretensions of the late queen's hus
band. Then, too, terrible tales had come of the sufferings
of the Indians at the hands of the Spaniards, and it was
certain that the English sailors who had fallen into the
hands of Spain had been put to death with horrible cruelty.
Thus, then, the English sailors regarded the Spaniards as
the enemy of their country, as the enemy of their religion,
and as the enemy of humanity. Besides which, it cannot
be denied that they viewed them as rich men well worth
plundering; and although, when it came to fighting, it is
probable that hatred overbore the thought of gain, it is
certain that the desire for gold was in itself the main
incentive to those who sailed upon these expeditions.

24 Under Drake's Flag

Amid the cheers of the townsfolk the boats pushed off,
Mr. Francis Drake and his brother waving their plumed
hats to the burghers of Plymouth, and the sailors giving a
hurrah as they bent to the oars. Ned Hearne, who had
received a kind word of greeting from Mr. Drake, had
taken his place in the bow of one of the boats, lost in
admiration at the scene, and at the thought that he was
one of this band of heroes who were going out to fight the
Spaniards, and to return laden with countless treasure
wrested from them. At the thought his eyes sparkled,
his blood seemed to dance through his veins. The western
main in those days was g. name almost of enchantment.
Such strange tales had been brought home by the voyagers
who had navigated those seas, of the wonderful trees, the
bright birds, the beauties of nature, the gold and silver,
and the abundance of all precious things, that it was the
dream of every youngster on the seaboard some day to
penetrate to these charmed regions. A week since and
the realization of the dream had appeared beyond his
wildest hopes. Now, almost with the suddenness of a
transformation scene, this had changed, and there was he
on his way out to the Sv)anney a part of the expedition
itself. It was to the Sinanne that he had been allotted,
for it was on board that ship that the boy whose place he
was to take had been seized with illness.

Although but twenty-five tons in burden, the Swanne
made a far greater show than would be made by a craft of
that size in the present day. The ships of the time lay
but lightly on the water, while their hulls were carried up
to a prodigious height, and it is not too much to say that
the portion of the Swanne above water was fully as large
as the hull which we see of a merchantman of four times
her £onnage. Still, even so, it was but a tiny craft to

Friends and Foes 25

cross the Atlantic, and former voyages had been generally
made in larger ships. Mr. Francis Drake, however, knew
what he was about. He considered that laige ships re
quired large crews to be left behind to defend them, that
they drew more water and were less handy, and he resolved
in this expedition he would do no small part of his work
with pinnaces and row-boats, and of these he had three
fine craft now lying in pieces in his hold, ready to fit
together on arriving in the Indies. As they neared the
ships the two boats separated, and Ned soon found him
self alongside of the Swanne. A ladder hung at her side,
and up this Ned followed his captain, for in those days the
strict etiquette that the highest goes last had not been
instituted.

" Master Holyoake," said Mr. John Drake to a big and
powerful-looking man standing near, M this is the new lad,
whose skill in swimmipg and whose courage I told you of
yesternight. He will, I doubt not, be found as willing as
he is brave, and I trust that you will put him in the way
of learning his business as a sailor. It is his first voyage;
he comes on board a green hand, but I doubt not that ere
the voyage be finished he wil} have become a smart young
sailor."

" I will put him through," John Holyoake, sailing master
of the ship, replied, for in those days the sailing master
was the navigator of the ship, and the captain was as
often as not a soldier, who knew nothing whatever about
seamanship. The one sailed tjie ship, the other fought it;
and the admirals were in those days more frequently known
as generals, and held that position on shore. As Ned
looked round the deck he thought that he had never seen
a finer set of sailors. All were picked men, hardy and
experienced, and for the most part young. Some had

26 Under Drake's Flag

made previous voyages to the West Indies, but the greater
portion were new to that country. They looked the men
on whom a captain could rely to the last. Tall and stal
wart, bronzed with the sun, and with a reckless and fear
less expression about them which boded ill to any foes
upon whom they might fall. Although Ned had never
been to sea on a long voyage he had sailed too often in
the fishing boats of his native village to have any qualm
of sea-sickness, or to feel in any degree like a new hand.
He was, therefore, at once assigned to a place and duty.
An hour later the admiral, as Mr. Francis Drake was
called, fired a gun, the two vessels hoisted their broad
sails and turned their heads from shore, and the crews of
both ships gave a parting cheer as they turned their faces
to the south.

As Ned was not in the slightest degree either home-sick
or sea-sick, he at once fell to work, laughing and joking
with the other boys, of whom there were three on board.
He found that their duties consisted of bearing messages,
of hauling any rope to which they were told to fix them
selves, and in receiving, with as good a face as might be,
the various orders, to say nothing of the various kicks,
which might be bestowed upon them by all on board. At
the same time their cheerful countenances showed that
these things, which, when told, sounded a little terrible,
were, in truth, in no way serious.

Ned was first shown where he was to sling his ham
mock, and how; where he was to get his food, and under
whose orders he was specially to consider himself; the
master for the present taking him under his own charge.
For the next ten days, as the vessel sailed calmly along
with a favouring wind, Ned had learned all the names
of the ropes and sails, and their uses; could climb aloft,

Friends and Foes 27

and do his share of the work of the ship; and if not yet a
skilled sailor, was at least on the highroad to become one.
The master was pleased at his willingness and eagerness
to oblige, and he soon became a great favourite of his.
Between the four boys on the ship a good feeling existed.
All had been chosen as a special favour, upon the recom
mendation of one or other of those in authority. Each
of them had made up his mind that one of these days
he too would command an expedition to the West Indies.
Each thought of the glory which he would attain ; and
although in the hearts of many of the elder men in the
expedition the substantial benefits to be reaped stood
higher than any ideas of glory or honour, to the lads,
at least, pecuniary gain exercised no inducement whatever.
They burned to see the strange country, and to gain some
of the credit and glory which would, if the voyage was
successful, attach to each member of the crew. All were
full of fun, and took what came to them in the way of
work so good-temperedly and cheerfully, that the men
soon ceased to give them work for work's sake. They
were, too, a strong and well-built group of boys. Ned
was by a full year the youngest, and by nigh a head
the shortest of them; but his broad shoulders and sturdy
build, and the strength acquired by long practice in swim
ming and rowing, made him their equal.

There were, however, no quarrels among them, and their
strength they agreed to use in alliance, if need be, should
any of the crew make a dead set at one or other of them;
for even in an expedition like this there must be some
brutal as well as many brave men. There were assuredly
two or three, at least, of those on board the Swanne who
might well be called brutal. They were for the most part
old hands, who had lived on board ship half their lives,

$8 Ujider Drake's Flag

had taken part in the slave traffic of Captain Hawkins, and
in the buccaneering exploits of the earlier commanders.
To them the voyage was one in which the lust of gold was
the sole stimulant, and, accustomed to deeds of bloodshed,
what feelings they ever had, had become utterly blunted,
and they needed but the power, to become despotic and
brutal masters.

The chief among these was Giles Taunton, the armourer.
He was a swarthy ruffian, who hid beneath the guise of a
jovial bonhomie a cruel and unfeeling nature. He was ever
ready to cuff and beat the boys on the smallest provoca
tion. They soon gathered together, in a sort of defensive
league, against their common oppressors. All four were
high-spirited lads; the other three, indeed, were sons of
men of substance in Devon, whose fathers had lent funds
to Captain Drake for the carrying out of his great enter
prise. They, therefore, looked but ill on the kicks and
curses which occasionally fell to their lot. One day they
gathered together round the bowsprit, and talked over
what they should do. Gerald Summers, the eldest of the
party, proposed that they should go in a body to Captain
Drake, and complain of the tyranny to which they were
subject. After some talk, however, all agreed that such
a course as this would lower them in the estimation of
the men, and that it would be better to put up with the
ill-treatment than to get the name of tell-tales.

Ned then said to the others: " It seems to me that if we
do but hold together we need not be afraid of this big
bully. If we all declare to each other, and swear that the
first time he strikes one of us we will all set upon him, my
faith on it we shall be able to master him, big as he is;
we are all of good size, and in two years will think our
selves men; therefore it would be shame indeed if the four

Friends and Foes 29

of us could not master bne, however big and sturdy he
may be."

After much consultation it was agreed that this course
should be adopted, and the next day, as Reuben Gale was
passing by Giles, he turned round and struck him on the
head with a broom. The boy gave a long whistle, and in
a moment, to the astonishment of the armourer, the other
three lads rushed up and at once assailed him with fury.
Astonished at such an attack, he struck out at them with
many strange oaths. Gerald he knocked down, biit Ned
leaped on his back from behind, arid the other two, closing
with him) rolled him on to the deck; then, despite of his
efforts, they pommelled him until his face was swollen and
bruised, and his eyes nearly cldsed.

Some of the men of his own sort, standing by, would
fain have interfered; but the better disposed of the crew,
who had seen with disgust the Conduct of the armourer
and his mates to the boys, held them back, and said that
none should come between. Just as the boys drew off,
and allowed the furious armourer to rise to his feet,
Captain John Drake, attracted by the unusual noise,
came from his cabin.

" What is this?" he asked.

" These young wild cats have leapt upon me," said
Giles Taunton furiously, " and have beaten me nigh to
death, but I will have my turn; they will see, and bitterly
shall they have cause to regret what they have done."

"We have been driver! almost weary of our lives, sir,
with the foul and rough conduct of this man, and of some
of his mates," Gerald said; "we did not like to come to tell
you of it; and to gain the name of carry-tales ; but we had
resolved among ourselves at last that, whoever struck one
of us. the whole should set updfl him. To-day we have

30 Under Drake's Flag

carried it out, and we have shown Giles Taunton that we
are more than a match for one man at any rate."

" Four good-sized dogs, if they are well managed," said
Captain John Drake, "will pull down a lion, and the best
thing that the lion can do is to leave them alone. I am
sorry to hear, Master Taunton, that you have chosen to
ill-treat these lads, who are indeed the sons of worthy
men, and are not the common kind of ship-boys. I am
sure that my brother would not brook such conduct, and
I warn you that if any complaint again on this head
reaches me I shall lay it before him."

With angry mutterings the armourer went below.

" We have earned a bitter foe," Ned said to his friends,
" and we had best keep our eyes well open. There is very
little of the lion about Master Taunton. He is strong
indeed; but if it be true that the lion has a noble heart,
and fights his foes openly, methinks he resembles rather
the tiger, who is prone to leap suddenly upon his ene
mies."

"Yes, indeed, he looked dark enough," Gerald said,
"as he went below; and if looks could have killed us,
we should not be standing here alive at present."

"It is not force that we need fear now, but that he
will do us some foul turn ; at all events we are now
forewarned, and if he plays us a scurvy trick it will be
our own faults."

For several days the voyage went on quietly and without
adventure. They passed at a distance the Portuguese isle
of Madeira, lying like a cloud on the sea. The weather
now had become warm and very fair, a steady wind blew,
and the two barks kept along at a good pace. All sorts
of creatures strange to the boys were to be seen in the
sea. Sometimes there was a spout of a distant whale.

Friends and Foes 31

Thousands of flying-fish darted from the water, driven
thence by the pursuit of their enemies beneath,' while
huge flocks of gulls and other birds hovered over the
sea, chasing the flying-fish or pouncing down upon the
shoals of small fry whose splashings whitened the surface
of the water, as if a sandbank had lain below it.

Gradually as the time went on the heat increased.
Many of the crew found themselves unable to sleep
below, for in those days there was but little thought of
ventilation. The boys were among these, for the heat
and the confinement were to them especially irksome.
One day the wind had fallen almost to a calm, and the
small boat had been lowered to enable the carpenter to
do some repair to the ship's side, where a seam leaked
somewhat when the waves were high. When night came
on and all was quiet Ned proposed to the others that they
should slip down the rope over the stern into the boat
which was towing behind, where they could sleep undis
turbed by the tramp of the sentry or the call to pull at
ropes and trim sails.

The idea was considered a capital one, and the boys
slid down into the boat, where, taking up their quarters
as comfortably as they could, they, after a short chat,
curled themselves up and were soon sound asleep, in
tending to be on board again with the earliest gleam of
morn.

When they awoke, however, it was with a start and
a cry. The sun was already high, but there were no
signs whatever of the ship; they floated alone in the
mid-ocean. With blank amazement they looked at each
other.

"This is a stroke of misfortune indeed," Gerald said.
" We have lost the ship and I fear our lives as well.

32 Uiidef Drake's Flag

What do you say, * Otter'?" for the lad's nickname had
come Oil board ship with him and he was generally known
by it.

" It seems to me," said Ned, "that our friend the
armourer has done us this bad turn. I am sure that the
rope was well tied, for I was the first who slipped down
it, and I looked at the knot well before I went over the
side and trusted my weight to it. He must have seen
us, and as soon as he thought we were fairly asleep must
have loosened the knot and cast us adrift. What on
earth is to be done now?"

" I should think," Gerald said, " that it will not be
long before the ship comes back for us. The boat is
sure to be missed in the morning, for the carpenter will
be wanting it to go over the side; we, too, will be
missed, for the captain will be wanting his flagon of
wine soon after the day has dawned."

" But think you," Tom Tressilis said, "that the captain
will turn back on his voyage for us?"

"Of that I think there is no doubt," Gerald said; " the
only question is as to the finding us, but I should say that
of that there is little fear; the wind is light, the ship was
not making fast through the water, and will not be more
than fifty miles, at most, away when she turns on her
heel and comes to look for us. I expect that Master
Taunton knew well enough that we should be picked up
again, btit he guessed that the admiral would not be
pleased at losing a day by our freak, and that the matter
is not likely to improve the favour in which we may stand
with him and his brother."

" It is going to be a terrible hot day," Ned said, "and
with the sun above our heads and no shade, and not so
much as a drop of water, the sooner we are picked up the

Friends and Foes 33

more pleasant it will be, even if we all get a touch of the
rope's end for our exploit."

All day the boys watched anxiously. Once they saw
the two vessels sailing backward on their track, but the
current had drifted the boat, and the ships passed fully
eight miles miles away to windward of them, and thus
without seeing them. This caused the boys, courageous
as they were, almost to despair.

" If," argued Gerald, " they pass us in the daylight,
our chance is small indeed that they will find us at night.
They will doubtless sail back till dusk and then judge that
they have missed us, or that we have in some way sunk,
then putting their heads to the west they will continue
their voyage. If we had oars or a sail we might make
a shift to pull the boat into the track they are following,
which would give us a chance of being picked up when
they again turn west, but as we have neither one nor the
other we are helpless indeed."

"I do not think," Ned said, "that Captain John or his
brother are the men to leave us without a great effort, and
methinks that when they have sailed over the ground to
the point where, at the utmost, we must have parted from
them, they will lie by through the night and search back
again to-morrow."

And so it proved.

On the morrow about midday the boys beheld one of
the ships coming up nearly in a line behind them, while
the other, some six miles away to leeward, was keeping
abreast of her.

"They are quartering the ground like hounds," Gerald
said, " and thanks to their care and thoughtfulness we are
saved this time."

By the time that, three hours later, the ship, which was

(162) 3

34 Under Drake's Flag

the Pacha, came alongside, the boys were suffering terribly
from the heat and thirst; for thirty-six hours no drop of
water had passed their lips and the sun had blazed down
upon them with terrible force, therefore when the vessel
hauled her course and lay by for a boat to be lowered to
pick them up, their plight was so bad a one that Captain
Francis, although sorely vexed at having lost near two
days of his voyage, yet felt that they had been amply
punished for their escapade.

CHAPTER III

On the Spanish Main

THE four boys, upon gaining the Packets deck, were taken
below, and after drink and food had been given them were
called to the captain's cabin. He spoke to them gravely
and enquired how it was that they had all got adrift
together. They told him the circumstances, and said that
they thought there was no chance of any mishap occur
ring; the knot was well fastened, the night was calm, and
though they regretted much the pains and trouble which
they had given and the delay to which they had put the
fleet, yet it did not appear to them, they said frankly, that
they had been so very much to blame, as they could hardly
have believed that the boat would have broken afloat;
and indeed, Ned said plainly, they believed that it was
not the result of chance, but that an enemy had done
them an evil turn.

"Why think you so?" Captain Drake said sharply.
" How can boys like you have an enemy?"

Gerald then detailed the account of their trouble with
Master Taunton.

"He is a rough man," Captain Drake said, "and a
violent man maybe, but he is useful and brave. How
ever, I will have reason with him. Of course it is a mere
suspicion, but I will speak to my brother."

When the boat had first come in sight the Pacha had

35

36 Under Drake's Flag

made the signal to the Swanne that the boys were found,
and that she was to keep her course, drawing gradually
alongside.

Before dark the vessels were within hailing distance,
and Captain Drake, lowering a boat, went himself on
board the Swanne with the four lads. Captain John was
at the top of the ladder and was about to rate them
soundly. Captain Francis said, " Let us talk together,
John, first;" and he repaired with him to his cabin, while
the crew swarmed round the boys to gather an account
of how they got adrift.

Then Captain John appeared at the door of his cabin
and called for Master Taunton, who went in and remained
for some time in converse with the two captains. Then
he came out, looking surly and black, and Captain Francis
soon after issued out with his brother, walked round the
ship, said a few cheery words to all the crew, and with a
parting laugh and word of advice to the boys to be more
careful where they slept in future, descended the side and
went off to his ship again.

Opinions were much mingled on board the Swanne as
to whether the slipping of the knot had been the effect
of accident or of an evil turn ; however, the boys said
little about it, and endeavoured, so far as might be, to
let it pass as an accident. They felt that the matter be
tween themselves and Master Taunton had already gone
too far for their safety and comfort. They doubted not
that he had been reprimanded by the admiral as well as
by Captain John, and that they had earned his hatred,
which, although it might slumber for a while, was likely
to show itself again when a chance might occur. Not
wishing to inflame further his fury against them, they
abstained from giving such a complexion to their tale as

On the Spanish Main 37

might seem to cast a suspicion upon him. Nevertheless,
there was a strong feeling amongst many of the crew that
Master Taunton must have had a hand in the casting
adrift of the boys, or that if he did not himself do it, it
had been done by one of the party who always worked
with him.

Whatever the feelings of Giles Taunton might be, he
kept them to himself. He now never interfered with the
boys by word or deed, working sullenly and quietly at
his craft as armourer. The boys felt their lives much
lightened thereby, and now thoroughly enjoyed' the voy
age. Although as boys it was not a part of their duty
to go aloft, which was done by the regular sailors who
were hired for the purpose, yet they spent no small part
of their time when not engaged — and their duties truly
were but nominal — in going aloft, sliding down the ropes,
and learning to be thoroughly at home among the sails.
Every day too there would be practices with arms.

It was of the utmost importance that each man should
be able to use sword and axe with the greatest skill; and
on board each ship those who were best skilled would
exercise and give lessons to those who were less prac
tised with their arms, and, using wooden clubs in place
of boarding-axes, they would much belabour each other,
to the amusement of the lookers-on. The boys were
most assiduous at this kind of work. It was their highest
ambition to become good swordsmen and to have a chance
of distinguishing themselves against the Spaniards; and
so they practised diligently with point and edge. The
knowledge of single-stick and quarter-staff still lingered
in the country parts of England. They had all already
some skill with these, and picked up fast the use of the
heavier and more manly arms.

38 Under Drake's Flag

It was the end of July before they sighted land. Great
was the delight of all, for, cooped up in what were after
all but narrow quarters, they longed for a sight of the
green and beautiful forests of which they had heard so
much. They were still far from the destination which
the admiral had marked as his base of operations. They
cruised along for days, with the land often in sight, but
keeping for the most part a long distance out, for they
feared that the knowledge of their coming might be carried
by the natives to the Spaniards in the towns, and that
such preparations might be made as would render their
journey fruitless. Near, however, to some of the smaller
islands which were known to be uninhabited by Spaniards
the vessels went closely, and one day dropped anchor in
a bay.

They observed some natives on the shore, but the white
men had so bad a name, caused by the cruelty of the
Spaniards, that these withdrew hastily from sight. The
captain, however, had a boat lowered, which, pulling
towards shore, and waving a white flag in token of
amity, met with no resistance. There were on board
some who could speak Spanish, and one of these shouted
aloud to the Indians to have no fear for that they were
friends, and haters of the Spaniards, whereupon the natives
came out from the woods and greeted them.

They were a fine race of men, but gentle and timid in
their demeanour. They were copper in colour, and wore
headdresses of bright feathers, but the men had but little
other clothing, of which indeed in such a climate there
is but slight necessity. In exchange for some trifles from
the ship they brought many baskets of fruits such as none
of those who had fresh come from England had ever before
seen.

On the Spanish Main 39

Great was the joy on board ship, especially among the
four boys, at the profusion of strange fruits, and they
were seen seated together eating pineapples, bananas,
and many other things of which they knew not so much
as the name, but which they found delicious indeed after
so long a voyage upon salted food.

Then, sailing on, they dropped anchor in the bay which
Captain Drake had himself christened during his last
voyage Port Pheasant, for they had killed many of this
kind of bird there. Here the admiral purposed waiting
for a while to refresh the crews and to put the pinnaces
together. Accordingly the anchors were put out, and all
was made snug. A boat's crew was sent on shore to see
that all was safe, for there was no saying where the
Spaniards might be lurking. They returned with a great
plate of lead which they had found fastened to a tree
close to the water's edge. Upon it were these words:
" Captain Drake, if it is your fortune to come into this
part, make haste away, for the Spaniards which were
with you here last year have betrayed the place and taken
away all that you left here. I departed hence on this
present 7th July, 1572. Your very loving friend, John
Garrett."

" I would I had been here a few days earlier," Captain
Drake said when he read this notice, "for John Garrett
would assuredly have joined us, and his aid would have
been no slight assistance in the matter in which we are
about to engage. However, it will not do to despise his
caution ; therefore, lest we be attacked while on shore by
the Spaniards we will even make a fort, and we shall be
able to unload our stores and put our pinnaces together
without fear of interruption."

The crew were now landed and set to work with hatchet

40 Under Drake's Flag

and bill to clear a plot of ground. Three-quarters of an
acre was after three days' work cleared, and the trees
were cast outwards and piled together in such form as
to make a sort of wall 30 feet high round it. This hard
work done, most of the crew were allowed a little liberty,
the carpenters and experienced artificers being engaged in
putting the three pinnaces together.

The boys, in pairs, for all could never obtain leave
together, rambled in the woods, full of admiration for the
beauties of nature. Huge butterflies flitted about upon the
brilliant flowers, long trailing creepers, rich with blossom,
hung on the trees. Here and there, as they passed along,
snakes slipped away among the undergrowth, and these in
truth the boys were as ready to leave alone as the reptiles
were to avoid them, for they were told that it was certain
death to be bitten by these creatures. Most of all the
boys admired the little birds, which indeed it was hard for
them to believe not to be butterflies, so small were they,
so rapid their movements, and so brilliant their colour.

On the seventh day from landing the pinnaces were
finished, and the vessels being anchored near the shore,
the crews went on board for the last time preparatory to
making their start the next day. There was one tall and
bright-faced sailor with whom the boys had struck up a
great friendship. He had sailed before with Captain
Drake, and as the evening was cool and there was nought
to do they begged him to tell them of his former visits
in the Caribbean Seas.

"My first," he said, "was the worst and might well
have been my last. Captain John Hawkins was our
captain, a bold man and a good sailor, but not gentle
as well as brave, as is our good Captain Francis. Our
fleet was a strong one. The admiral's ship, the Jesus, of

On the Spanish Main 41

Lubeck, was 700 tons. Then there were the smaller craft,
the Minion, Captain Hampton, in which I myself sailed;
the William and John of Captain Boulton ; the fudith with
Captain Francis Drake, and two little ships besides. We
sailed later in the year, it was the 2nd October, five years
back, that is 1567. We started badly, for a storm struck
us off Finisterre, the ships separated, and some boats were
lost. We came together at Cape de Verde, and there we
tried to get slaves, for it was part of the object of our
voyage to buy slaves on the coast of Africa and sell them
to the Spaniards here. It was a traffic for which I myself
had but little mind, for though it be true that these black
fellows are a pernicious race, given to murder and to
fightings of all kinds among themselves, yet are they
human beings, and it is, methinks, cruel to send them
beyond the seas into slavery so far from their homes and
people. But it was not for me, a simple mariner, to
argue the question with our admirals and captains, and
I have heard many worshipful merchants are engaged in
the traffic.

" However that be, methinks that our good Captain
Francis did likewise turn himself against this kind of
traffic in human flesh, for although he has been three
times since in these regions he has never again taken a
hand in it. With much to do at Cape de Verde, we
succeeded in getting a hundred and fifty men, but not
without much resistance from the natives, who shot their
arrows at us and wounded many, and most of those who
were wounded did die of lockjaw, for the arrows had been
smeared in some poisonous stuff. Then we went farther
down the coast and took in two hundred more. Coasting
still farther down to St. Jorge de Mina, we landed, and
Captain Hawkins found that the negro king there was

42 Under Drake's Flag

at war with an enemy a little farther inland. He besought
our assistance and promised us plenty of slaves if we
would go there and storm the place with him. Captain
Hawkins agreed cheerfully enough, and set off with a
portion of his crews to assist the king. The enemy fought
well, and it was only after a very hard fight on our part
and a loss of many men that we took the town. Methinks
the two hundred and fifty slaves which we took there were
dearly paid for, and there was much grumbling among
the ships at the reckless way in which our admiral had
risked our lives for meagre gain. It is true that these
slaves would sell at a high price, yet none of us looked
upon money gained in that way quite as we do upon
treasure taken in fair fight. In the one case we traffic
with the Spaniards, who are our natural enemies, and it
is repugnant to a Christian man to hand over even these
poor negroes to such wilful masters as these ; in the other
we are fighting for our queen and country. The Spaniards
are the natural enemies of all good Protestants, and every
ship we see and every treasure bag we capture does
something to pare the nails of that fierce and haughty
power.

" Having filled up our hold with the slaves which we
had captured at St. Jorge de Mina, we turned our back
upon the African coast and sailed to the West Indies.
At Rio de Hacha, the first port at which we touched,
the people did not wish to trade with us; but the admiral
was not the man to allow people to indulge in fancies of
this kind. We soon forced them to buy or to sell that
which we chose and not what they had a fancy for. Sail
ing along we were caught in a storm, and in searching
for the port of St. Juan d'Ulloa, where we hoped to refit,
we captured three ships. In the port we found twelve

On the Spanish Main 43

other small craft, but these we released, and sent some
of them to Mexico to ask that victuals and stores might
be sent.

"The next day thirteen great ships appeared off the
harbour. In them was the Viceroy of Mexico. We had
then only the Jesus, the Minion of 100 tons, and the Judith
of 50 tons, and this big fleet was large enough to have
eaten us, but Captain Hawkins put a good face on it and
sailed out to meet them, waiting at the mouth of the
harbour. Here he told them haughtily that he should
not allow their fleet to enter save on his terms. I doubt
not that Hawkins would have been glad enough to have
made off if he could have done so, for what with the sale
of the slaves and the vessels we had captured, we had
now ;£i, 800,000 in silver and gold on board of the ships.
The Spanish admiral accepted the terms which Captain
Hawkins laid down and most solemnly swore to observe
them.

"So with colours flying, both fleets sailed into the
harbour together. It is true, however, that the man
who places faith in a Spaniard is a fool, and so it proved
to us. No sooner had they reached the port than they
began to plot secretly among themselves how to fall upon
us; even then, though they had thirteen big ships, the
smallest of which was larger than the Jesus, they feared
to attack us openly. Numbers of men were set to work
by them on the shore secretly to get up batteries by which
they might fire into us, while a great ship, having five
hundred men on board, was moored close alongside the
Minion. I remember well talking the matter over with
Jack Boscowan, who was boatswain on board, and we
agreed that this time we had run into an ugly trap, and
that we did not see our way out of it. Englishmen can,

44 Under Drake's Flag

as all the world knows, lick the Spaniards when they are
but as one to five, but when there are twenty of the
Dons to one of us it is clear that the task is a hard one.
What made it worse was that we were in harbour. At
sea our quickness in handling our ships would have made
us a match for the Spanish fleet, but at anchor and with
the guns of the port commanding us we did not truly see
how we were to get out of it.

" The fight began by the Spaniards letting their big ship
drift alongside the Minion, when suddenly five hundred
men leapt out on our decks. We were beaten below in
no time, for we were scarce prepared for so sudden an on
slaught. There, however, we defended ourselves stoutly,
firing into the hull of the ship alongside, and defending
our ports and entrances from the Spaniards. For a while
our case seemed desperate. The Jesus was hard at work
too, and when she had sunk the ship of the Spanish ad
miral, she came up, and gave a broadside into the ship
alongside of us. Her crew ran swiftly back to her, and
we with much rejoicing poured on deck again and began
to pay them hotly for their sudden attack upon us. It
was a great fight, and one that would have done your
heart good, to see the three English ships, two of them
so small as to be little more than boats, surrounded by a
whole fleet of Spaniards, while from on shore the guns
of the forts played upon us. Had it not been for those
forts, I verily believe that we should have destroyed the
Spanish fleet. Already another large vessel had followed
the example of their admiral's ship and had gone to the
bottom. Over five hundred and forty of their sailors
we had, as they have themselves admitted, slain out
right.

" We were faring well, and had begun to hope that we

On the Spanish Main 45

might get to find our way out of the toils, when a cry
came from the lookout, who said that the Jesus was hoist
ing signals of distress, and that he feared she was sinking.
Close as she was lying to a battery, and surrounded by
enemies, our bold captain did not hesitate a minute, but
sailed the Minion through a crowd of enemies close to
the Jesus. You should have heard the cheer that the two
crews gave each other; it rose above all the noise of the
battle, and would assuredly have done your heart good.
The fesus was sinking fast, and it was as much as they
could do to tumble into the boats and to row hastily to
our side. We should have saved them all, but the
Spaniards, who dared not lay us aboard, and who were
in no slight degree troubled by the bravery with which
we had fought, set two of their great ships on fire, and
launched them down upon us, preferring to lose two of
their own ships for the sake of capturing or destroying
our little bark. The sight of the ships coming down in
flames shook the hearts of our men more than all the
fury of the Spaniards had been able to do, and without
waiting for orders they turned the ship's head for the
mouth of the port.

" The admiral, who had just come on board, cursed and
shouted when he saw what was being done; but the
panic of the fireships got the better of the men, and we
made off, firing broadsides at the Spaniards' fleet as we
passed through them, and aided by the little Judith, which
stuck to us through the whole of the fight. When we
cooled down and came to think of it, we were in no slight
degree ashamed of our desertion of our comrades in the
Jesus. Fortunately the number so left behind was not
large; but we knew that according to their custom the
Spaniards would put all to death, and so indeed it after-

46 Under Drake's Flag

wards turned out, many of them being dispatched with
horrible tortures.

"This terrible treatment of the prisoners caused, when
it was known, great indignation, and although Queen
Elizabeth did not declare war with Spain, from that time
she gave every countenance she could to the adventurers
who waged war on their own account against her.

"The Minion suffered severely, packed close as she
was with all her own crew and a great part of that of
the Jesus, vast numbers of whom were wounded. How
ever, at length a hundred were at their own request
landed and left to shift for themselves, preferring to run
the risk of Indians, or even of Spaniards, to continue any
longer amid the horrors on board the ship. I myself,
boys, was not one of that number, and came back to
England in her. Truly it was the worst voyage that I
ever made, for though fortune was for a time good to us,
and we collected much money, yet in the end we lost all,
and hardly escaped with our lives. It has seemed to me
that this bad fortune was sent as a punishment upon us
for carrying off the negroes into slavery. Many others
thought the same, and methinks that that was also the
opinion of our present good admiral."

"Did you come out with him in his further voyages
here?" Ned asked.

" I was with him in the Dragon two years ago when
with the Sioanne she came here. Last year I sailed with
him in the Sivanne alone."

" You did not have any very stirring adventures?"

" No, we were mainly bent on exploring, but for all
that we carried off many prizes, and might had we been
pilgrims have bought farms in Devonshire, and settled
down on our share of the prize money; but there, that is

On the Spanish Main 47

not the way with sailors. Quick come, quick go, and not
one in a hundred that I have ever heard of, however much
he may have taken as his share of prizes, has ever kept
it or prospered greatly therefrom."

It was now evening and many of the men had betaken
themselves to the water for a swim. The heat had been
great all day, and as it was their last, they had been
pressed at work to get the stores which had been landed,
again on board ship, and to finish all up ready for the
division of the party next day.

" I do not care for bathing here," Ned said in reply to
a sailor, who asked him why he too did not join in the
sport. " I confess that I have a dread of those horrible
sharks of which we have heard so much, and whose black
fins we see from time to time."

" I should have thought," said the harsh, sneering
voice of Giles Taunton, "that an Otter would have been
a match for a shark. The swimmers of the South Isles,
and indeed the natives here attack the sharks without
fear. I should have thought that anyone who prides him
self, as you do, upon swimming, would have been equally
willing to encounter them."

" I do not know that I do pride myself on my swimming,
Giles Taunton," Ned said composedly; " at any rate no
one has ever heard me speak of such abilities as I may
have in that way. As to the natives, they have seen each
other fight with sharks, and know how the matter is gone
about. If I were to be present a few times when such
strife takes place, it may be that I should not shirk from
joining in the sport; but knowing nothing whatever of
the method pursued, or of the manner of attack, I should
be worse than a fool were I to propose to venture my life
in such a sport."

48 Under Drake's Flag

Many sailors who were standing round approved of
what Ned said.

"Aye, aye, lad," one said, " no one would think of
making his first jump across the spot where he might be
dashed to pieces. Let a man learn to jump on level
ground, and then when he knows his powers he may go
across a deep chasm."

By this time a good many of the men were out of the
water, when suddenly there arose the cry of, "Shark!"
from the lookout on the poop. There was a great rush
for the ship, and the excitement on board was nearly as
great as that in the water. Ned quietly dropped off his
jacket and his shoes, and seizing a short boarding pike,
waited to see what would come of it. It chanced that
his friends, the other boys, were farther out than the men,
having with the ardour of youth engaged themselves in
races, regardless of the admonition that had frequently
been given them to keep near the ship, for the terror of
these water beasts was very great.

The men all gained the ship in safety, but the shark,
which had come up from a direction in which it would cut
them off, was clearly likely to arrive before the boys
could gain the side. At first it seemed indeed that their
fate was sealed; but the shark, who in many respects
resembles a cat with a mouse, and seems to prefer to
trifle with its victim to the last, allowed them to get
close to the ship, although by rapid swimming it could
easily have seized them before. The nearest to it as it
approached the ship was Tom Tressilis, who was not so
good a swimmer as the others; but he had swum lustily
and with good heart, though his white face showed how
great the effect of the danger was upon him. He had
not spoken a word since the shark first made its appear-

On the Spanish Main 49

ance. As he struck despairingly to gain the ship, from
which the sailors were already casting him ropes, his
eye caught that of Ned, who cried to him cheerily,
" Keep up your spirits, Tom; I will be with you."
As the huge fish swept along at a distance of some four
yards from the side of the ship, and was already turning
on its back, opening its huge mouth to seize its victim,
Ned dived head foremost from the ship on to him. So
great was the force and impetus with which he struck
the creature, that it was fairly driven sideways from its
course, missing by the nearest shave the leg of Tom
Tressilis. Ned himself was half stunned by the force
with which his head had struck the fish, for a shark is
not so soft a creature to jump against as he had imagined;
however, he retained consciousness enough to grasp
at the fin of the shark, to which he held on for half a
minute. By this time the shark was recovering from the
effects of the sudden blow, and Ned was beginning to
be able to reflect. In a moment he plunged the half pike
deep into the creature's stomach. Again and again he
repeated the stroke, until the shark, rolling over in his
agony and striking furiously with his tail, shook Ned
from his hold. He instantly dived beneath the water and
came up at a short distance. The shark was still striking
the water furiously, the sailors on board were throwing
down upon him shot, pieces of iron, and all sorts of
missiles, and some of the best archers were hastily bring
ing their bows to the side. The shark caught sight of
his opponent and instantly rushed at him. Ned again
dived just before the creature reached him, and rising
under him inflicted some more stabs with the pike, then
he again swam off, for he was in no slight fear that he
might be struck by his friends on board ship, of whose

50 Under Drake's Flag

missiles indeed he was more in dread than of the shark
himself.

When he rose at a short distance from the shark he
was again prepared for a rush on the part of his enemy,
but the great fish had now had enough of it. He was
still striking the water, but his movements were becoming
slower, for he was weakened by the loss of blood from
the stabs he had received from below, and from the
arrows, many of which were now buried to the goose-
quill in him. In a minute or two he gradually turned on
one side and floated with his white belly in the air. A
shout broke from the crew of the Swanne and also of the
Pacha, who had been attracted to the side by the cries.
When he saw that the battle was over, and that the enemy
had been vanquished without loss of life or hurt to any,
Ned speedily seized one of the ropes and climbed up the
side of the ship, where he was, you may be sure, received
with great cheering, and shouts of joy and approval.

You are a fine lad," Captain John Drake said, "and
your name of Otter has indeed been well bestowed. You
have saved the life of your comrades; and I know that
my old friend, Mr. Frank Tressilis, his father, will feel
indebted indeed to you when he comes to learn how
gallantly you risked your life to preserve that of his
son."

Ned said that he saw no credit in the action, and that
he was mightily glad to have had an opportunity of learn
ing to do that which the negroes thought nothing of, for
that it shamed him to think that these heathens would
venture their lives boldly against sharks, while he, an
English boy, although a good swimmer, and not he hoped
wanting in courage, was yet afraid to encounter these
fierce brutes.

On the Spanish Main 51

This incident acted, as might be expected, as a fresh
bond between the boys, and as it also secured for Ned
the cordial good-will of the sailors, they were in future
free from any persecution at the hands of Master Taunton
or of his fellows.

CHAPTER IV

An Unsuccessful Attack

IT should have been said in its proper place, that upon
the day after the arrival of the Pacha and Sivanne in
Pheasant Bay a barque named the Isle of Wight > com
manded by James Rause, with thirty men on board, many
of whom had sailed with Captain Drake upon his previous
voyages, came into the port, and there was great greeting
between the crews of the various ships. Captain Rause
brought with him a Spanish caravel, captured the day
before, and a shallop also, which he had taken at Cape
Blanco. This was a welcome reinforcement, for the
crews of the two ships were but small for the purpose
which they had in hand, especially as it would be neces
sary to leave a party to take charge of the vessels.
Captain Drake made some proposals to Captain Rause,
which the latter accepted, and it was arranged that he
and his crew would be for a time under the command
of Captain Drake. When the division of the crews was
made, it was decided that James Rause should remain
in command of the four ships at Pheasant Bay, and that
Captain Drake, with fifty-three of his own men and
twenty of Rause's, should start in the three pinnaces and
the shallop for Nombre de Dios.

The first point at which they stopped was the Isle of
Pines, on the 22nd July; here they put in to water the

An Unsuccessful Attack 53

boats, and, as the crews had been cramped from their
stay therein, Captain Drake decided to give them a day
on shore. Ned and Reuben Gale were of the party, the
other two being, to their great discontent, left behind in
the ship. After the barriques had been filled with water,
the fires lit for cooking, and the labours of the day over,
Ned and Reuben started for a ramble in the island, which
was of a goodly extent. When they had proceeded some
distance in the wood, picking fruit as they went, and
looking at the butterflies and bright birds, they were
suddenly seized and thrown upon the ground by some
men, who sprang out from the underwood through which
they had passed. They were too surprised at this sudden
attack to utter even a cry, and, being safely gagged and
bound, they were lifted by their captors and carried away
into the interior of the island. After an hour's passage
they were put down in the heart of a thick grove of
trees, and, looking round, saw they were surrounded by
a large number of natives. One of these, a person
evidently in authority, spoke to them in a language which
they did not understand. They shook their heads, and
after several times attempting to make them comprehend,
Ned caught the word " Espanolos ".

To this he vehemently shook his head in denial, which
caused quite an excitement among his hearers. One of
the latter then said " English ", to which Ned and his
companion nodded. The news evidently filled the natives
with great joy; the bands were taken off the boys, and
the Indians endeavoured by gestures to express the
sorrow that they felt for having carried them off. It
was clear that they had taken them for Spaniards, and
that they had been watched as they wandered inland,
and captured for the purpose of learning the objects and

54 Under Drake's Flag

force of the expedition. Now, however, that their captors
understood that the ships were English, with great signs
of pleasure they started with them for the seashore. It
had already darkened when they arrived there, and the
crews of the boats jumped hastily to their feet at the sight
of so many persons approaching. Ned, however, called
to them just as they were about to betake themselves to
their arms, and shouted that the natives were perfectly
friendly and well-disposed. Captain Drake himself now
advanced, and entered into conversation with the leader
of the natives in Spanish. It seemed that they had met
before, and that many indeed of the natives were ac
quainted with his person. These were a party of
Simeroons, as they were then called, i.e. of natives who
had been made slaves by the Spaniards, and who had
now fled. They afterwards came to be called Cameroons,
and are mostly so spoken of in the books of English
buccaneers. These men were greatly pleased at the arrival
of Captain Drake and his boats, for their own had been
destroyed, and they feared taking to the sea in such as
they could build.

After much talk Captain Drake arranged to put them
on shore, so that they would go on to the Isthmus of
Darien, where there were more of them in the forests,
and they promised to prepare these to assist Captain
Drake when he should come there. The natives, some
thirty in number, were soon packed in the boats, and
were ready to cross to the mainland; and the party then
going forward, entered the port of Nombre de Dios at
three in the morning.

As they sailed in, being yet a good way from the city,
they came upon a barque of some 60 tons. It was all
unprepared for attack, and the boats got alongside, and

An Unsuccessful Attack 55

the crews climbed on to the deck before their presence
was discovered or dreamt of. No resistance whatever
was offered by the Spaniards against the English, all
were indeed asleep below. A search was made, and it
was found that the ship was laden with Canary wine, a
circumstance which gave great pleasure to the English,
who looked forward to a long bout of good drinking.
While they were searching the ship, they had paid but
little attention to the Spanish crew. Presently, however,
they heard the sound of oars at some little distance from
the ship.

" What is that?" said Captain Drake.

Ned ran to the stern of the vessel.

" I think, sir," he said, " that one or two of the Spaniards
have got off with their boat. I saw it towing to the stern
when we boarded."

Captain Drake leant over the side, and at once gave
orders to one of the boats whose crew had not boarded
the vessel, and was lying alongside, to pursue and to
strain every nerve to catch the boat before she came
near the town. The sailors leapt to the oars, and pulled
with a will, for they knew as well as their captain how
serious a matter it would be were the town alarmed, and
indeed that all their toil and pains would be thrown away,
as it was only by surprise that so small a handful of men
could possibly expect to take a large and important town
like Nombre de Dios.

Fortunately the boat overtook the fugitives before they
were within hailing distance of the town, and rapidly
towed them back to the ship. All then took their places
in the pinnaces, and pushed off without further delay. It
was not yet light, and, steered by one who knew the town
well, they rowed up alongside a battery, which defended

56 Under Drake's Flag

k, without the alarm being given. As they climbed up
over the wall the sentry fired his piece, and the artillery
men, who, there having been some rumours of the arrival
of Drake's fleet in those waters, were sleeping by the side
of their guns, sprang to their feet and fled as the English
leapt down into the battery.

There were six large guns in the place, and many small,
and bombards.

" Now, my lads," Captain Drake said, "you must lose
no time; in five minutes yonder artillerymen will have
alarmed the whole town, and we must be there before
the Spaniards have managed to get their sleepy eyes
open. Advance in three parties, and meet in the market
place; it is good that we should make as much show as
possible. There can be no more concealment, and, there
fore, we must endeavour to make the Spaniards believe
that we are a far stronger force than in truth we are."

It was not until the three parties met in the market
place that any real resistance, on the part of the Spaniards,
began, although windows had been opened, and shots fired
here and there. The alarm bells were now ringing, shouts
and screams were heard through the town, and the whole
population was becoming fairly aroused. As they entered
the marketplace, however, a heavy fire was opened with
arquebuses and guns. The English had taken with them
no firearms, but each man carried his bow and arrows,
and with these they shot fast and hard at the Spaniards,
and silenced their fire.

At this moment, however, it happened, sadly for the
success of the enterprise, that a ball struck Captain
Drake, and inflicted a serious wound.

Ned was standing near him, and observed him stagger.

*' Are you hit, sir?" he asked anxiously.

An Unsuccessful Attack 57

"Tush, my boy,0 he replied, "it is a scratch; say
nothing- of it. Now, forward to the Treasury. The
town is in your hands, my lads; it only remains to you
to sack as much treasure as you can carry; but remem
ber, do not lose your discipline, and keep together. If
we straggle we are lost. Now, light at once the torches
which you have brought with you, and shout aloud to
the inhabitants, you that can speak Spanish, that if any
more resistance is offered, we will burn the whole town
to the ground."

This threat mightily alarmed the inhabitants, and the
firing ceased altogether, for as these were not regular
soldiers, and knew that the object of the English attack
was to plunder the public treasuries rather than private
property, the townsmen readily deemed it to their interest
to hold aloof rather than to bring upon their city and
themselves so grievous a calamity as that threatened by
the English.

In the advance, two or three Spaniards had fallen into
the hands of the men, and these being threatened with
instant death if they hesitated, at once led the way to
the governor's house, where the silver, brought down on
mules from Panama, was stored. A party were placed
at the door of this building, and Captain Drake with the
rest entered.

The governor had fled with his attendants. The house
was richly furnished, full of silk hangings, of vessels of
gold and silver, and of all kinds of beautiful things.
These, however, attracted little attention from the Eng
lish, although Ned and his young comrades marvelled
much. Never had they seen in England anything ap
proaching to the wealth and beauty of this furnishing.
It seemed to them, indeed, as if they had entered one of

58 Under Drake's Flag

the houses of the magicians and enchanters, of whom they
had read in books during their childhood. Captain Drake,
however, passed through these gorgeous rooms with scarce
a glance, and, led by the Spaniards, descended some steps
into a vast cellar.

A cry of astonishment and admiration burst from the
whole party as they entered this treasury. Here, piled
up 12 feet high, lay a mighty mass of bars of silver, care
fully packed. This heap was no less than 70 feet long
and 10 feet wide, and the bars each weighed from 35 to
40 pounds.

" My lads," Captain Drake said, " here is money enough
to make us all rich for our lives ; but we must leave it for
the present and make for the Treasury House, which is as
full of gold and of precious stones as this is of silver."

The men followed Captain Drake and his brother, feeling
quite astonished and almost stupefied at the sight of this
pile of silver ; but they felt, moreover, the impossibility of
their carrying off so vast a weight unless the town were
completely in their hands.

This, indeed, was very far from being the case, for the
whole town was now rising. The troops, who had at the
first panic fled, were now being brought forward, and as
the day lightened, the Spaniards, sorely ashamed that so
small a body of men should have made themselves masters
of so great and rich a city, were plucking up heart and
preparing to attack them. Ill was it then for the success
of the adventure that Captain Francis had suffered so
heavy a wound in the marketplace. Up to this time he
had kept bravely on, and none except Ned, all being full
of the prospect of vast plunder, had noticed his pale face,
or seen the blood which streamed down from him, and
marked every footstep as he went; but nature could now

An Unsuccessful Attack 59

do no more, and, with his body wellnigh drained of all its
blood, he suddenly fell down fainting.

Great was the cry that rose from the men as they saw
the admiral thus fall. Hastily gathering1 round him, they
lifted his body from the ground, and shuddered at seeing
how great a pool of blood was gathered where he had
been standing. It seemed almost as if, with the fall of
their captain, the courage which had animated these men,
and would animate them again in fighting against ever so
great odds, had for the moment deserted them. In spite
of the orders of Captain John, that four or five should
carry his brother to the boats, and that the rest should
seize without delay the treasures of gold and diamonds
in the Treasury, and carry off as great a weight as they
might bear, none paid attention.

They gathered round the body of Captain Francis, and
lifting him on their shoulders they hurried to the boats,
careless of the promised treasures, and thinking only to
escape and bear with them their beloved commander from
the forces of the Spaniards, who, as they saw the party
fall back, with great shouting fell upon them, shooting
hotly. The swoon of the admiral had lasted but a few
moments. As cordial was poured down his throat he
opened his eyes, and seeing what the men were minded
to do, protested with all his force against their retreat.
His words, however, had no weight with them, and in
spite of his resistance they carried him down to the
battery, and there, placing him in a pinnace, the whole
took to their boats and rowed on board ship.

Wonderful to relate, although many were wounded, but
one man, and he Giles Taunton the armourer, was killed
in this attack upon the great city, in which they only
missed making themselves masters of one of the greatest

60 Under Drake's Flag

treasures upon earth by the accident of their commander
fainting at a critical moment, and to the men being seized
by an unaccountable panic. Some of the crew had indeed
carried off certain plunder, which they had snatched in
passing through the governor's house, and in such short
searches as they had been able to make in private dwell
ings; but the men in general had been so struck with
amazement and sorrow at the sight of their general's
wound, that although this wealth was virtually at their
mercy, they put off with him without casting a thought
upon what they were leaving behind.

The boats now rowed without pausing to the isle, which
they called the Isle of Victuals, and there they stayed two
days, nursing their wounds and supporting themselves
with poultry, of which there was a great abundance found
in the island, and with vegetables and fruits from the
gardens. There was great joy among them when it was
found that Captain Drake's wound, although severe
enough, was yet not likely to imperil his life, and that
it was loss of blood alone which had caused him to faint.
At this news the men all took heart and rejoiced so ex
ceedingly that a stranger would have supposed that they
had attained some great victory, rather than have come
out unsuccessful from an adventure which promised to
make each man wealthy.

Upon the second day after their arrival at the Isle of
Victuals, they saw a boat rowing out from the direction
of Nombre de Dios. As they knew that there was no
fleet in that harbour which would venture to attack them,
the English had no fear of the approaching boat, although,
indeed, they wondered much what message could have
been sent them. On board the boat was an hidalgo, or
Spanish noble, who was rowed by four negroes. He

An Unsuccessful Attack 61

said that he had come from the mainland to make en
quiries as to the gallant men who had performed so
great a feat, and that he cherished no malice whatever
against them. He wished to know whether the Captain
Drake who commanded them was the same who had been
there before, and especially did he enquire whether the
arrows used by the English were poisoned ; for, he said,
great fear and alarm reigned in the town, many believing
that all who had been struck by the English shafts would
certainly die.

Upon this head he was soon reassured, and the English
were, indeed, mightily indignant at its being supposed
that they would use such cowardly weapons as poisoned
arrows.

Then the hidalgo enquired why the English had so
suddenly retreated from the town when it was in their
hands, and why they had abstained from carrying off the
three hundred and sixty tons of silver which lay at the
governor's house, and the still greater value of gold in
the treasure-house. The gold, indeed, being far more
valuable than the silver, insomuch as it was more port
able. The answers to all these questions were freely
given, for in those days there was a curious mixture of
peace and war, of desperate violence and of great cour
tesy, between combatants; and whereas now, ar> enemy
arriving with a view merely to obtain information would
be roughly treated, in those days he was courteously
entertained, and his questions as freely answered as if he
had been a friend and ally.

When he heard of the wound of Captain Drake he ex
pressed great sorrow, and after many compliments were
exchanged he returned to Nombre de Dios, while the next
day Captain Drake and the English rowed away to the

62 Under Drake's Flag

Isle ot Pines, where Captain Rause was remaining in
charge of the ships. He was mightily glad to see them
return, as were their comrades who had remained, for
their long absence had caused great fear and anxiety, as
it was thought that Captain Drake must have fallen into
some ambuscade, and that ill had come to the party.
Although there was some regret at the thought that the
chance of gaining such vast booty had been missed, yet
the joy at the safe return overpowered this feeling, and
for a day or two the crews feasted merrily and held
festival. Captain Rause then determined to continue the
adventure no further, but to separate with his ship and
men from Captain Drake. He was of opinion firmly that
now the Spaniards had discovered their presence in the
island, such measures of defence would be taken at every
port as to place these beyond the hazard of attack by so
small a body as those carried by the three ships. He,
therefore, receiving full satisfaction for the use of his men
and for guarding the ships, sailed away on the 7th August,
leaving the Swanne and the Pacha to proceed upon the
adventure alone.

Captain Drake sent his brother and Ellis Hickson to
examine the river Chagres, and on their return Captain
Drake with his two ships and three pinnaces sailed for
Carthagena, where he arrived on the i3th day of August.
While on the voyage thither he captured two Spanish
ships, each of £40 tons, with rich cargoes, neither of
them striking so much as a blow in resistance. At
evening he anchored between the Island of Cara and St.
Bernardo, and the three pinnaces entered the harbour of
Carthagena.

Lying at the entrance they found a frigate, which in
those days meant a very small craft, not much larger

An Unsuccessful Attack 63

than a rowing boat. She had but one old man on board,
who said that the rest of the company had gone ashore
to fight a duel about a quarrel which they had had over
night. He said, too, what was much more important to
the English, that an hour before nightfall a pinnace had
passed him, and that the man who was steering had
shouted out that the English were at hand, and that he
had better up anchor and go into the port. He said,
moreover, that when the pinnace reached Carthagena guns
were fired, and he could see that all the shipping hauled in
under shelter of the castle.

This was bad news indeed, and there was much hard
language among the sailors when they heard it. It was
clear that the castle of Carthagena, if prepared, was not
to be carried by some thirty or forty men, however
gallant and determined they might be. There was, too,
but little hope that the old man had spoken falsely, for
they had themselves heard guns shortly before their
arrival there. With much bitterness it was determined
to abandon the plan of attack, and thus Carthagena as
well as Nombre de Dios escaped from the hands of the
English.

They did not, however, go out empty-handed, for they
succeeded in capturing, by boarding, four pinnaces, each
laden with cargo, and as they turned their heads to go
out to sea, a great ship of Seville came sailing in. Her
they laid alongside and captured easily, she having just
arrived from Spain, having no thoughts of meeting a foe
just as she reached her port of destination.

This lightened the hearts of the crew, and with their
prizes in tow they sailed out in good spirits. The ship
contained large stores of goods from Spain, with sherries
and merchandise of every kind. They went back to the

64 Under Drake's Flag

Isle of Pines, their usual rendezvous, and on adding up the
goods that they had taken from various prizes, found that
even now they had made no bad thing of their voyage.

They were now much reduced in fighting strength by
illness, and Captain Drake determined in his mind that
the crews were no longer strong enough for the manning
of two ships, and that it would be better to take to one
alone. He knew, however, that even his authority would
not suffice to persuade the sailors to abandon one of the
vessels, for sailors have a great love for their ships. He
therefore determined to do it by a sudden stroke, and that
known only to himself and another. Therefore he called
to him Thomas Moore, the carpenter of the Siaanne^ and
taking him aside, told him to make augur holes in the
bottom of that ship. Moore, who was a good sailor,
made a great resistance to the orders, but upon the ad
miral assuring him that it was necessacy for the success
of the enterprise that one of the ships should be destroyed,
he very reluctantly undertook the task.

Previous to this Captain Drake had ordered all the
booty and a considerable portion of the stores of both
ships to be hauled on shore, so that they might lose
nothing of value to them.

The next morning Ned and his friends were sitting on
the bulwark of the vessel, watching the fish playing
about in the depths of the clear blue water.

"We seem to be lower in the water than usual," Ned
said; " does not it seem to you that we are not so high
above the sea as we are wont to be?"

The others agreed that the vessel had that appearance;
but as it seemed clearly impossible that it should be so,
especially when she was lighter than usual, they thought
that they must be mistaken, and the subject was put aside.

An Unsuccessful Attack 65

Half an hour later Captain Drake himself rowing along
side called to his brother, who came to the side.

" I am going to fish," he said; "are you disposed to
come also?"

Captain John expressed his willingness to do so.

" I will wait for you," his brother said.

Captain John was turning to go into his cabin to get
his cap and cloak, when Captain Francis cried out —

" Is not your ship very low in the water this morn
ing?"

" The same as usual, I suppose," Captain John said
laughing; but looking over the side himself he said,
" Methinks she does lie deep in the water," and calling
the carpenter he bade him sound the well. The latter,
after doing so, cried out loudly, that there were four
feet of water in the ship. A great astonishment seized
upon both officers and crew at this unexpected news.
All hands were at once set to work, the pumps were
rigged, and with buckets and all sorts of gear they strove
manfully and hard to get rid of the water. It soon, how
ever, became plain that it entered faster than they could
pump it forth, and that the vessel must have sprung a
bad leak. When it was clear that the Swanne could not
be saved, the boats of the Pacha were brought alongside,
and all the goods that remained in her were removed,
together with the arms and ammunition. Then the crew,
taking to the boats, lay by, until in a few minutes the
Swanne sank, among the tears of many of her crew, who
had made three voyages in her and loved her well.

It was not for a long time afterwards known that the
loss of this ship was the effect of the orders of the ad
miral, who indeed acted with his usual wisdom in keeping
the matter secret, for assuredly, although the men would

(162) 5

66 Under Drake's Flag

have obeyed his orders, he would have lost much favour
and popularity among them had the truth been at that
time known. The next day the news was spread among
the men that it was determined to fill the Pacha with all
the stores that were on shore, and leaving a party there
with her, to embark the crews in the pinnaces for service
in the river Chagres and along the coast, until, at any
rate, they could capture another ship to replace the
Swanne. Next day they rowed on into the Gulf of Darien;
there the ship was laid up in a good place, and they
remained quiet for fifteen days, amusing and refreshing
themselves. By this means they hoped to throw all the
Spaniards off their guard, and to cause a report to be
spread that they had left the island.

The Simeroons, living near, had been warned by those
who had been landed from the Isle of Pines of their
coming, and received them with good cheer, and pro
mised all aid that could be required. Then the pinnaces
were sent out to catch any passing ships which might be
cruising along the coast.

It happened one day that two of them had set off in
pursuit of a great ship which they saw passing in -the
distance. The wind was light, and they had little doubt
that they should overhaul her. Ned, who was one of
those who remained behind, was much angered at missing
so good an enterprise, but some four hours afterwards
another ship was seen to pass along. The remaining
pinnace was at once manned, Captain John Drake taking
the command, and with fourteen men she set out to take
the Spanish galleon. Gallant as are the exploits which
have been performed in modern times by British tars in
their attacks upon slavers, yet in none of these cases does
the disparity of force at all approach that which often ex-

An Unsuccessful Attack 67

isted between the English boats and the Spanish galleons,
indeed the only possible reason that can be given for the
success of the English is the fear that their enemy enter
tained for them. Both the Spanish captains and crews
had come to look upon them as utterly invincible, and
they seemed, when attacked by the English buccaneers,
altogether paralysed.

As the boat rowed up towards the great ship, her size
became gradually more apparent, and her deck could be
seen crowded with men; even Ned, who was not greatly
given to reflection, could not but feel a passing doubt
as to the possibility of one small boat with fourteen men
attacking a floating castle like this.

Presently the boom of a cannon from the forecastle of
the vessel was heard, and a ball whizzed over their heads,
then shot after shot was fired, and soon a rattle of small
arms broke out, and the water all round was cut up by
bullets and balls. The rough seamen cared little for this
demonstration. With a cheer they bent their backs to the
oars, and although some were wounded they rowed up to
the side of the ship without hesitation or doubt. Then,
from above, a shower of missiles were hurled upon them —
darts, stones, hot water, and even boiling tar.

It would have gone hard with the English had not the
Spanish carelessly left a porthole open near the water
level ; through this the English clambered, eager to get
at their foe, and many of them raging with the pain
caused by the boiling material's. As they rushed on to
the deck, the Spaniards were ranged in two ranks on
either side of the hatchway and fell upon them at once;
but so great was the fury of the English, that, facing
either way, with a roar like beasts springing on their
prey, they fell with axe and sword upon the Spaniards.

68 Under Drake's Flag

It was the wild rage with which the English buccaneers
fought that was the secret of their success. The Spaniards
are a people given to ceremony, and even in matters of
battle are somewhat formal and pedantic. The combat,
then, between them and the English was one which pre
sented no familiar conditions to their minds. These rough
sailors, hardened by exposure, skilled in the use of arms,
were no doubt formidable enough individually, but this
alone would not have intimidated the Spaniards or have
gone any great distance towards equalizing the tremen
dous odds between them. It was the fury with which
they fought that was the secret of their success. It
was as when a cat, furious with passion, flies at a dog
many times larger and heavier than itself. The latter
may be as brave in many matters as the cat, and ready
to face a creature much larger even than itself under
ordinary circumstances. It is the fury of the cat which
appals and turns it into a very coward. Thus, when the
band of English fell upon the Spaniards in the galleon
— who were some six times as numerous as themselves —
naked to the waist, with hair streaming back, with all
their faces wild with pain, brandishing their heavy axes,
and with a shout rushed upon their foes drawn up in
regular order, the latter after a moment or two of resis
tance began rapidly to fall back. Their officers in vain
shouted to them to stand firm. In vain they taunted
them with falling back before a handful of men. In vain
even turned their swords against their own soldiers. It
was useless. Those in front, unable indeed to retreat, were
cut down by the heavy axes. Those behind recoiled, and
after but a few minutes' fighting some began to leap down
the hatchways, and although the fight continued for a
short time, isolated groups here and there making resis-

An Unsuccessful Attack 69

tance, the battle was virtually won in five minutes after the
English appeared on deck.

The captain and his two principal officers were killed
fighting bravely, and had their efforts been in any way
backed by those of their men they would have made short
work of the assailants. Captain Drake's voice was heard
high above the din as soon as the resistance ceased.

He ordered the prisoners to be all brought upon deck
and disarmed, and at once forced into their own boats and
obliged to row away from the vessel; for he knew that
were his men once to begin to plunder and to fall upon the
liquors, the Spaniards, even if unarmed, would be able to
rise and overpower them.

No sooner was the last Spaniard out of the ship, than
the men scattered to look for plunder. Ned was standing
on the poop watching the boats rowing away, and thinking
to himself that, so crowded were they, if n breeze were to
spring up there would not be much chance of their reach
ing Nombre de Dios. Suddenly he heard below him a
scream followed by a splash; looking over he saw the
head of a woman appear above the water, and without
hesitation dived at once from the side. For a moment
the girl, for she was little more, struggled with him as
if she would have sunk, but Ned, grasping her firmly, in
a few strokes swam with her alongside the ship to the
boat, and two or three sailors running down assisted him
to pull her into it; then dripping wet she was taken to the
deck, where the captain in kind tones assured her that she
would receive the most courteous treatment, and that she
need be under no fear whatever.

She was the daughter of a wealthy Spaniard at Nombre
de Dios, and was now coming out from Spain to join him;
frightened by the noise of the fighting and by the terrible

70 Under Drake's Flag

reputation of the English buccaneers, she had, when the
sailors rushed into the cabin with loud shouts, been so
alarmed that she had jumped from the stern windows into
the sea.

Captain Drake assured her courteously that, rough as
his men might be, they would, none of them, lay a finger
upon a woman. He then hoisted a flag and fired a gun
as a signal to the Spanish boats, which were yet within
a quarter of a mile, to return. For a moment they rowed
on, but a ball, sent skimming across their bows, was a
hint which they could not disregard ; for, full as they were
of men, they could not have hoped to avoid the English
pinnace should it have put off after them.

When the boats came alongside, some of those on board
were ordered to ascend the side of the ship, and plenty of
accommodation having been made, the young Spanish lady
and her maid, who had remained in the cabin, descended
into the largest boat; handed down by Captain Drake with
a courtesy equal to that which a Spanish hidalgo himself
would have shown.

Before she went, the young lady turned to Ned, who
was standing near, and expressed to him her deep thanks
for the manner in which he had leapt over for her. Ned
himself could understand only a few words, for, although
many of the sailors spoke Spanish, and sometimes used it
among themselves, he had not yet made any great pro
gress with it, although he had tried to pick up as many
words and phrases as he could. The captain, however,
translated the words to him, and he said to her in reply,
that there was nothing for her to feel herself under any
obligation to him for, for that any dog would Jiave jumped
out and done the business just as well.

The young lady, however, undid a bracelet of gold on

An Unsuccessful Attack 71

her arm and insisted upon herself fastening it round Ned's
wrist, an action which caused blushes of confusion to
crimson his face. In a few minutes the Spanish boats
were again off. The captain added to that in which the
young lady was placed, some food, some bottles of liqueur,
and other matters which might render her voyage easy
and pleasant. He promised that the Spaniards, who had
been transferred again to the ship, should be landed at the
earliest opportunity.

The vessel was now searched regularly and was found
to contain much treasure in goods, but as she was on her
way from Europe she had, of course, none of the gold and
silver which was the main object of their search. How
ever, they consoled themselves with the thought that the
ship which had been chased by their comrades earlier in
the day was homewards-bound, and they hoped, therefore,
that a rich cargo would there be secured. They were
not mistaken, for when the ship sailed up to the rendez
vous they found another alongside, and the cheers of their
comrades told them that the prize had been a handsome
one. They found that they had secured nearly half a
million in gold and silver, and transferring the cargo of
the one ship into the other, they set the first on fire and
sailed back to the spot where their camp was formed on
the isthmus.

Several other ships fell into their hands in this way, but
after this they hindered no more vessels on their way from
Europe. They had ample stores and, indeed, far more
than enough to supply them with every luxury, for on
board the Pacha the richest wines, the most delicate con
serves, the richest garments of all kinds were already in
such abundance as to become common to them all.

Down to the common sailor, all feasted on the best, and

72 Under Drake's Flag

drank wines that an emperor might have approved. Cap
tain Drake, in this way, gave his men when on shore much
licence, insisting, however, that they should abstain from
drunkenness. For, as he said, not only would they be at
the mercy of any small body of the enemy which might
find them, but drunkenness breeds quarrels and disputes,
and as between comrades would be fatal indeed. Thus,
although enough of good liquor was given to each man to
make him merry, none were allowed to drink beyond this
point.

The reason why the ships coming from Europe were
allowed to pass unmolested, was, that Drake wished not
that each day some fresh tale of capture should be brought
to Panama by the crews set free in the boats, for it was
certain that the tale so told would, at last, stir up such
fear and indignation at the ravages committed by so small
a body, that the governors of the Spanish towns would
combine their forces and would march against them with
a veritable army. While only the ships starting from
Darien were overhauled and lightened of their contents
the tale was not brought back to Darien, for the crews
were allowed to sail on with their ships to Europe, as
Drake had already more vessels than he knew what to do
with, and as for prisoners they were to him quite useless.
Captain John did, indeed, at one time propose to him that
he should take out of each ship all the principal men, so
as to hold them as hostages in case of any misfortune
happening to the English, but the admiral said to him,
that so great was the enmity and fear of them, that did
they fall into the hands of the Spaniards, these would not
exchange them and let them go even if as many kings
were set free in return.

In all five vessels were seized and plundered while lying

An Unsuccessful Attack 73

at Darien. All was not, however, going well, for while
they lay there a terrible sickness broke out among them ;
whether this was from the change of life or from any
noxious thing which they ate, or merely from the heat,
none could say, but very shortly the illness made great
ravages among them. First died Charles Clift, one of the
quartermasters; then one day when the pinnace in which
Ned always sailed returned, they were met with the sad
news that Captain John Drake was also dead. He had
fallen, however, not by the fever, but by the ball of the
Spaniards. He had gone out with one of the pinnaces,
and had engaged a great Spanish ship, but the latter had
shot more straight and faster than usual, and the captain
himself and Richard Allen, one of his men, had been slain
in an unsuccessful attempt to capture the ship. His sad
end was not the result of any rashness on his part, for he,
indeed, had told the men that the vessel carried many
guns, and that it was too rash an enterprise. The sailors,
however, had by this time become so accustomed to vic
tory as to despise the Dons altogether, and insisted upon
going forward.

It was with bitter lamentation and regret that they
returned, bringing the body of the admiral's brother.
They were now at the end of the year, and in this week
no less than six of the company died, among whom was
Joseph Drake, another of the admiral's brothers. These
losses saddened the crew greatly, and even the treasures
which they had amassed now seemed to them small and
of little account. Even those who did not take the fever
were much cast down, and Captain Drake determined
without any further loss to attempt the expedition on which
he had set his mind. On February 3rd, being Shrove
Tuesday, he started with eighteen English and thirteen

74 Under Drake's Flag

Simeroons for Panama. He had now since he sailed lost
no less than twenty-eight of the party which set out from
Plymouth.

In a few days they reached Venta Cruz, but one of the
men who had taken too much strong liquor made a noise,
and the alarm being given, much of the treasure was
carried out of the place before they could effect a landing.
They followed, however, one of the treasure parties out of
the town, and pursued them for some distance. On their
way they came across another large convoy with gold;
this they easily took, and having sent the Spaniards away,
unloaded the mules and buried the gold, desiring to press
on further.

As they went one ot the chief Simeroons took the admiral
apart from the road they were traversing, and led him to
the foot of a lofty tree. Upon this steps had been cut,
and the Indian told the admiral to ascend and see what he
could observe from the top. Upon reaching the summit
the admiral gave a shout of joy and astonishment. From
that point he could see the Pacific Ocean, and by turning
his head the Atlantic which they had just left.

This was a joyful moment for the great sailor, and when
he descended, one by one most of the men climbed to
the top of the tree to see the two oceans. Drake was
the first Englishman who had seen this sight; to the
Spaniards it was, of course, familiar; indeed Vasco Nunez
had stood upon the spot and had seen the Pacific, and
taken possession of it in the name of Spain in the year

They now retraced their steps, for with the force at their
disposal, Captain Drake thought it would be madness to
cross the isthmus with any view of attacking the Spaniards
on the other side. He had now accomplished his purpose,

An Unsuccessful Attack 75

and had learned the nature and geography of the place,
and proposed on some future occasion to return with a
force sufficient to carry out the great enterprises on which
he had set his mind. On their return they were sorely
disappointed at finding that the Spaniards, having captured
one of the party, had extorted from him the hiding-place
of the gold, and had lifted and carried it off. They now
prepared to re-embark in their pinnace. Reaching the
seashore, however, they were surprised and in some way
dismayed at seeing seven Spanish vessels nearing the
coast, The Spaniards had at last determined to make an
effort, and had arrived at a time more unfortunate for the
English than could have been supposed. The pinnace,
after landing the party, had sailed away in order to pre
vent the Spaniards seizing upon those on board, and when
Captain Drake reached the shore she was not in sight,
having indeed hauled her wind and made off on the approach
of the Spanish fleet. The situation seemed bad indeed,
for it was certain that the Spaniards would land their
troops and search the shore, and it was of the highest
importance that the pinnace should be discovered first.

There was a counsel held, and the men were wellnigh
despairing. Captain Drake, however, bade them keep up
their courage, and pointed out to them the four lads, all
of whom had escaped the effect of fever and disease, their
constitution, no doubt, being strengthened by the fact that
none of them indulged in too much liquor, indeed seldom
touching any.

" Look," said Captain Drake, "at these four lads; their
courage is unshaken, and they look cheerful and hopeful
on all occasions. Take example from them and keep up
your hopes. I propose to make a raft upon which I myself
will embark, and by making out from this bay into the

;6 Under Drake's Flag

open sea, may succeed in catching sight of the pinnace
and bringing it hither to your rescue."

The proposal seemed a desperate one, for it was far
more likely that the Spaniards' ships would come along
and descry the raft than that the latter should meet with
the pinnace. However, there seemed no other resource.
The materials for the raft were scanty and weak, and when
Captain Francis with three companions got fairly out of
the bay the raft sank so deeply in the water that they were
completely standing in the sea.

For some hours they beat about, and then to their great
joy they descried the pinnace in the distance making for
land. The wind had now risen, and it was blowing hard,
and their position on the raft was dangerous enough.
They found that it would be impossible for them to keep
at sea, and still more impossible to place themselves in the
track of the pinnaces, which were making for a bay behind
a projecting headland. Painfully paddling the raft to the
shore Captain Francis landed, and they made their way
with much toil and fatigue over the hill which divided
them from that bay, and towards morning got down to
the pinnace, where they were received with much joy.
Then they at once launched the boat and made for the
spot where they had left their comrades. These received
them as if risen from the dead, for they had all made up
their minds that their admiral and his companions had
been lost upon the frail raft on which they had embarked.
They now put to sea, and had the good fortune to escape
the ken of the Spaniards, who had sailed further up the
coast. So thanking God for their escape they sailed back
to the bay, where the Pacha and her prizes lay, and then
all hands began to make great preparation for return
home.

CHAPTER V

Cast Ashore

IT was time indeed for the little band of adventurers to
be turning their faces towards England. Their original
strength of eighty men was reduced to fifty, and of these
many were sick and weak. They had gained a vast store
of wealth, although they had missed the plunder of Nombre
de Dios and of Carthagena. Their doings had caused
such consternation and alarm that it was certain that the
Spaniards would ere long make a great and united effort
to crush them, and fifty men, however valiant, could not
battle with a fleet. The men were longing for home, look
ing forward to the delight of spending the great share ot
prize money which would fall to each. The sudden death
which had stricken many of their comrades had, too, cast
a chill on the expedition, and made all long more eagerly
to be away from those beautiful but deadly shores. When,
therefore, on the day after the return of Captain Francis,
the word was given to prepare for the homeward voyage,
the most lively joy prevailed. The stores were embarked,
the Simeroons, who had done them good service, dismissed
with rich presents, and all embarked with much joy and
thankfulness that their labours and dangers were overpast.
They were, however, extremely shorthanded, and were
scattered among the three or four prizes which were the
best among the ships which they had taken. Ned and

77

78 Under Drake's Flag

Gerald, being now able to give good assistance in case of
need to the sailors, were put on board one of the prizes
with four seamen. Captain Drake had determined to keep
for a time the prizes with him, for as it might well be that
they should meet upon their way a great Spanish fleet,
he thought that by keeping together with the flag of St.
George flying on all the ships the Spaniards would believe
that the Pacha had been joined by ships from England,
and so would assuredly let her and her consorts pass at
large. At the last land at which they touched Captain
Drake intended to dismiss all but one of the prizes, and
to sail across the Atlantic with her and the Pacha.

This, however, was not to be.

One day shortly after their departure Ned said to Gerald,
" I do not like the look of the sky; it reminds me of the
sky that we had before that terrible hurricane when we
were moored off the Isle of Pines; and with our scanty
crew we should be in a mightily unfavourable position
should the wind come on to blow." In that wise the
sailors shared Ned's apprehensions, and in the speediest
possible time all sail was lowered and the ship prepared
to meet the gale. It was not long before the whole sky
was covered with black clouds. Captain Drake signalled
to the vessels that each was to do its best, and if sepa
rated was to rendezvous at the spot before agreed upon.
Then all having been done that could be thought of, they
waited the bursting of the storm.

It came at last, with the suddenness and almost the
force of an explosion. A faint rumbling noise was first
heard, a white line of foam was seen in the distance, and
then with a roar and a crash the hurricane was upon them.
The vessel reeled over so far under the blow that for a
time all on board thought that she would capsize. The

Cast Ashore 79

two sailors at the helm, however, held on sturdily, and at
last her head drifted off on the wind, and she flew along
before its force. The sea rose as if by magic; where for
weeks scarcely a ripple had ruffled the surface of the water
now great waves with crested tops tore along; the air was
full of blinding foam swept from the tops of the waves;
and it was difficult for those on board even to breathe
when facing the force of the wind.

"This is tremendous," Ned shouted in Gerald's ears,
" and as there seem to be islands all over these seas,
if we go on at the rate we are doing now methinks that it
will not be long before we land on one or another. We
are, as I reckon, near Hispaniola, but there is no saying
which way we may drift, for these storms are almost
always changeable, and while we are running south at
present, an hour hence we may be going in the opposite
direction."

For twenty-four hours the storm continued with unabated
fury. At times it seemed impossible that the vessel could
live, so tremendous were the seas which struck and buffeted
her. However, being light in the water and buoyant, she
floated over it. During the next night the wind sensibly
abated, and although still blowing with tremendous force,
there was evidence to the accustomed eyes of the sailors
that the storm was wellnigh blowing itself out. The sea,
too, sensibly went down, although still tremendous, and all
began to hope that they would weather the gale, when
one of the sailors, who had crawled forward to the bow,
shouted,

"Breakers ahead!"

It was now fortunately morning, although the darkness
had been so intense since the storm began that the
difference between night and day was faint indeed; still,

8o Under Drake's Flag

it was better, if dangler were to be met with, that there
should be as much light as possible. All hands looked
out over the bows and saw before them a steep coast
rising both to the right and left.

"It is all over with the ship," Gerald said to Ned,
" and I do not think that there is a chance, even for you.
The surf on those rocks is terrible."

" We must do our best," said Ned, "and trust in God.
You keep close to me, Gerald, and when you want aid
I will assist you as far as I can. You swim fairly, but
scarce well enough, unaided, to get through that surf
yonder."

The men, seeing that what appeared to be certain
destruction stared them in the face, now shook hands
all round, and then commending their souls to God, sat
down and waited for the shock. When it came it was
tremendous. The masts snapped at the board like rotten
sticks, the vessel shivered from stem to stern, and draw
ing back for an instant was again cast down with terrible
force, and, as if struck by lightning, parted amidships,
and then seemed to fall all to pieces like a house of
cards.

Ned and Gerald were standing hand in hand when the
vessel struck; and as she went to pieces and they were
precipitated into the water Ned still kept close to his
friend, swimming side by side with him. They soon
neared the edge of the line where the waves broke upon
the rocks. Then Ned shouted to Gerald to coast along
outside the broken water, for that there was no landing
there with life. For upwards of an hour they swam on
outside the line of surf. The sea, although tremendously
high, did not break till it touched a certain point, and
the lads rose and fell over the great billows. They had

Cast Ashore 81

stripped off the greater portion of their clothing before
the ship struck, and in the warm water had no sensation
of chill, and had nothing to fight against but fatigue.
When they were in the hollow of the waves their position
was easy enough, and they could make each other hear
by shouting loudly. When, however, they were on the
crest of one of the mountainous waves, it was a hard
struggle for life. The wind blew with such fury, taking
the top of the water off in sheets and scattering it in
fine spray, that the boys were nearly drowned, although
they kept their back to the wind and held their breath
as if diving, except when necessary to make a gasp for
air.

Gerald became weak and tired at the end of the hour,
but Ned kept up his courage, and aided him by swimming
by his side and letting Gerald put his hand upon his
shoulder every time that they were in the hollows of the
waves, so that he got a complete rest at these periods.
At last Ned thought he saw a passage between two of
the big rocks, through which it might be possible, he
thought, that they might swim, and so avoid the certain
death which seemed to await them at every other spot.

The passage was about 40 feet wide, and it was no easy
matter to calculate upon striking this in so wild a sea.
Side by side with Gerald Ned made for the spot, and
at last swam to the edge of the surf, then a great wave
came rolling in, and the boys, dizzy and confused, halt
smothered and choking, were hurled with tremendous
force through the great rocks into comparatively calm
water beyond. Ned now seized Gerald's hair, for his
friend was nearly gone, and turning aside from the direct
line of the entrance found himself speedily in calm water
behind the line of rocks. A few minutes' further struggle

(162) 6

82 Under Drake's Flag

and the two boys lay on the beach wellnigh insensible
after their great exertions. After a while they recovered
their strength, and with staggering feet made their way
farther inland.

"I owe you my life, Ned," Gerald said. "I never
could have struggled ashore nor indeed kept myself up
for half that time had it not been for your aid."

" I am glad to have been able to help you," Ned said
simply. "We may thank heaven that the storm had
abated a little in its force before the vessel struck, for
had it been blowing as it was yesterday we could not
have swum five minutes. It was just the lowering of
the wind that enabled us to swim without being drowned
by the spray. It was bad enough as it was on the top
of the waves, but yesterday it would have been im
possible."

One of the first thoughts of the boys upon fairly re
covering themselves was to kneel down and thank God
for having preserved their lives, and then having rested
for upwards of an hour to recover themselves, they made
their way inland.

"Our dangers are by no means over, Gerald," Ned
said. " If this island is, as I believe, a thickly cultivated
one and in the hands of the Spaniards, it will go hard
with us if they find us, after all the damage to their
commerce which we have been inflicting for the last
year."

Upon getting to some rising ground they saw to their
surprise a large town lying on a bay in front of them ; in
stinctively they paused at the sight, and both sat down
so as to be out of view of any casual lookers-on.

"What are we to do, Ned?" Gerald said. "If we
stay here we shall be starved. If we go into the town

Cast Ashore 83

we shall have our throats cut. Which think you is the
best?"

" I do not like either alternative," Ned said. "See,
inland, there are many high mountains, and even close
to the town there appear to be thickets and woods.
There are houses here and there and no doubt plantations;
it seems to me that if we get round to that side we may
conceal ourselves, and it is hard in a country like this
if we cannot at any rate find fruit enough to keep us for
some time. And we had better wait till dark ; our white
shoulders will be seen at too far a distance by this
light."

Creeping into a thicket, the lads lay down and were
soon sound asleep, and it was night before they awokfe
and looked out. All signs of the storm had passed. The
moon was shining calmly, the stars were brilliant and
seemed to hang like lamps in the sky, an effect which is
only seen in tropical climes. There were lights in the
town, and these served as a sort of guide to them.
Skirting along at the top of the basin in which the town
lay they passed through cultivated estates, picking some
ears of maize, thus satisfying their hunger, which was,
when they started, ravenous, for during the storm they
had been unable to open the hatchways and had been
supported only by a little biscuit which happened to be
in the caboose on deck.

Towards morning they chose a spot in a thick planta
tion of trees about a mile and a half from the town, and
here they agreed to wait for a while until they could come
to some decision as to their course.

Three days passed without any change; each night
they stole out and picked maize, pineapple, and melons
in the plantations for their subsistence, and as morning

84 Under Drake's Flag

returned, went back to their hiding-place. Close to it
a road ran along to a noble house, which stood in some
grounds at about a quarter of a mile from their grove.
Every morning they saw the owner of this house, ap
parently a man of distinction, riding towards the town,
and they concluded that he was one of the great mer
chants ot the place. One day he came accompanied by
a young lady carried in a litter by four slaves. The boys,
who were weary of their solitude, pressed to the edge
of the thicket to obtain a clear view of this little proces
sion which broke the monotony of their day.

" Gerald," Ned exclaimed, grasping him by the arm,
" do you know, I believe that the lady is the girl I picked
out of the water the day we took that ship three months

"Do you think so?" Gerald said; "it is too far surely
to see."

" I do not know for certain," Ned answered, "but me-
thinks that I cannot be mistaken."

" Perhaps she would help us or intercede for us,"
Gerald suggested.

"Perhaps so," Ned said; "at any rate we will try.
To-night we will make a move into the gardens of the
house she came from and will hide there till we see her
alone in the garden, then I will sally forth and see how
she takes it."

Accordingly, that night after obtaining their supply
of fruit the boys entered the enclosure. When morning
broke there was speedily a stir, negroes and negresses
went out to the fields, servants moved hither and thither
in the veranda outside the house, gardeners came out
and set to work at their vocations. It was evident that
the owner or his family was fond of gardening, for every-

Cast Asnore 85

thing was kept with beautiful order and regularity.
Mixed with the cactus and other gaudy-flowering plants
of Mexico and South America were many European plants
brought out and acclimatized. Here fountains threw up
dancing waters in the air, cool shady paths and bowers
afforded protection from the heat of the day, and so
carefully was it clipped and kept that a fallen leaf would
have destroyed its perfection.

The point which the boys had chosen was remote from
the house, for it was of importance that there should be
no witnesses of the meeting. Here, in a spacious arbour,
were chairs, couches, and other signs that some of the
family were in the habit of taking their seats there, and
although the boys knew that it might be days before they
succeeded in carrying out their object, yet they determined
to wait and watch patiently however long it might be.
Their success, however, surpassed their expectations,
for it was but an hour or two after they bad taken up
their post, and soon after the sun had risen, that they
saw, walking along the path, the young lady whom they
so desired to meet.

She was not alone, for a black girl walked a little
behind her chatting constantly to her and carrying some
books, a shawl, and various other articles. When they
reached the arbour the attendant placed the things there,
and then as she took her seat the young lady said to the
girl, "Go in and fetch me my coffee here, say I shall not
come in until breakfast time, and that if any orders are
required they must come here for them."

" Will you want me to read to you?"

" No," the young lady said; "it is not hot: I shall take
a turn round the garden first and then read to myself."

The black girl went off at a trot towards the house,

86 Under Drake's Flag

and the young lady strolled round and round that portion
of the garden until her black attendant returned with a
tray containing coffee, lemonade, and fruits; this she
placed on the table, and then in answer to the "You
need not wait" of the lady, again retired.

Now was the time for the boys, who had watched these
operations with keen interest and anxiety. It was un
certain whether she would keep the black attendant by
her side, and all depended upon that. As soon as she
was alone Ned advanced from their hiding-place. The
boys had agreed that it was better at first that he should
approach alone, lest the sudden appearance of the two,
especially as Gerald was nearly as tall as a man, might
have caused alarm, and she might have flown away before
she had identified Ned as the lad who had jumped into
the water to save her.

Ned approached the arbour with hesitating steps, and
felt that his appearance was indeed sorely against him.
He had no covering to his head, had nothing on, indeed,
but a pair of trousers. He was shoeless and stockingless,
and presented the appearance of a beggar boy rather than
the smart young sailor whom she had seen on board the
ship.

The lady started up with a short exclamation on seeing
a white ragged boy standing before her.

"Who are you?" she exclaimed, "and by what right
do you enter these gardens? A white boy, and in rags,
how comes this?"

"Our ship has been wrecked," Ned said, using his
best Spanish. " Do you not remember me? I am the
boy who picked you up when you fell overboard on the
day when the English captured the ship you came out
in, some four months ago."

Cast Ashore 87

"Are you, indeed?" the young- lady said in surprise,
" Yes, and now that I look close at you I recognize your
face. Poor boy, how have you got into a strait like
this?"

Ned understood but little ot what she said, as he only
knew a few words in Spanish. It was with difficulty
that he could understand it even when spoken slowly,
while spoken as a native would do he scarce gathered
a word. He saw, however, from her attitude that her
meaning was kind, and that she was disposed to do
what she could for him. He, therefore, in his broken
Spanish, told her how a ship on which he and five of his
comrades were embarked had been driven ashore in the
hurricane, and all lost with the exception of another boy
and himself.

" It is lucky, indeed," the girl said to herself when
he had finished, " that I found that my father had left
Nombre de Dios and had come down to his house here,
for, assuredly, the people would have made short work
of these poor lads had I not been here to aid them. But,
after all, what can I do? My father would, I know, do
anything for my sake, and I have told him how this lad
jumped overboard to save my life, but there is one here
greater than he, that terrible Inquisition. These boys are
heretics, and it will be impossible to conceal, for any time,
from the priests that they are here. Still, at any rate
for a time, we might hide them, and in gratitude only I
would do all in my power for them."

Ned watched her face as these thoughts passed through
her mind. He saw at once that she was willing to do all
in her power, but saw also that there were difficulties in
the way.

"Poor boy," she said, looking at him kindly; "you

88 Under Drake's Flag

must be hungry, indeed," and taking an ivory mallet she
struck a gong which hung in the arbour, and made signs
to Ned to retire for the present. The little black girl
came running out.

"I have changed my mind," her mistress said. "Let
my breakfast be sent out here to me instead of indoors,
and I am hungry; tell the cook to be sure and let it be a
good one, and as soon as possible."

Much surprised by these orders the black girl again left
her.

"My father has gone to town," she said to the boys
when they joined her; "when he comes back I will ask
him what can be done. It will not be easy to hide you,
for these negroes chatter like so many parrots, and the
news will spread all over the town that some English
boys are here, and in that case they will take you
away, and my father would be powerless as I to help
you."

The black cook was indeed astonished at the demolition
of the breakfast effected by her young mistress, but she
put it down to the fact that she must have given a large
portion of it to her dogs, of which one or more were
generally her companions in the garden.

Fortunately on the present occasion the great blood
hound Zeres had gone down into the town with his master.
Of this, however, the cook knew nothing, and muttered
to herself somewhat angrily as she saw the empty dishes
which were brought back to her, "that it was a sin to
give to that creature a meal which was sufficient for five
noblemen."

When Senor Sagasta returned to his beautiful villa in
the afternoon, his daughter at once confided to him what
had happened. He entered warmly into her scheme for

Cast Ashore 89

the aid and protection of the lads, and expressed himself
willing- to do anything- that she could suggest. "But,"
he said, "you know as well as I do that if the news
gets about that two boys of Captain Drake's band are
here, nothing- will save them from the rage of the popu
lation; and indeed if the people and the military authori
ties were disposed to let them alone the Inquisition would
be too strong for them and would claim its own, and
against the Inquisition even governors are powerless.
Therefore if they are to stop, and stop they must, at
least for a time, it must be done in perfect secrecy.
There is no possibility of disguising two English boys
to look like negroes. The only plan I can suggest is
that they should have that gardener's hut. I can remove
the man who lives there at present, and will send him up
the country to look after my place there. Then you
must take old David into our confidence. He and his
wife Floey are perfectly faithful and can be trusted to
the death. It is lucky that she is cook, for she will be
able to prepare food for them. The hut must be kept,
of course, locked up at all times; but as it is close to the
fence, and the window indeed looks into the garden, you
can go there of a day and speak to them and take them
books and lighten their captivity. When it gets dark
I will go with you down the garden and will see these
brave lads. In the meantime old David shall get some
shirts and shoes and other necessaries for them. We
have a plentiful store of things in the magazine, and he
can rig them up there perfectly. I will at once get the
gardener out of the house, and will give David in
structions to carry the things there as soon as it is
empty."

That evening after it was dark the boys, who had been

90 Under Drake's Flag

anxiously listening1 for every movement, saw in the dim
light the white figure of the girl advancing with her father
beside her. When she came to the arbour she raised her
voice.

"Are you here?" she cried. "You can come out
without fear." And as they advanced, "My father
will do all in his power to protect the saviour of his
daughter."

The merchant shook the hands of the boys with the
stately ceremony of the Spaniard, and assured them that
he was their servant indeed for their treatment of his
daughter, and that his house and all that it contained
was at their disposal.

Ned and Gerald understood little enough of what he
was saying, but his manner and gestures were sufficient,
and they thanked him heartily for his kindness. He now
led the way along many winding paths till they reached
a low fence forming the border of the garden, and distant
a long way from the house. A light was already burning
in it, and a black servant was at work within. There was
a break in the fence, by which they passed through with
out difficulty, and on entering the hut they found every
thing prepared for them.

On a table stood a dainty supper, the rooms were swept,
and fresh furniture had been placed in them. In these
countries furniture is of the slightest kind. A hammock
to swing in by day or sleep in by night, a couple of cane
chairs, and a mat of beautifully woven straw for the floor.
This is nearly all the furniture which is required in the
tropics.

First the negro beckoned the boys into an inner room,
and there, to their intense delight, they saw a large tub
full of water, and two piles of clothes lying beside it.

Cast Ashore 91

Don Sagasta and his daughter, after a few more words,
left them, assuring them that they would be safe from
observation there, but that they must not stir out during
the day, and must keep the door securely fastened, and
must give no answer to anyone who might come and
knock or call, unless to themselves, to the black who
was now with them, or his wife, who would accompany
him perhaps the next evening. Donna Anna herself
promised that she would come and see them the next
morning, and that she hoped to find that they were com
fortable.

When left alone the boys luxuriated in the bath, and
then having put on fresh suits they felt clean and com
fortable once again. The clothes were those used by
the upper class of slaves employed as overseers. Don
Sagasta had determined to get them some clothes of a
superior class, but he felt that it was better that, so long
as they were in hiding, they should be dressed in a cos
tume which would, should anyone perchance get a distant
look at them, excite no curiosity or surprise.

The boys ate a hearty supper, and then throwing them
selves into the swinging hammocks were soon fast asleep.
They were up with dawn next morning, tidied up their
room, and made all ready for the visit of Donna Anna.
She soon appeared, having got rid of her little black maid
as upon the morning before. She brought them a store
of books, and among them a Spanish dictionary and
grammar; she told them that she thought it would be
of assistance to pass away their time, and be of the
greatest use for them to learn to speak as much Spanish
as possible, and that she was willing, when she could
spare time unobserved, to teach them the language.
Very gratefully the boys accepted her offer, and day by

92 Under Drake's Flag

day for the next month the young lady came every mor
ning, and for an hour taught them the meaning and pro
nunciation of the words, which during the day they learnt
by heart. They found that the island upon which they
had been cast ashore was Porto Rico, an island of con
siderable size not far from Hispaniola.

CHAPTER VI

In the Woods

IN the evening Senor Sagasta visited the lads, and had
long conversations with them. He promised them that
upon the very first opportunity which should occur he
would aid them to escape, but pointed out that at present
there was no possibility of their getting away. " Captain
Drake," he said, "has left the seas, and until he comes
back again, or some other of your English filibusters, I
see no chance of your escape. As soon as I hear of an
English ship in these waters I will have a small boat, well
fitted up with sails and all necessaries, conveyed to a creek
on the coast. To this you shall be taken down, and make
your way to the point where we hear that the vessel is
accustomed to rendezvous."

This appeared to the boys to be the only possible plan,
and they warmly expressed their gratitude to their host
for his thoughtful kindness.

Another month passed, and then one evening Don
Sagasta came to the hut with a certain anxiety in his
face.

" Is there anything the matter?" Ned, who now began
to speak Spanish with some fluency, asked.

" I am much disturbed. Since you. have been here I
am sure that no one has got a sight of you, and I can

94 Under Drake's Flag

rely so implicitly upon David and Flora that I am sure the
secret has not leaked out there. But from what I hear
it seems that you must have been seen during the time
that you were wrecked and before you came here. I hear
in the town to-day that a rumour is current among- the
people that two white men were seen near the sea upon
the day after the great storm. Someone else, too, seems
to have said that he caught sight of two white men not
far from this house just before daybreak two days after
wards. This report has, it seems, been going from mouth
to mouth, and has at last reached the ears of the governor.
The portions of a wreck which were driven ashore seem to
confirm the story, and unfortunately the board with the
name of the ship was washed ashore, and it is known
to be that of one of those captured by Captain Drake.
Putting the two things together it is supposed that mis
fortune overtook a portion of his fleet, and that two of
his men managed to save their lives, and are now lurking
somewhere about the neighbourhood. I hear that the
governor has ordered a strict search to be set on foot,
and that a large reward is to be offered for the discovery
of any signs of the fugitives."

The next day the boys heard that the persons to whom
the story had been traced had been taken before the
governor and strictly examined, and that he was fully con
vinced of the truth of the story. Three days afterwards
Don Sagasta brought them a copy of a notice which had
been placed in the marketplace, offering a reward of
looo dollars for any news which would lead to the cap
ture of the English pirates, and announcing the severest
punishment upon any who should dare to conceal or to
assist them. Gerald at once said that rather than be a
/cause of anxiety to their kind host and his daughter they

In the Woods 95

would give themselves up. This offer was, however, in
dignantly refused by Don Sagasta.

"No, no," he said; "this must not be. I might take
you into the house, but I fear that with so many servants,
some of whom are as bigoted as any of us whites, you
would be sure to be discovered, and they would either
reveal in confession or disclose to the authorities the fact
of your concealment. The only plan which promises to
offer safety that I can suggest is that you shall take to
the mountains. There are many runaways there, and
although sometimes they are hunted down and slain, yet
they have caverns and other places of concealment where
you might remain for years. I will speak to David about
it at once."

David on being questioned said that there was an old
native woman living at a hut a little way off, who had
the reputation of having the evil eye, and who was cer
tainly acquainted with the doings of the runaways. If
any slave wished to send a message to one of his friends
who had taken to the hills, the old woman would for a
present always convey, or get it conveyed, to the man
for whom it was intended. He thought that it would
be absolutely necessary that some such means should be
taken of introducing the boys to the runaways, other
wise, hunted as these were, they would either fly when
they saw two whites approaching, or would surround and
destroy them.

Don Sagasta at once accepted the suggestion, and
David was Hispatched to the old woman with offers
of a handsome present if she would give a guide to
the boys to the mountains. David was instructed
especially to tell her that they were English, and the
natural enemies of the Spaniards, that they had done

96 Under Drake's Flag

them much harm at sea, and that if caught by the
Spaniards they would be killed. He returned an hour
later with news that the old Indian woman had at once
upon hearing these facts promised to get them passed
up to the hiding-places of the natives.

"You think," Don Sagasta said, "that there is no
fear of her mentioning the fact that she has seen my
friends to any of the searchers?"

" Oh, no," David said; " she is as close as wax. Over
and over again, when she has been suspected of assisting
in the evasion of a slave, she has been beaten and put
to torture, but nothing was ever extracted from her lips,
and it is certain that she would die rather than reveal a
secret."

Donna Anna was much moved when she said adieu to
the lads. She regarded Ned as the preserver of her life,
and both had during the two months of daily intercourse
much endeared themselves to her. Don Sagasta brought
to them a handsome pair of pistols each and a sword, and
then giving them a basket of provisions and a purse con
taining money, which he thought might be useful even
among runaway slaves, he and his daughter bade adieu
to them, with many expressions of kindness and gratitude
on both sides.

" Do not hesitate," Don Sagasta said, "to let me know
if I can at any time do or send anything for you ; should
it be possible I will send a message to you by the old
woman if any expedition on a grand scale is being got
up against the runaways, and this may make your position
more comfortable among them."

Under the guidance of David they then started for the
Indian woman's hut, while Flora set to work to carry
away and obliterate all signs from the hut of its late

In the Woods 97

residents. After a few minutes' walking1 the boys arrived
at the Indian hut. It was constructed simply of boughs
of trees thickly worked together. On hearing their foot
steps an old woman — the boys thought they had never
seen anyone so old — with long1 white hair, and a face
wrinkled till it hardly seemed like the face of a human
being, came to the door with a torch made of resinous
wood held aloft. She peered under her hand at the boys,
and said a few words to David, which he translated to
the boys to be — "And these are English, the people of
whom the Spaniards are as afraid as my people are of
them? Two Spaniards can drive fifty Indians before
them, but I hear that a dozen of these Englishmen can
take a ship with a hundred Spaniards on board. It is
wonderful; they look something1 like our oppressors, but
they are fairer, and their eyes are blue, and they look
honest, and have not that air of pride and arrogance
which the Spaniard never lays aside. I have a boy here."
And as she spoke an Indian boy of some thirteen years
of age slipped out from behind her. " He will show them
to the refuge places of the last of my race. There they
will be well received, for I have sent by him a message
to their chiefs, and it may be that these lads, know
ing the ways of white warfare, will be able to assist
my countrymen, and to enable them to resist these dogs
of Spaniards. The blessing of an old woman be upon
you. I have seen many changes. I have seen my people
possessors of this island, save a small settlement which
they had even then the folly to allow the Spaniards to
possess. I have seen them swept away by the oppressor;
my husband tortured and killed, my brothers burned alive>
all that I loved slain by the Spaniards. Now, it does my
old eyes good to see two of the race who will in the future

(162) 7

98 Under Drake's Flag

drive those dogs from these fair lands as they have driven
my people."

So saying1, she returned into the hut.

The boy prepared at once to start, and the lads, wring
ing the hand of the black who had been so kind to them,
at once followed their guide into the darkness. For some
hours they walked without intermission, sometimes going
at a sling trot and then easing down again. Dark as
was the night their guide trod the paths without hesi
tation or pause. The boys could scarce see the ground
upon which they trod, but the eyes of the native were
keener than theirs, and to him the way seemed as clear
as in broad daylight.

After traversing for some miles a flat level country
they began to mount, and for about two hours ascended
a mountain thickly covered with forest. Then the guide
stopped and motioned to them that he could now go no
farther, and must rest for the present. The boys were
surprised at this sudden stop, for their guide had gone
along so quickly and easily that he taxed to the utmost
their powers of progression, while he himself never
breathed any harder than when walking upon the level
ground. They had, however, no means of interrogating
him, for he spoke no language which they understood.
Without a word the lad threw himself down at full length,
an example which they followed without hesitation.

" I wonder," Ned said, " why he stopped."

" Because he is tired, I expect," Gerald replied, "or
that he does not know the exact spot upon which he is
likely to meet the band, and that he has taken us so far
along the one path which was certain to lead in the
right direction, but for the precise spot he must wait till
morning."

In the Woods 99

It was not many minutes before the three lads were fast
asleep, but with the first gleam of daylight the Indian boy
awoke. Touching his companions he sprang to his feet,
and without hesitation turned off to the right, and climbed
an even steeper path than any which they had followed in
the darkness. The trees grew thinner as they advanced,
and they were soon climbing over bare rock. They saw
now that they were near the extreme summit of one of
the hills. The boy, as they passed through the trees,
had gathered some dry sticks and a handful or two of
green leaves. Upon reaching the top he placed these
down upon the ground and looked towards the east.
The sun would not be up for another half -hour yet.
The boy at once began with steady earnestness to rub
two pieces of stick together, according to their way of
kindling a fire. It was a quarter of an hour before the
sparks began to drop from the wood; these, with some
very dry leaves and tiny chips of wood, the Indian boy
rapidly blew into life, and then with a very small fire of
dry wood he sat patiently watching the east. At the
moment that the sun showed above the sea, he placed
the little fire in the heart of the pile of wood which he
had collected, threw the green leaves upon it, and blew
vigorously until the whole caught fire, and a wreath of
smoke ascended above them. For five minutes only he
allowed the fire to burn, and then at once extinguished
it carefully, knocking the fire from each individual brand.
When the last curl of white smoke had ceased to ascend
he stood up and eagerly looked round the country.

It was a glorious view. On the one hand the wood-
clad hills sloped to the foot of the plain, covered with
plantations, dotted here and there with the villages of
the slaves aqd the white houses of the overseers. At a,

too Under Drake's Flag

distance could be faintly seen the towers of a city, while
beyond, the sea stretched like a blue wall, far as the eye
could see. Inland the country was broken and moun
tainous, the hills being- in all cases thickly covered with
trees. From two points in the heart of these hills white
smoke curled up as soon as the smoke of their fire died
away. These, too, in a short time also ceased to rise,
and the boys knew that they were signal fires in response
to that which their guide had made. The boy hesitated
for a minute or two as to the direction which he should
take.

As, however, one of the fires appeared a good deal
nearer than the other, this probably decided him in its
favour, and he started in a straight line towards the spot
where the smoke had curled up. Another two hours'
walking and they entered an open glade, where ten or
twelve natives and two or three negroes were gathered.
They were greatly surprised at seeing two white men,
but the presence of the native guide apparently vouched
for these visitors, and although one or two of the men
sprang up and at a rapid pace proceeded in the direction
from which the newcomers had arrived, the rest simply
rose to their feet, and, grasping the spears, bows and
arrows, and clubs which they carried, waited silently to
hear what the Indian boy had to tell them.

He poured forth an animated strain of words for a few
minutes, and the faces of the Indians lit up with pleasure.
The one among them who appeared to be the chief of the
party advanced at once to the boys and made every sign
of welcome. One of the negroes also approached, and in
broken Spanish asked them if they could speak in that
language. The boys were able now to reply in the
affirmative, and quickly supplemented the account of

In the Woods 101

them which had been given by their guide, by their own
description of the manner of their coming there.

The negro, after explaining to the rest what the boys
had said, then assured them in the name of the chief
that every welcome was theirs, and that they hailed
among them as a happy incident the arrival of two of
the famous race who were the deadly enemies of the
Spaniards.

The boys on their part assured them that they would
endeavour to repay the hospitality with which they were
received, by their assistance should the Spaniards make
any attacks upon the tribe during the time they were
there, that the English everywhere were the friends of
those who were oppressed by the Spaniards, and that
their countrymen were moved with horror and indig
nation at the accounts which had reached them of the
diabolical treatment to which the Indians were exposed.

The party now pressed still farther into the forest, and
turning up a ravine followed its windings for some dis
tance, and then passing through an exceedingly narrow
gorge reached a charming little valley in which were some
rough huts, showing that the residence of at least a por
tion of the runaways had been reached.

Here for some time life passed uneventfully with the
boys. Their first care was to study sufficient of the lan
guage of the natives to enable them to hold converse with
them, for it was clear to them that they might have to
stop there for some considerable time. Their food con
sisted of roots, of wild fruit, and of yams, which the
natives cultivated in small scattered plots of ground.
Many birds, too, were brought in, the natives bringing
them down with small darts. They were able to throw
their light spears with extreme precision, and often pierced

102 Under Drake's Flag

the larger kinds of birds, as they sat upon the boughs of
trees, with these weapons before they could open their
wings for flight. With bows and arrows, too, they were
able to shoot with great accuracy, and the boys felt sure
that, if properly led, they would be able to make a stout
resistance to the Spaniards.

They heard several times during the first three weeks of
their sojourn there, of raids made by small parties of the
Spaniards, but in none of these cases were the searchers
successful in finding traces of the fugitive slaves, nor did
they come into the part of the wood in which was the
village which served as headquarters of the negroes. At
the end of three weeks the boys accompanied a party of
their friends to other points at which the fugitives were
gathered. Altogether they found that in that part of the
island there were some hundreds of natives, with about
forty or fifty runaway negroes. Through the latter the
boys explained to the natives that they ought to build
strong places to which, in case of necessity, they could
retreat, and where they could offer a desperate resistance
to the enemy. The extreme roughness of the ground, the
deep ravines and precipices, were all favourable for defence,
and although they could not hope to make a permanent
resistance to a large armed force, yet they might easily
resist small parties and then make good their retreat
before large reinforcements could arrive. The negroes
expressed their approval of the plans, but the Indians
shook their heads over the proposition.

"These men have no courage," the blacks said to the
boys; "their heart is broken; they fly at the sound of a
Spaniard's voice. What good do you expect from them?
But if the Spaniards come, we fight. Our people are
brave and we do not fear death. If the Spaniards come

In the Woods 103

we fight with you, and die rather than be taken back as
slaves."

One morning1, on rising, the boys heard some exclama
tions among their allies.

"What is it?" they asked. The negroes pointed to
films of smoke rising from the summits of two hills at a
short distance from each other.

" What is that a sign of?" they asked.

" It is a sign that the Spaniards are coming. No doubt
in pursuit of a runaway; perhaps with those terrible dogs.
The Spaniards could do nothing among these mountains
without them. They follow their game through the thickest
woods."

"But," said Ned, "why on earth do not the negroes
take to the trees? Surely there could be no difficulty in
getting from tree to tree by the branches for a certain
distance so as to throw the hounds off the scent."

"Many do escape in that way," the negro said; "but
the pursuit is often so hot, and the dogs so close upon the
trail, that there is little time for manoeuvres of this sort,
beside which, many of the fugitives are half mad with
fear. I know myself that the baying of those horrible
dogs seems to freeze the blood, and in my case I only
escaped by luckily striking a rivulet. Then my hopes
rose again, and after following it for a time I had the
happy thought of climbing into a tree which overhung it,
and then dropping down at some little distance off, and
so completely throwing the dogs off the trail."

"Why do they not shoot the dogs?" Ned asked; "I
do not mean the men whom they are scenting, but their
friends."

" We might shoot them," the negro said, " if they were
allowed to run free, but here in the woods they are usually

io4 Under Drake's Flag

kept on the chain, so that their masters are close to
them. Listen," he said, "do you not hear the distant
baying?"

Listening attentively, however, the boys could hear
nothing; their ears were not trained so well as that of
the negro, and it was some minutes before they heard a
distant faint sound of the deep bark of a dog. A few
minutes later a negro, panting for breath, bathed in per
spiration, and completely exhausted, staggered into the
glade where they were standing; the other negroes gave
a slight cry of alarm at the proximity of so dangerous a
comrade.

" Save me," the man cried; " I am pursued."

11 How many men are after you?" Ned asked.

The negro started in astonishment at seeing a white face
and being questioned in Spanish. Seeing, however, that
his comrades were on good terms with his questioner, he
answered at once, "There are some twenty of them, with
two dogs."

11 Let us give them a sharp lesson," Ned said to the
negroes standing round. "We have made preparations,
and it is time that we began to show our teeth. If they
find that they cannot come with impunity into our woods,
they will not be so anxious to pursue single men, and will
leave us alone, except they bring all the force of the island
against us."

The negroes looked doubtful as to the wisdom of taking
the initiative, so great was their fear of the Spaniards.
However, the cheerfulness with which the two English
boys proposed resistance animated them, and with sharp
whistles they called the whole of their comrades to the
place.

Ned briefly explained their intentions. "There is no

In the Woods 105

time to be lost; we must take our places on the upper
ground of that narrow valley, and tell the man to run
straight through; we have plenty of stones piled there,
and may give the Spaniards a warmer reception than they
expect. We could not have a better opportunity, for with
such small numbers as they have, they certainly would not
be able to attack us with any hope of success up so steep
a hillside.

The valley which Ned indicated was not one of those
which led in the direction of their stronghold, but it
was a very steep gorge which they had remarked as
being particularly well fitted for checking a pursuing
party, and for that end had prepared piles of stones on
the upper heights. The negroes, taking with them the
sharpened poles which they used as spears, and their
bows and arrows, started under Ned and Gerald to the
indicated spot. Gerald had arranged to go with a party
to one side of the gorge, Ned to the other, but they
decided that it was better that they should keep together,
the more to encourage the natives, and while a few
negroes were sent to one side of the gorge, the main
body under the two English lads kept together on the
other.

The fugitive had already gone ahead with one of the
negroes to show him the way.

Scarcely had they taken their places at the top of the
gorge when the baying of the hounds, which had been
increasing every minute in volume, became so loud that
the Spaniards were clearly close at hand. In another
three or four minutes there issued from the wood a party
of some twenty men, leading two dogs by chains. The
creatures struggled to get forward, and their eyes seemed
almost starting out of their heads with their eagerness to

106 Under Drake's Flag

reach the object of their pursuit. Their speed was, how
ever, moderated by the fact that the band, who were all
on horseback, had to pick their way through the great
boulders. The wood itself was difficult for horsemen,
but here and there were spaces, and they had been able
to ride at a fair pace. On entering the mouth of the
gorge, however, they were obliged to fall into an order
of two abreast, and sometimes even to go in Indian file.
Huge boulders strewed the bottom of the chasm, where
indeed a stream in winter poured through. The sides
were by no means perpendicular, but were exceedingly
precipitous. When the Spaniards had fairly got into the
gorge Ned gave the signal, and a shower of great stones
came leaping down the sides of the rocks upon the
astonished foes. Several were struck from their horses;
many of the horses themselves were knocked down, and
a scene of confusion at once took place. The Spaniards,
however, were accustomed to fighting, and the person in
command giving a few orders, led ten of his men up the
rocks upon the side where the assailants were in strongest
force, while the rest of the party seizing the horses' heads,
drove the frightened animals back through the ravine to
the mouth. The instant that the Spaniards commenced
their ascent long habits of fear told upon some of the
slaves, and these took to their heels at once. Many
others stood more firmly, but were evidently wavering.
Ned and Gerald, however, kept them at work hurling
stones down, and more than one of the Spaniards was
carried off his feet by these missiles; still, they bravely
ascended; then Ned taking a deliberate aim with his
pistol brought down one of the leaders, and this greatly
surprised and checked the advance. The pistol shot was
followed by that of Gerald, and the Spaniards wavered at

In the Woods 107

this unexpected addition to the forces of the natives. Then
Ned in English shouted:

11 Now, my brave Britons, show these Spaniards you can
fight as well on land as at sea."

The words were probably not understood by any of the
Spaniards, but they knew that the language was not
Spanish or Indian, and the thought that a number of
English were there completely paralysed them. They
hesitated and then began slowly to fall back. This was
all that was needed to encourage the negroes. With a
shout these now advanced to the attack, shooting their
arrows and hurling stones, and the retreat of the enemy
was rapidly converted into a flight. Their blood once
thoroughly up, the negroes were ready for anything.
Throwing aside their bows and arrows they charged upon
the Spaniards, and, in spite of the superior arms and
gallant defence of the latter, many of them were beaten
down and killed by the heavy clubs and pointed staves
of the negroes ; more, indeed, would have perished, and
indeed all might have fallen, had not at this moment a
formidable reinforcement of strength reached them. The
men from below having got the horses fairly out of the
gorge, left but two of their number with them and ad
vanced to the assistance of their friends, bringing with
them the two bloodhounds.

" Never fear the hounds," Ned shouted; "we can beat
them to death as easily as if they were pigs. Keep a bold
front and attack them, and I warrant you they are no more
formidable than their masters."

Had these reinforcements arrived earlier they might
have changed the fight, but the Spaniards who survived
were anxious only to be off, and the negroes' blood was
so thoroughly up, that under the leadership of the boys

io8 Under Drake's Flag

they were prepared to face even these terrible dogs.
These threw themselves into the fray with all the ferocity
of their savage nature. Springing at the throats of two
of the negroes, they brought them to the ground. One
of the dogs was instantly disposed of by Gerald, who,
placing his pistol to its ear, blew out its brains. Ned
fell upon the other with his sword, and the negroes joining
him speedily beat it down and slew it. The diversion,
however, had enabled the Spaniards to get upon their
horses, and they now galloped off at full speed among
the trees.

CHAPTER VII

An Attack in Force

THE negroes were delighted at the success of the conflict,
as were the Indians who soon joined them. But ten of
the Spaniards had escaped, the rest having1 fallen either in
the gorge, killed by the rocks, or in the subsequent fight.
Ned and Gerald, who were now looked upon as the
leaders of the party, told the negroes to collect the arms
of the fallen men, and to give a hasty burial to their
bodies. The boys knew too well the savage nature of
the war which raged between the black and the white
to ask whether any of the Spaniards were only wounded.
They knew that an instant death had awaited all who fell
into the hands of their late slaves.

" Now," Ned said, " my friends, you must not suppose
that your fighting is over. The Spaniards will take the
news back to the town, and it is likely enough that we
shall have a large force upon us in the course of a few
days. I do not suspect that they will come before that
time; indeed it may be far longer, for they know that
it will require a very large force to search these woods,
and that now our blood is up it will be no trifle to over
come us in our stronghold. If we are to succeed at last,
labour, discipline, and courage will all be required."

The negroes now besought the boys formally to take
the command, and promised to obey their orders im
plicitly.

100

no Under Drake's Flag

"Well," Ned said, "if you promise this we will lead
you. My friend is older than I, and he shall be captain
and I will be first lieutenant."

" No, no," Gerald said; " this must not be, Ned; I am
the oldest, it is true, by a few months, but you are far
more active and quick than I, and you have been the
leader ever since we left the ship; I certainly will not
take the command from you."

"Well, we will be joint generals," Ned said laughing-,
"and I do not think that our orders will clash."

He then explained to the negroes and natives the course
which he thought that they ought to pursue. First, every
point at which the enemy could be harassed should be
provided with missiles. In the second place, all signs ot
footsteps and paths leading to their accustomed dwelling-
places should be obliterated; thirdly, they should fight as
little as possible, it being their object to fight when pur
sued and interfered with by small parties of Spaniards, but
to avoid conflict with large bodies.

"Our object," he said, "is to live free and unmolested
here; and if the Spanish find that when they come in large
numbers they cannot overtake us, and that when they
come in small ones they are defeated with loss, they will
take to leaving us alone."

All agreed to this policy, and it was arranged that the
women, children, and most feeble of the natives should
retire to almost inaccessible hiding-places far in the
mountains, and that the more active spirits with the
negroes, and divided into five or six bands acting to some
extent independently of each other, but yet in accordance
with a general plan, should remain to oppose the passage
of the enemy.

This, their first success over the Spaniards, caused a

An Attack in Force m

wild exultation among the negroes and natives, and Ned
and Gerald were viewed as heroes. The lads took advan
tage of their popularity to impress upon the negroes the
necessity of organizing themselves and undergoing cer
tain drill and discipline; without it, as they told them,
although occasionally they might succeed in driving back
the Spaniards, yet in the long run they must be defeated.
It was only by fighting with regularity like trained sol
diers that they would make themselves respected by the
Spaniards, and the latter, instead of viewing them as wild
beasts to be hunted, would regard them with respect.

The negroes, fresh from a success gained by irregular
means, were at first loath to undertake the trouble and
pains which the boys desired, but the latter pointed out
that it was not always that the enemy were to be caught
napping, and that after such a check as had been put
upon them the Spaniards would be sure to come in greater
numbers, and to be far more cautious how they trusted
themselves into places where they might be caught in a
trap. The weapons thrown away or left upon the ground
by the Spaniards were divided among the negroes, and
these and the natives were now formed into companies,
natives and negroes being mixed in each company, so
that the latter might animate the former by their ex
ample. Four companies of forty men each were formed,
and for the next fortnight incessant drill went on, by
which time the forest fugitives began to have a fair
notion of the rudimentary elements of drill. When the
boys were not engaged upon this, in company with one
of the native chiefs they examined the mountains, and
at last fixed upon a place which should serve as the last
stronghold, should they be driven to bay by the enemy.

It was three weeks before there were any signs of the

Under Drake's Flag

Spaniards. At the end of that time a great smoke rising
from the signal hill proclaimed that a large body of the
enemy were approaching the forest. This was expected,
for two days before three negro runaways had taken
shelter with them. The negroes had been armed with
long pikes of tough wood sharpened in the fire and
capable of inflicting fully as deadly a wound as those
carried by the Spaniards. Each carried a club, the leaders
being armed with the swords taken from the Spaniards,
while there were also eight arquebuses which had been
gained from the same source. All the natives bore bows
and arrows, with which they were able to shoot with great
accuracy. The negroes were not skilled with these wea
pons, but were more useful from their greater strength
for hurling down rocks and missiles upon the Spaniards
when below. A consultation had been previously held as
to the course to be taken in case of the approach of the
enemy. It was determined as far as possible to avoid
fighting, to allow the Spaniards to tramp from place to
place, and then to harass them by falling upon them in
the night, disturbing their sleep, cutting down sentries,
and harassing them until they were forced by pure ex
haustion to leave the forest.

These tactics were admirably adapted to the nature of
the contest, the only thing which threatened to render
them nugatory was the presence of the fierce dogs of
the Spaniards. Preparations had already been made for
checking the bloodhounds in pursuit of fugitive slaves.
In a narrow place in one of the valleys at the entrance
of the forest a somewhat heavy gallery had been erected;
this was made of wood heaped with great stones, and was
so arranged that any animal running through it would
push aside a stick which acted as a trigger, this would

An Attack in Force 113

release a lever, and the heavy logs above would fall,
crushing- to death anything beneath it. A lookout was
always placed to intercept any fugitive slaves who might
enter the forest and to guide them through this trap,
which was, of course, not set until after they had passed.
This had been done in the case of the two negroes who
had arrived the previous day, and the boys felt that any
pursuit of them by bloodhounds would at once be cut
short and the Spaniards left to their own devices. This
anticipation proved correct; the scouts reported that they
could hear in the distance the baying of dogs, and that
undoubtedly the enemy were proceeding on the track of
the slaves.

The four companies were each told off to positions con
siderably apart from each other, while Ned and Gerald,
with the cacique or chief of the Indians, one negro, and
four or five fleet-footed young men, remained to watch the
success of the trap. This was all that they had hoped ;
the Spaniards were seen coming up the glade, a troop two
hundred strong. The leaders were on horseback, some
fifteen in number, and after them marched the pikemen
in steady array, having men moving at a distance on each
flank to prevent surprise.

"'This," said Ned, "is a regular military enterprise.
The last was a mere pursuing party gathered at random.
It will not be so easy to deal with cautious men like these."

Three hounds ran ahead of the leaders with their noses
on the ground, giving now and then the deep bay peculiar
to their kind. They reached the trap, and rushed into
the gallery, which was some twelve feet in length and of
sufficient height to enable a man on foot to march through.

The leaders on seeing the trap drew in their horses in
doubt what this structure could mean, and shouted to

(162) 8

ii4 Under Drake's Flag

the hounds to stop ; but the latter having the scent strong
in their nostrils ran on without pausing. As the last
hound disappeared in the gallery a crash was heard, and
the whole erection collapsed, crushing the hounds be
neath it.

A cry of consternation and surprise burst from the
Spaniards. The artifice was a new one, and showed that
the fugitives were assisted by men with intellect far in
advance of their own. The pursuit was summarily
checked, for the guides of the Spaniards were now
gone. The enemy paused, and a consultation took place
among the leaders. It was apparently determined to
pursue their way alone, taking every precaution in hopes
that the natives would attack them as they had done the
previous expedition, when they hoped to inflict a decisive
blow upon them. That they would themselves be able
to find the runaway negroes in the forest they had but
small hope, but they thought it possible that these would
again take the initiative.

First, under the guidance of one who had evidently been
in the last expedition, they took their way to the valley
where the fight had taken place. Here all was still.
There were no signs of their foes ; they found in the gorge
a great cairn of stones with a wooden cross placed over
it, and the words in Spanish cut upon it:

" Here lie the bodies of ten Spaniards who sought to
attack harmless men in these woods; let their fate be a
lesson to those who may follow their example."

This inscription caused great surprise among the
Spaniards, who gathered round the mound and con
versed earnestly upon it, looking round at the deep and
silent woods, which might, for aught they knew, contain
foes who had proved themselves formidable.

An Attack in Force 115

It was evident that the soldiers, brave as they were,
yet felt misgivings as to the task upon which they had
entered. They knew that two Englishmen, a portion
of the body which under Drake had rendered themselves
so feared, were leaders of these men, and so great was
the respect in which the English were at that time held,
that this alone vastly added to the difficulties and dangers
which the Spaniards saw awaiting them. However, after
a few minutes' consultation the party moved forward.
It was now formed in two bodies about equally strong,
one going a quarter of a mile ahead, the other follow
ing it.

"What have these men divided their forces for?" the
negro asked Ned.

" It seems to me," he answered, "that they hope we
shall fall upon the first body thinking that there are no
more behind, and that the others, coming up in the midst
of the fight, will take us by surprise; however, we will
let them march. Send word to the company which lies
somewhat in the line which they have taken, of their
approach, and let them at once retire. Tell them to
make circuits in the hills, but to leave behind them suf
ficient traces for the Spaniards to follow. This will en
courage them to keep on, and by nightfall they will be
thoroughly tired out. Whenever they get in valleys or
other places where advantage may be taken of them,
two of the companies shall accompany them at a good
distance on their flanks, and pour in volleys of arrows
or roll stones down upon them. I will take command
of one of these companies, Gerald of the other. Do you,"
he said to the negro, "follow with the last. Keep out
of their reach, but occasionally after they have passed
fire arrows among the rearguard. Do you, cacique,

n6 Under Drake's Flag

make your way to the leading column. See that they
choose the most difficult gorges, and give as far as
possible the appearance of hurry to their flight, so as
to encourage the Spaniards to follow."

These tactics were faithfully carried out. All day the
Spaniards followed, as they believed, close upon the
footsteps of the flying foe, but from time to time from
strong advantage spots arrows were rained upon them,
great rocks thundered down, and wild yells rang through
the forest. Before, however, they could ascend the slopes
and get hand to hand with their enemy these had re
treated, and all was silent as the grave in the woods.

Perplexed, harassed, and somewhat awestruck by these
new and inexplicable tactics, and having lost many men
by the arrows and stones of the enemy, the two troops
gathered at nightfall in an open glade. Here a bivouac
was formed, branches of the trees cut down, and the
provisions which each had brought with him produced.
A rivulet ran through the glade, and the weary troops
were soon lying on the grass, a strong line of sentries
having been placed round. Already the appearance of
the troop was greatly changed from that of the body
which had entered the wood. Then all were eager for
the fray, confident in the extreme of their power to crush
with ease these unarmed negroes and natives, who had
hitherto, except on the last occasion, fled like hunted
deer at their approach.

Now, however, this feeling was checked. They had
learned that the enemy were well commanded and pre
pared, and that so far, while they themselves had lost
several men, not a native had been so much as seen by
them, At nightfall the air became alive with mysterious
noises; cries as of animals, occasionally Indian whoops,

An Attack in Force 117

shouts from one voice to another were heard all around.
The Spaniards stood to their arms and gazed anxiously
into the darkness.

Soon the shouts of the sentries told that flights of
arrows were being discharged at them by invisible foes.
Volley after volley were fired from the musketoons and
arquebuses into the wood. These were answered by
bursts of taunting laughter and mocking yells, while the
rain of arrows continued.

The Spanish troops, whose position and figures could
be seen by the blaze of the lighted fires, while a dense
darkness reigned within the forest, began to suffer
severely from the arrows of these unseen foes. Bodies
fifty strong advanced into the dark forest to search out
their enemies, but they searched in vain. The Indians,
better accustomed to the darkness, and knowing the
forest well, easily retreated as they advanced, and the
Spaniards dared not venture far from their fires, for
they feared being lost in the forest.

The officer commanding, an old and experienced soldier,
soon ceased these useless sorties. Calling his men into
the centre of the glade, he ordered them to stand in
readiness to repel an assault, extinguished every fire, and
allowed half the troop at once to lie down to endeavour
to snatch some sleep. This, however, was impossible,
for although the Indians did not venture upon an attack,
the chorus of shouts and yells was so terrible and con
tinuous, and the flights of arrows at times fell so fast that
not one of the troop ventured to close an eye. From
time to time volleys were fired into the darkness, and
once or twice a loud cry told that some at least of the
balls had taken effect, but the opponents, sheltered each
behind the trunk of a tree, suffered comparatively slightly,

n8 Under Drake's Flag

while many of the Spaniards were struck by their mis
siles.

Morning dawned upon a worn-out and dispirited band,
but with daylight their hopes revived. Vigorous sorties
were made into the wood, and though these discovered
in a few places marks of blood where some of their
enemies had fallen and signs of a party being carried
away, the woods were now as deserted as they had ap
peared to be on the previous evening when they first halted.
There was a consultation among the leaders, and it was
determined to abandon the pursuit of these invisible foes,
as it was agreed that nothing short of a great effort by
the whole available force of the island would be sufficient
to cope with a foe whose tactics were so bewildering and
formidable.

Upon their march out from the wood the troop was
pursued with the same persistence with which it had been
dogged on the preceding day; and when at length it
emerged and the captain counted the numbers of his men,
it was found that there were no less than thirty wounded,
and that twenty had been left behind dead.

The dwellers of the wood were overjoyed with their
success, and felt that a new existence had opened before
them. Hitherto they had been fugitives only, and no
thought of resistance to the Spaniards had ever entered
their minds. They felt now that so long as they remained
in the woods, and maintained their drill and discipline
and persisted in the tactics which they had adopted, they
could defy the Spaniards, unless, indeed, the latter came
in overwhelming strength.

Some time elapsed before any fresh effort was made by
the Spaniards. The affair caused intense excitement in
the city, and it is difficult to say whether alarm or rage

An Attack in Force 119

most predominated. It was felt that a great effort must
be made to crush the men of the forest, for unless this
were done a vast number of the negro slaves would escape
and join them, and the movement would become more
formidable every day. Upon the part of those in the
forest great consultations took place ; some of the negroes
were for sending messages to the slaves to rise and join
them, but Ned and Gerald strongly opposed this course.
There were, as they pointed out, no means whatever in
the forest for supporting a larger body of men than those
gathered there. The tree-clad hills which constituted
their stronghold were some thirty miles in diameter, and
the supply of fruits, of roots, and of birds were sufficient
for their wants, but it would be very different were their
numbers largely increased. Then they would be forced
to make raids upon the cultivated ground beyond, and
here, however strong, they would be no match for the
Spaniards, whose superior arms and discipline would be
certain to give them victory. The Indians strongly
supported the reasoning of the boys, and the negroes,
when they fully understood the difficulties which would
arise, finally acquiesced in their arguments.

Schemes were broached for making sallies from the
forest at night and falling upon the plantations of the
Spaniards. This offered greater chances of success, but
the boys foresaw that all sorts of atrocities would be sure
to take place, and that no quarter would be given to
Spaniards of either age or sex. They therefore combated
vigorously this proposal also; they pointed out that so
long as they remained quiet in the forest, and were not
joined by large numbers of fugitive negroes, the Spaniards
might be content to let them remain unmolested; but
upon the contrary, were they to adopt offensive tactics,

120 Under Drake's Flag

not only would every Spaniard in the island take up arms
against them, but if necessary they would send for help
to the neighbouring islands, and would assemble a force
sufficient thoroughly to search the woods, and to annihilate
them. The only case in which the boys considered that
an attack upon the Spaniards would be lawful would be
in the event of fresh expeditions being organized. In
that case they were of opinion that it would be useful
to destroy one or two large mansions and plantations as
near as possible to the town, sending at the same time
a message to the Spaniards that if they persisted in dis
turbing them in the forest, a similar fate would befall
every Spanish plantation situated beyond the town.

It was not long before these tactics were called into
play. One of the negroes had, as was their custom,
gone down to the town to purchase such articles as were
indispensable. Upon these occasions, as usual, he went
down to the hut of the old woman who acted as their
intermediary, and remained concealed there during the
day while she went into the town to buy cotton for dresses
and other things. This she could only do in small
quantities at a time, using various shops for the purpose,
returning each time with her parcel to the hut. The
suspicion of the Spaniards had, however, been aroused,
and orders had been given to watch her closely; the
consequence was that, after purchasing a few articles,
she was followed, and a band of soldiers surrounded the
hut after she had entered. The fugitive was there found
concealed, and he and the old woman were at once
fastened in the hut; this was then set alight, and they
were burned to death upon the spot.

When the news reached the mountains Ned at once
determined upon a reprisal. The negroes and natives

An Attack in Force 121

were alike ready to follow him, and the next night the
whole party, a hundred and fifty strong, marched down
from the forest. The object of their attack was a hand
some palace belonging to the military governor of the
island situated at a short distance from the town.

Passing through the cultivated country noiselessly and
without detection, they reached the mansion and sur
rounded it. There were here a guard of some thirty
soldiers, and sentries were placed at the entrance. At
the signal given by the blowing of a conch shell, the attack
commenced on all sides. The sentries were at once shot
down, and the negroes and their allies speedily penetrated
into the building. The Spanish guard fought with great
bravery, but they were overpowered by the infuriated
negroes. Yells, shrieks, and shouts of all kinds resounded
through the palace.

Before starting on their adventure Ned and Gerald had
exacted a solemn oath from each of the men who were to
take part in it, that on no account would he lift his hand
against a defenceless person, and also that he spare every
body who surrendered. The negroes were greatly loath
to take this promise, and had Ned urged them to do so
purely for the sake of humanity, the oath would unques
tionably have been refused, for in those days of savage
warfare there was little or no mercy shown on either side.
It was only on the ground of expediency and the extreme
necessity of not irritating the Spaniards beyond a certain
point that he succeeded in obtaining their promise.

In the principal room of the palace they found the
governor himself; his sword was in his hand, and he was
prepared to defend his life to the last. The boys, however,
rushed forward and cried to him to throw his sword down
as the only plan by which his life could be saved. The

122 Under Drake's Flag

brave officer refused, answering by a vigorous thrust. In
a moment the two lads had sprung upon him, one from
each side, and wrested his sword from his hand. The
negroes with yells of triumph were rushing upon him with
drawn swords, but the boys sternly motioned them back,
keeping well in front of their prisoner.

"You have sworn," they said: "and the first man who
breaks his oath we will shoot through the head." Then
turning to the governor they said: "Sir, you see what
these men whom you have so long hunted as wild beasts
can do. Take warning from this, and let all in the town
know the determination to which we have arrived. If we
are let alone we will let others alone. We promise that
no serious depredations of any kind shall be performed by
any of our party in the forest; but if we are molested, or
if any of our band who may fall into your hands are ill-
treated, we swear that for each drop of blood slain we will
ravage a plantation and destroy a house. On this occa
sion, as you see, the negroes have abstained from shed
ding blood, but our influence over them may not avail in
future. Now that you see that we too can attack, you
may think fit to leave us alone. In case of serious inter
ference with us, we will lay waste the land up to the houses
of the city, and destroy every plantation and hacienda."

Then they hurried the governor to a back entrance, gave
him his sword again, and having seen him in safety fairly
beyond the reach of any of their party who might be
wandering about, dismissed him.

Returning to the palace they had to exert themselves to
the utmost to prevail on the negroes to spare all who were
there, indeed one man who refused to obey Ned's orders
and to lower his club, he shot down at once. This vigor
ous act excited for a moment yells of indignation among

An Attack in Force 123

the rest, but the firm bearing of the two young English
men, and the knowledge that they were acting as they
themselves had given them leave to act, should any of the
party break their oaths, subdued them into silence.

The palace was now stripped of all portable and useful
articles. Ned would not permit anything to be carried
away of a merely ornamental or valuable character, but
only such as kitchen utensils, crockery, stoves, arms,
hangings, and articles of a description that would be useful
to them in their wild life in the forest. The quantity of
arms taken was considerable, as, in addition to those
belonging to the guard, there were a considerable number
piled in the armoury in readiness for any occasion when
they might be required.

When all that could be useful to them was removed,
lights were applied to the hangings and wooden lattice
work, and before they retired they saw the flames take
sufficient possession of the building to ensure its destruc
tion.

Many of the negroes had at first laden themselves with
wine, but this Ned peremptorily refused to allow them to
carry away. He knew that it was of the most supreme
necessity that good fellowship and amity should run
between the members of the bands, and that were wine to
be introduced quarrels might arise which would in the end
prove fatal to all. He allowed, however, sufficient to be
taken away to furnish a reasonable share for each man at
the feast which it was only natural they would wish to
hold in commemoration of their victory.

CHAPTER VIII

The Forest Fastness

IT was with a feeling of triumph, indeed, that the negroes
after gaining their own fastness looked back at the sky
lighted by the distant conflagration. They had now for
the first time inflicted such a lesson upon their oppressors
as would make a deep mark. They felt themselves to be
really free, and knew that they in their turn had struck
terror into the hearts of the Spaniards. Retiring to the
depths of the forest great fires were made, sheep, fowls,
and other articles of provision which had been brought
back were killed and prepared. Huge bonfires were lit,
and the party, secure that for twenty-four hours at least
the Spaniards could attempt no retributive measures, sat
down to enjoy the banquet.

They had driven with them a few small bullocks and
also some scores of sheep; these, however, were not
destined for the spit. They were to be placed in the heart
of their country, so that, unless disturbed by the Spaniards,
they might prove a source of future sustenance to them.
There was wild feasting that night, with dances and songs
of triumph in the negro and native dialects, and Ned and
Gerald were lauded and praised as the authors of the change
which had taken place in the condition of the fugitives.

Even the stern severity of Ned's act was thoroughly
approved, and it was agreed again that anyone refusing
to obey the orders of the white chiefs should forfeit his life.

124

The Forest Fastness 125

The blow which the negroes had struck caused intense
consternation throughout Hispaniola.

The younger and more warlike spirits were in favour of
organizing an instant crusade, for sending to the other
islands for more troops, for surrounding the forest country
and for putting the last of the negroes to the sword.
More peaceful counsels, however, prevailed, for it was
felt that the whole open country was, as Ned had told the
governor, at their mercy, that the damage which could be
inflicted would be enormous, and the satisfaction of putting
the fugitives to death, even if they were finally conquered,
would be but a poor recompense for the blow which might
be given to the prosperity and wealth of the island. All
sorts of schemes were mooted by which the runaways
could be beguiled into laying down their arms, but no
practicable plan could be hit upon.

In the meantime, in the mountains, the bands improved
in drill and discipline. They had now gained some con
fidence in themselves, and gave themselves up heartily to
the work. Portions of land, too, were turned up, and
yams and other fruits on a larger scale than had hitherto
been attempted, were planted. A good supply of goats
was obtained, huts were erected, and the lads determined
that, at least as long as the Spaniards allowed it, their
lives should be made as comfortable as possible. Fugitive
slaves from time to time joined the party, but Ned strongly
discouraged any increase at present from this cause. He
was sure that, were the Spaniards to find that their run
aways were sheltered there, and that a general desertion
of their slaves might take place, they would be obliged
in self-defence to root out this formidable organization in
their midst. Therefore emissaries were sent out among
the negroe? stating that none would be received in the

126 Under Drake's Flag

mountains save those who had previously asked permis
sion, this being only accorded in cases where such extreme
brutality and cruelty had been exercised by the masters as
would wholly justify the flight of the slave.

For some months a sort of truce was maintained between
the Spaniards and this little army in the woods. The
blacks observed the promises which Ned had made with
great fidelity, the planters found that no depredations took
place, and that the desertions among their slaves were no
more numerous than before, and had it depended solely
upon them no further measures would have been taken.

The case, however, was different among the military
party in the island. To them the failure of the expedition
into the forest and the burning of the governor's house
were matters which seriously affected their pride. Defeat
by English buccaneers they were accustomed to, and
regarding the English at sea as a species of demon against
whom human bravery availed little, they were slightly
touched by it; but that they should be defied by a set
of runaway slaves and of natives, whom they had formerly
regarded with contempt, was a blow to their pride.
Quietly, and without ostentation, troops were drafted into
the island from the neighbouring posts, until a formidable
force had been gathered there. The foresters had now
plenty of means of communication with the negroes, who
regarded them as saviours to whom they could look for
rescue and shelter in case of their masters' cruelty, and
were always ready to send messengers up into the forest
with news of every occurrence which took place under
their observation. The grown-up slaves, of course, could
not leave the plantation, but there were numbers of fleet-
footed lads who, after nightfall, could be dispatched from
the huts into the mountains and return before daylight,

The Forest Fastness 127

while, even should they remain until the next night, they
would attract no attention by their absence.

Thus, then, Ned and Gerald learned that a formidable
body of Spaniards were being" collected quietly in the town,
and every effort was made to meet the coming storm.
The various gorges were blocked with high barricades;
difficult parts of the mountain were, with great labour,
scarped so as to render the advance of an armed force
difficult in the extreme; great piles of stones were collected
to roll down into the ravines, and provisions of yams,
sweet potatoes, and other food were stored up.

The last stronghold had, after a great debate, been fixed
upon at a point in the heart of one of the hills. This was
singularly well adapted for defence; the hill itself was
extremely precipitous on all sides, on one side it fell sheer
down. A goat track ran along the face of this precipice
to a point where the hill fell back, forming a sort of semi
circular arena on the very face of the precipice. This
plateau was some two acres in extent. Here quantities of
forage were heaped up in readiness for the food of such
animals as might be driven in there. The track itself was,
with great labour, widened, platforms of wood being placed
at the. narrow points, and steps were cut in the hill behind
the plateau to enable them, should their stronghold be
stormed, to escape at the last moment up to the hilltop
above. In most places the cliff behind the plateau rose so
steeply as to almost overhang the foot, and in these were
many gaps and crevices in which a considerable number
of people could take shelter so as to avoid stones and
other missiles hurled down from above. At one point, in
particular, the precipice overhung, and under this a strong
erection of the trunks of trees was made. This was for
the animals to be placed in ; the heavy roof was amply

J28 Under Drake's Flag

sufficient to keep out any bullet shots, while from its posi
tion no masses of rock could be dropped upon it. It was
not thought probable that the Spaniards would harass
them much from above, for the ascent to the summit was
everywhere extremely difficult, and the hillside was per
fectly bare, and sloped so sharply upward from the edge
of the precipitous cliff, that it would be a difficult and
dangerous task to descend so as to fire down into the
arena; and, although every precaution had been taken, it
was felt that there was little fear of any attack from above.

At last all was in readiness as far as the efforts of those
in the forest could avail. A message was then sent in to
the governor to the effect that the men of the forest desired
to know for what purpose so many soldiers were being
assembled in the island, and that, on a given day, unless
some of these were embarked and sent off they would con
sider that a war was being prepared against them, and
that the agreement that the outlying settlements should be
left intact was therefore invalid. As the boys had antici
pated the Spaniards answered this missive by an instant
movement forward, and some four hundred men were
reported as moving out towards the hills. This the boys
were prepared for, and simultaneously with the movement
the whole band — divided into parties of six, each of which
had its fixed destination and instructions, all being alike
solemnly pledged to take no life in cold blood and to
abstain from all unnecessary cruelties — started quickly
from the forest.

That night the Spanish force halted near the edge of
the forest, but at midnight a general consternation seized
the camp when, from fifty different points, flames were
seen suddenly to rise from the plain. Furious at this
misfortune the general in command put his cavalry in

The Forest Fastness 129

motion and scoured the country, only to find, however,
that the whole of the haciendas of the Spanish proprietors
were in flames, and that fire had been applied to all the
standing crops. Everywhere he heard the same tale, that
those who had resisted had been killed, but that no harm
had been inflicted upon defenceless persons.

This was so new a feature in troubles with the negroes
that the Spaniards could not but be surprised and filled
with admiration at conduct so different to that to which
they were accustomed. The sight of the tremendous de
struction of property, however, roused them to fury, and
this was still further heightened when towards morning a
great burst of flame in the city proclaimed that the negroes
had fallen upon the town while the greater portion of its
defenders were withdrawn.

This was indeed a masterly stroke on the part of the
boys. They knew that even deducting those who had
set forth there would still be an amply sufficient force
in the city to defeat and crush their band, but they
thought that by a quick stroke they might succeed in
inflicting a heavy blow upon them. Each of the bands,
therefore, had instructions after doing its allotted share
of incendiarism to make for the town, and to meet at a
certain point outside it. Then quietly and noiselessly
they had entered. One party fell upon the armoury, and
another attacked with fury the governor's house; the
guards there were, as had happened with his residence
in the country, cut down. Fire was applied in a dozen
places, and before the astonished troops and inhabitants
could rally from the different parts of the town, the
negroes were again in the country, having fulfilled their
object and carried off with then? a large additional stock
of arms.

a

130 Under Drake's Flag

Before the cavalry from the front could arrive they were
again far in the country, and, making1 a long detour,
gained their fastness, having struck a terrible blow, with
the cost to themselves of only some eight or ten lives.

It was a singular sight, as they looked out in the
morning from their hilltops; great masses of smoke ex
tended over the whole country; for although most of
the dwellings were by this time levelled to the ground—
for, built of the lightest construction, they offered but
little resistance to the flames — from the fields of maize
and cane clouds of smoke were still rising as the con
flagration spread, and at one stroke the whole agricul
tural wealth of the island was destroyed. The boys
regretted that this should necessarily be the case, but
they felt that it was now war to the knife between the
Spaniards and them, and that such a defeat would be
beneficial. This, indeed, was the case, for the com
mander drew back his troops to the town in order to
make fresh arrangements before venturing upon an attack
on foes who showed themselves possessed of such des
perate determination.

Another six weeks elapsed, indeed, before a forward
movement was again commenced, and in that time con
siderable acquisitions of force were obtained. Strong as
the bands felt themselves, they could not but be alarmed
at the thought of the tremendous storm gathering to
burst over their heads. The women had long since been
sent away to small native villages existing on the other
side of the island and living at peace with their neigh
bours. Thither Ned also dispatched several of the party
whom he believed to be either wanting in courage, or
whose constancy he somewhat doubted. A traitor now
would be the destruction of the party, and it was certain

The Forest Fastness 131

that any negro deserting to the enemy and offering to
act as their guide to the various strongholds of the de
fenders would receive immense rewards. Thus it was
imperative that every man of whose fidelity and constancy
the least doubt was entertained should be carefully sent
out of the way of temptation.

All the band were, indeed, pledged by a most solemn
oath, and death by torture was the penalty awarded for
any act of treachery.

The greater portion of the force were now provided with
European arms; the negroes had musketoons or arque
buses, the natives still retained the bow, while all had
pikes and spears. They were undefended by protective
armour, and in this respect the Spaniards had a great
advantage in the fight; but, as the boys pointed out,
this advantage was more than counterbalanced by the
extra facility of movement on the part of the natives,
who could scale rocks and climb hills absolutely inac
cessible to their heavily armed and weighty opponents.
The scouts who had been stationed on the lookout at
the edge of the forest brought word that the Spaniards,
nigh fifteen hundred strong, had divided in six bodies,
and were marching so as to enter the forest from six
different and nearly equidistant points. Each band was
accompanied by bloodhounds and a large number of other
fierce dogs of the wolf-hound breed, which the Spaniards
had imported for the purpose of attacking negroes in
their hiding-places. Of these animals the negroes had
the greatest dread, and even the bravest, who were ready
to match themselves against armed Spaniards, yet trem
bled at the thought of the encounter with these ferocious
animals.

It was clear that no repetition of the tactics formerly

132 Under Drake's Flag

pursued would be possible; for, if any attempt at night
attacks were made, the dogs would rush out and attack
them, and not only prove formidable enemies themselves,
but guide the Spaniards to the places where they were
stationed. Ned and Gerald would fain have persuaded
the natives that dogs, after all, however formidable they
might appear, were easily mastered by well-armed men,
and that any dog rushing to attack them would be pierced
with spears and arrows, to say nothing of being shot by
the arquebuses before he could seize any of them. The
negroes, however, had known so many cases in which
fugitives had been horribly torn, and, indeed, frequently
killed by these ferocious animals, that the dread of them
was too great for them to listen to the boys' explanations.
The latter, seeing that it would be useless to attempt to
overcome their fears on this ground, abstained from the
attempt.

It had been agreed that, in the event of the Spaniards
advancing from different quarters, one column only should
be selected for a main attack; and that, while the others
should be harassed by small parties who should cast down
rocks upon them while passing through the gorges, and
so inflict as much damage as possible, no attempt would
be made to strike any serious blow upon them. The
column selected for attack was naturally that whose path
led through the points which had been most strongly
prepared and fortified. This band mustered about three
hundred, and was clearly too strong to be attacked in
open fight by the forest bands. Gerald and Ned had
already talked the matter over in every light, and decided
that a purely defensive fight must be maintained, each
place where preparations had been made being held to
the last, and a rapid retreat beaten to the next barricade.

The Forest Fastness 133

The Spaniards advanced in heavy column; at a distance
of a hundred yards on each side marched a body of fifty
in compact mass, thereby sheltering the main body from
any sudden attack. The first point at which the lads
had determined to make a stand was the mouth of a
gorge. Here steep rocks rose perpendicularly from the
ground, running almost like a wall along that portion
of the forest; in the midst of this was a cleft through
which a little stream ran. It was here that the boys had
made preparations; the point could not be turned without
a long and difficult march along the face of the cliff, and
on the summit of this sixty men divided into two parties,
one on each side of the fissure, were stationed. The
Spaniards advanced until they nearly reached the mouth
of the ravine.

It must be remembered that, although the forest was
very thick and the vegetation luxuriant, yet there were
paths here and there made by the constant passing to
and fro of the occupants of the wood. Their main direc
tion acted as a guide to the Spaniards, and the hounds,
by their sniffing and eagerness, acted as a guide to the
advancing force. They paused when they saw opening
before them this entrance to the rocky gorge. While
they halted the increased eagerness of the dogs told
them that they were now approaching the point where
their foes were concealed, and the prospect of an attack
on so strong a position was formidable even to such a
body.

A small party of thirty men was told off to advance and
reconnoitre the position. These were allowed to enter the
gorge and to follow it for a distance of a hundred yards to
a point where the sides were approached to their nearest
point. Then, from a parapet of rock piled across the

134 Under Drake's Flag

ravine came a volley ot musketry, and simultaneously
from the heights of either side great stones came crash
ing down. Such of the party as did not fall at the first
discharge fired a volley at their invisible assailants and
then hurried back to the main body.

It was now clear that fighting and that of a serious
character was to be undertaken. The Spanish comman
der rapidly reconnoitred the position, and saw that here,
at least, no flanking movement was possible. He there
fore ordered his men to advance for a direct attack.
Being more afraid of the stones from above than of the
defenders in the ravine, the Spaniards prepared to advance
in skirmishing order; in that way they would be able to
creep up to the barricade of rocks with the least loss to
themselves from the fire of its defenders, while the stones
from above would prove far less dangerous than would
be the case upon a solid column. With great determina
tion the Spanish troops advanced to the attack; as they
neared the mouth of the gorge, flights of arrows from
above were poured down upon them, and these were
answered by their own musketeers and bowmen, although
the figures occasionally exposed above offered but a poor
mark in comparison to that afforded by the column below.
The men on the ridge were entirely natives, the boys
having selected the negroes, on whose courage at close
quarters they could more thoroughly rely, for the de
fence of the ravine. The firearms in those days could
scarcely be termed arms of precision; the bell -mouth
arquebuses could carry a large and heavy charge, but
there was nothing like accuracy in their fire; and although
a steady fire was kept up from the barricade, and many
Spaniards fell, yet a larger number succeeded in making
their way through the zone of fire by taking advantage

The Forest Fastness 135

of the rocks and bushes, and these gathered near the
foot of the barricade.

The stones which came crashing from above did serious
damage among them, but the real effect of these was
more moral than physical. The sound of the great masses
of stone plunging down the hillside, setting in motion
numbers of small rocks as they came, tearing down the
bushes and small trees, was exceedingly terrifying at first,
but as block after block dashed down doing comparatively
little harm, the Spaniards became accustomed to them,
and keeping under the shelter of masses of rock to the
last moment prepared all their energies for the attack.
The Spanish commander found that the greater portion
of his troop were within striking distance, and he gave
the command to those gathered near the barricade to
spring forward to the attack.

The gorge at this point was some fifteen yards wide.
The barricade across it was thirty feet in height. It
was f©rmed of blocks of stone of various sizes, inter
mingled with which were sharp stakes with their points
projecting, lines of bushes and arms of trees piled out
wards, and the whole was covered loosely with sharp
prickly creepers cut from the trees and heaped there.
A more difficult place to climb, even without its being
defended from above, would be difficult to find. The
covering of thorny creepers hid the rocks below, and at
each step the soldiers put their feet into deep holes
between the masses of rock and fell forward, lacerat
ing themselves horribly with the thorns or coming face
downwards on one of the sharp-pointed stakes. But if
without any resistance from above the feat of climbing
this carefully prepared barricade was difficult, it was
terrible when from the ridge above a storm of bullets

136 Under Drake's Flag

swept down. It was only for a moment that the negroes
exposed themselves in the act of firing. Behind, the
barricade was as level and smooth as it was difficult upon
the outer side. Great steps, some three feet wide, had
been prepared of wood so that the defenders could easily
mount, and standing- in lines relieve each other as they
fired. The stones of the top series had been carefully
chosen of a form so as to leave, between each, crevices
through which the defenders could fire while scarcely ex
posing themselves to the enemy. The Spaniards behind
endeavoured to cover the advance of their comrades by
keeping up a heavy fire at the summit of the barri
cade, and several of the negroes were shot through the
head in the act of firing. Their loss, however, was
small in comparison to that of the assailants, who strove
in vain to climb up the thorny ascent, their position
being the more terrible inasmuch as the fire from the
parties on the rocks above never ceased, and stones
kept up a sort of bombardment on those in the ravine.
Even the fierce dogs could with difficulty climb the thorn-
covered barriers, and those who reached the top were
instantly shot or stabbed.

At last, after suffering very considerable loss, the
Spanish commander drew off his soldiers, and a wild yell
of triumph rose from the negroes. The combat, however,
had, as the boys were aware, scarcely begun, and they
now waited to see what the next effort of the Spaniards
would be. It was an hour before the latter again ad
vanced to the attack. This time the troops were carrying
large bundles of dried grass and rushes, and although
again suffering heavily in the attack, they piled these at
the foot of the barricade, and in another minute a flash
of fire ran up the side; the smoke and flame for a time

THE BARRICADE

Page 136

The Forest Fastness 137

separated the defenders from their foes, and the fire ceased
on both sides, although those above never relaxed their
efforts to harass the assailants.

As the Spaniards had calculated, the flame of the great
heap of straw communicated with the creepers and burnt
them up in its fiery tongue, and when the flames abated
the rocks lay open and uncovered.

The Spaniards now with renewed hopes advanced again
to the attack, and this time were able, although with
heavy loss, to make their way up the barricade. When
they arrived within three or four feet of the top Ned gave
the word, and a line of thirty powerful negroes, each
armed with a long pike, suddenly arose, and with a yell
threw themselves over the edge and dashed down upon
the Spaniards; the latter struggling to ascend, with un
steady footing on the loose and uneven rocks, were unable
for an instant to defend themselves against this assault.

The negroes, barefooted, had no difficulty on the sur
face which proved so fatal to the Spaniards, and like the
crest of a wave they swept their opponents headlong
down the face of the barricade. The heavily armed
Spaniards fell over each other, those in front hurling
those behind backwards in wild confusion, and the first
line of negroes being succeeded by another armed with
axes who completed the work which the first line had
begun, the slaughter for a minute was terrible.

For some thirty paces the negroes pursued their ad
vantage, and then at a loud shout from Ned turned, and
with a celerity equal to that of their advance the whole
were back over the barricade before the Spaniards in
rear could awaken from their surprise, and scarcely a
shot was fired as the dark figures bounded back into
shelter.

138 Under Drake's Flag

This time the Spanish officer drew back his men
sullenly; he felt that they had done all that could be
expected of them; upwards of sixty men had fallen, it
would be vain to ask them to make the assault again.
He knew too that by waiting the other columns would
be gradually approaching, and that on the morrow some
method of getting in the enemy's rear would probably be
discovered.

In the meantime he sent off fifty men on either flank
to discover how far its rocky wall extended, while
trumpeters under strong guards were sent up to the hill
tops in the rear and sounded the call lustily, musketoons
heavily charged so as to make as loud a report as possible
were also fired to attract the attention of the other
columns.

The boys were perfectly aware that they could not
hope finally to defend this position. They had, however,
given the Spaniards a very heavy lesson, and the success
of the defence had immensely raised the spirit and courage
of their men. The signal was therefore given for a
retreat, and in half an hour both the Indians on the
summit of the hill and the negroes behind the barricade
had fallen back, leaving only some half-dozen to keep
up the appearance of defence, and to bring back tidings
of the doings of the enemy, while the rest hurried off to
aid the detached parties to inflict heavy blows upon the
other columns. It was found that these were steadily
approaching, but had lost a good many men; the re
inforcements enabled the natives to make a more deter
mined resistance, and in one or two places the columns
were effectually checked. The reports when night fell
were that the Spaniards had altogether lost over two
hundred men, but that all their columns had advanced a

The Forest Fastness 139

considerable distance towards the centre of the forest and
had halted, each as they stood, and bivouacked, keeping
up huge fires and careful watches.

It formed no part, however, of the boys' plan to attack
them thus, and when morning dawned the whole of the
defenders, each taking different paths, as far as possible,
some even making great circuits so as to deceive the
enemy, were directed to make for the central fortress.
The intermediate positions, several of which were as
strong as the barricade which they had so well defended,
were abandoned, for the advance from other quarters
rendered it impossible to hold these.

CHAPTER IX

Baffled

BY midday all the defenders of the forest were assembled
in the semicircular plateau on the face of the hill, and
scouts having been placed near the entrance they awaited
the coming of the enemy. So far as possible, every
means had been taken to prevent the access to their place
of retreat being discovered. A stream had been turned
so as to run down a small ravine leading to its approach,
trees which had been blown down by the wind had been
previously brought from a considerable distance, and
these were piled in careless confusion across the gorge
so as to look as if they had fallen there, and give an
idea that no one could have passed that way. For the
next two days all was quiet. A scout upon the hilltop
and others who were told off to watch the Spaniards
reported that the woods below were being thoroughly
searched, that the enemy were acting in the most
methodical way, the columns being now in close con
nection with each other, the intermediate forest being
searched foot by foot, and that all were converging
towards the central mountains of the position. The dogs
had proved valuable assistants, and these were tracking
the paths used by them and steadily leading them towards
the stronghold. That they would finally escape detection
none of the defenders had much hope. The Spaniards

140

Baffled 141

would be sure that they must be somewhere within their
line; and after the loss suffered and the immense pre
parations made it was certain that they would not retire
until they had solved the mystery, and, if possible, an
nihilated the forest bands. On the fourth day after
entering the wood the Spaniards came to the point where
the barricade of trees had been erected.

So skilfully had this been constructed that they would
have retired, believing that there was no path beyond
this little gorge; however, the restlessness and anger of
the dogs convinced them that there must be something
behind. Slowly a passage was cut with axes through
the virgin forest on either side, for the lesson they had
received had checked their impetuosity. They came down
at the side of the barricade, and thus having passed
it, pressed forward in steady array until they came to
the foot of the great cliff; here the dogs were not long
before they pointed out to the assailants the narrow
path, scarce visible, running along its face, and a shout
of satisfaction from the Spaniards testified that they
now felt certain that they had caught their enemies in
a trap.

Parties were sent off to positions whence they could
obtain a good view of the place, and these soon reported
that the ledge continued to a great opening in the face
of the precipice, that in some places logs had been fixed
to widen the path, and that there was plenty of room on
the plateau formed by the retirement of the hill face for
a large body to have taken refuge. They also reported
that the cliffs rose behind this amphitheatre almost, if
not quite, perpendicularly for a great height, and that
still higher the bare rock fell away at so steep an angle
that it would be difficult in the extreme to take up such

142 Under Drake's Flag

a position from above as would enable them to keep up
a musketry fire or to hurl rocks upon the defenders of
the amphitheatre.

When the reports were considered by the Spanish
leader, he saw at once that this was not an enterprise
to be undertaken rashly. Men were sent down to the
plain below to reconnoitre, while others were dispatched
round the mountain to see whether the path extended
across the whole face of the precipice, and also to dis
cover, if possible, whether the recess was commanded
from above. Both reports were unfavourable; from the
valley the great natural strength of the position was mani
fest, for half a dozen men could defend such a path as
this against a thousand by placing themselves behind an
angle and shooting down all who turned the corner,
while the men from above reported that the peak shelved
so rapidly towards the top of the sheer precipice that it
would be impossible to get near enough to the edge to
see down into the amphitheatre. They reported, how
ever, that stones and rocks set going would dash down
below, and that points could be gained from which these
missiles could be dispatched on their errand.

A council of war was held, and it was determined in
the first place to endeavour to force the position by direct
attack. Some men of approved courage were chosen to
lead the forlorn hope, a number of marksmen with arrows
and firearms were placed in the valley to keep up a fire
upon any who might show themselves on the path, while
above, several hundreds of men were sent up with crow
bars to loosen and hurl down rocks.

The defenders on their part were not idle. Two spots
had been chosen in the pathway for the defence ; at each
of these the face of the cliff extended sharply out in an

Baffled 143

angle, and it was on the side of this angle next to the
amphitheatre that the preparations were made. Here
barricades of stones were heaped up on the path, which
at this point was some three yards wide; six of the
steadiest and most courageous negroes were placed here
with muskets and pikes, two of them were to lie with
their guns pointed at the protecting angle, so that the
instant anyone showed himself round the corner they
could open fire upon him, the others were lying in readi
ness to assist or to relieve those on guard. Either Gerald
or Ned remained with them always. A few stones were
thrown up on the outside edge of the path to protect the
defenders from the shots of those in the valley below — •
not indeed that the danger from this source was very
great, for the face of the precipice was some eight
hundred feet high, and the path ran along some four
hundred from the bottom. With the clumsy arms in use
in those days the fear of anyone being struck from below
was by no means great. A similar barricade was erected
behind, and the negroes were, in case of extreme neces
sity, to fall back from their first position. At the second
point an equal number of men were placed. Lastly,
where the path ended at the amphitheatre, strong barri
cades had been erected in a sort of semicircle, so that
anyone, after having forced the first defences, would, as
he showed himself at the entrance to the amphitheatre,
be exposed to the fire of the whole of its defenders.

The position was so strong that Ned and Gerald had
no fear whatever of its being forced. As the time ap
proached when Ned expected an attack, the defenders
of the farthest barricade were strengthened by a con
siderable number lying down upon the path; for it was
certain that for the first two or three assaults the

144 Under Drake's Flag

Spaniards would push matters to the utmost, and that
they would not be repulsed without severe fighting.

So indeed it proved. Advancing with great caution
along the narrow path which was sometimes seven or
eight feet wide, sometimes narrowing to a few inches,
the leaders of the party of attack made their way along
until they turned the projecting point, then the guns of
the two men on guard spoke out and the two leaders
fell, shot through the body, over the precipice. Now
that they knew the position of their enemy the Spaniards
prepared for a rush; gathering themselves as closely as
they could together, they pressed round the corner. Shot
after shot rang out from the defenders as they turned it ;
but although many fell, the others pressed forward so
numerously and bravely that they could be said fairly to
have established themselves round the corner. The
barricade now, however, faced them, and behind this
were gathered the bravest of the negroes, led by the
boys. The barricade, too, had been covered with thorny
branches as had that which they had defended before,
and the Spaniards, of whom only some ten or twelve
could find fighting room round the corner, were shot
down before they could make any impression whatever.

Bravely as they fought, it was impossible for men to
maintain so unequal and difficult a fight as this, and
after trying for an hour to storm the barricade, the
Spaniards fell back, having lost over fifty of the best of
their men.

In the meantime, with a thundering sound the rocks
were rolling down from the summit of the mountain.
The greater portion of them did not fall in the amphi
theatre at all, but, from the impetus of their descent
down the sloping rocks above, shot far out beyond its

Baffled 145

edge. Others, however, crashed down on to the little
plateau ; but all who were there were lying so close to
the face of the rock, that the missiles from above went
far beyond them. From below in the valley a constant
fire was kept up, but this was as innocuous as the bom
bardment from above ; and when the Spaniards fell back,
only three of the defenders had been in any way injured,
and these were hit by the pistol balls fired by the assailants
of the barricade.

When the Spaniards retired, all except the men told
off for the posts at the barricades fell back to the amphi
theatre. The negroes and natives were both alike de
lighted with the success of the defence, and were now
perfectly confident of their ability to hold out as long
as their provisions lasted. There was no fear of want
of water, for from the face of the hill a little stream
trickled out. Piles of yams, bananas, sweet potatoes,
and other tropical fruit had been collected, and a score
of sheep, and with care the boys calculated that for five
weeks they could hold out.

The Spaniards were furious at the non-success of their
enterprise, but after reconnoitring the position in every
way, the commanders came to the conclusion that it was
absolutely impregnable, and that the only plan was to
starve out the besieged. It did not appear that there
could be any other way of retreat, and a small force
could watch the path, as it would be as difficult for the
besieged to force their way back by it as for the besiegers
to find an entry.

The greater portion of the force was therefore marched
home, a guard of two hundred men being set to watch
the point where the path along the precipice started.

The incidents of the five weeks which elapsed after the

(162) 10

146 Under Drake's Flag

siege began were not important. It was soon found that
the Spaniards had abandoned the notion of attack; but
the vigilance of the defenders was never relaxed, for it
was possible, that at any moment the enemy, believing
that they had been lulled into carelessness, might renew
their attack.

Twice, indeed, at nightfall the Spaniards advanced and
crept round the point of defence, but were each time
received so quickly by the fire of the defenders of the
barricade, that they were finally convinced that there was
no hope whatever of catching them napping.

At the end of five weeks it was determined that the time
had arrived when they should leave their fortress. The
Spaniards had placed a guard of fifty men near the foot
of the precipice, to prevent any attempt of the besieged
to descend its face by means of ropes, but above no
precautions had been taken, as it appeared impossible
to anyone looking at the face of the cliff from a distance
that a human being could scale it. Thanks, however, to
the pains which had been taken previously, the way was
open. In most places, rough steps had been cut, in others
where this was impossible, short stakes had been driven
into crevices of the rock to form steps, and although the
ascent was difficult, it was quite possible to lightly clad
and active men. The time chosen for the attempt was
just after dusk had fallen, when it was still light enough
to see close at hand, but dark enough to prevent those
in the valley observing what was passing. A young
moon was already up, giving sufficient light to aid the
enterprise. Some of the most active of the natives first
ascended; these were provided with ropes which at every
bend and turn of the ascent they lowered so as to give
assistance to those mounting behind. The strictest silence

Baffled 147

was enforced, and the arms were all wrapped up so as
to avoid noise should they strike the rock. One by one
the men mounted in a steady stream; all were barefooted,
for Ned and Gerald had imitated the example of the
natives, and upon such a task as this the bare foot has an
infinitely safer hold than one shod with leather. Although
the cliff looked quite precipitous from a distance, in reality
it sloped gently backwards, and the task was far less diffi
cult than it appeared to be. The most dangerous part
indeed was that which followed the arrival at the top. The
mountain sloped so steeply back that it was like climbing
the roof of a very steep house, and hand and foot were
alike called into requisition to enable them to get forward ;
indeed to many it would have been impossible had not the
leaders lowered their ropes down from above, affording an
immense assistance to those following.

At last the whole body reached the top, and descending
upon the other side plunged into the forest. They directed
their course to a valley ten miles distant, where consider
able supplies of provisions had been stored up, and where
some of their crops had been planted a few weeks before
the arrival of the Spaniards. Here for two days they
feasted, secure that a considerable time might elapse
before the Spaniards discovered that they had vanished
from the fortress. Then they prepared to put into exe
cution the plan upon which they had resolved. They
knew that in the town there would be no watch of any
sort kept, for all believed them cooped up without a
chance of escape. The four troops then, commanded as
before, issued from the forest as the sun went down, and
marched towards the town. It was soon after midnight
when they entered the streets, and proceeding noiselessly
through them advanced to the spot assigned to each.

148 Under Drake's Flag

One was to attack the governor's house and to make him
a prisoner, two others were to fall upon the barracks and
to do as much harm as possible, while the fourth was to
proceed to the government magazines of stores and muni
tions to fire these at a great many places.

This programme was carried out successfully. The
guards at the governor's house were overpowered in an
instant, and as it had been surrounded all the inmates
were captured. Those of the men who defended them
selves were cut down, but Gerald and Ned had insisted
that no unnecessary slaughter should take place. The
party attacking the barracks had no such instructions;
it was legitimate for them to inflict as much loss as
possible upon the soldiers, and when with terrible shouts
the negroes broke in upon them, the Spaniards, taken by
surprise, offered but a feeble resistance. Large numbers
of them were cut down before they could rally or open
fire upon their enemies. As soon as the resistance be
came serious, the negroes and Indians vanished as quickly
as they had come. In the meantime the whole of the
town was lit up by sheets of fire rising from the govern
ment magazines. The alarm bells of the churches tolled
out, the shouts of the frightened inhabitants mingled with
the yells of the natives, and the report of firearms from
all parts of the town, and the townspeople thought that
a general sack and slaughter was at hand.

The negroes, however, entered no private house, but
in an hour from their first appearance they had retired
beyond the town and were making their way in a solid
and well-ordered mass for the forest, bearing in their
centre the governor and two of his sons.

The success of the enterprise had been complete. They
were now, Ned thought, in a position, if not to dictate

Baffled 149

terms to the enemy, at least to secure for themselves an
immunity from attacks. Day was breaking when they
entered the hills, and an hour later one of the sons of
the governor was sent to the party still besieging their
former stronghold to inform them that the besieged had
all escaped, had made a raid upon the city, and had
carried off the governor, whose instructions to them was
that they were to at once fall back to avoid being attacked
by the negroes.

The officer commanding the besiegers was glad enough
to call his men together and to retire unharmed from the
forest, which now began to inspire an almost superstitious
fear in the Spaniards, so unexpected and mysterious had
been the defeats inflicted upon them there. The governor's
son accompanied the troops back to the city, and was the
bearer of a missive from Ned to the officer commanding the
troops and to the inhabitants. Ned offered upon the part of
the forest men, that if the Spaniards would consent to leave
them unmolested in their forest, they upon their part would
in the first place release the governor, and in the second,
promise that no acts of violence or raids of any kind should
be made beyond its boundaries. The question of fugitive
slaves who might seek refuge among them was to be dis
cussed at a meeting between the heads of each party,
should the proposal be accepted. The governor sent a
line on his part to say that he was well treated, that he
authorized them to enter into any negotiations which they
might think fit, adding, that in case they should decide
to refuse the offer made them, no thought of his safety
should be allowed for an instant to sway their notions.

It was two days before the messenger returned. Several
stormy meetings had taken place in the town. The officers
were for the most part anxious to renew the fighting.

Under Drake's Flag

They were intensely mortified at the idea of the forces of
Spain being compelled to treat upon something like even
terms with a handful of escaped slaves, and would have
again marched the troops into the forest and renewed the
war. The townspeople, however, were strongly opposed
to this. They had suffered immensely already by the de
struction of the outlying plantations and haciendas, and
the events of the attack upon the town showed that there
was no little danger of the whole place being burnt to
the ground. They were therefore eager in the extreme
to make terms with this active and ubiquitous enemy.
The troops, too, were by no means eager to attempt
another entry into the forest. They had fared so ill
heretofore, that they shrank from another encounter;
there was neither glory nor booty to be obtained, and
warfare such as this was altogether unsuited to their
habits. Their discipline was useless, and they were so
bewildered by the tactics of their active foes, that there
was a very strong feeling among them in favour of making
terms. The council sat the whole day and finally the
pacific party prevailed.

The deputation, consisting of the officer commanding
the troops, of the ecclesiastic of highest rank in the town,
and of one of the principal merchants, proceeded to the
forest. When they were seen by the lookout to be ap
proaching, Ned and Gerald with the leading native and
negro proceeded to meet them. The details were soon
arranged upon the basis which had been suggested. The
forest men were to enjoy their freedom unmolested. They
were to be allowed to cultivate land on the edge of the
forest, and it was forbidden to any Spaniard to enter
their limits without previously applying for a pa"ss. They
on their part promised to abstain from all aggression in

Baffled 151

any shape. The question of runaways was then discussed.
This was by far the most difficult part of the negotiations.
The Spaniards urged that they could not tolerate that an
asylum should be offered to all who chose to desert from
the plantations. The boys saw the justice of this, and
finally it was arranged that the case of every slave who
made for the forest should be investigated, that the owners
should themselves come to lay a formal complaint of their
case, that the slave should reply, and each might produce
witnesses. The negro was to be given up unless he could
prove that he had been treated with gross cruelty, in
which case he was to be allowed protection in the forest.

These preliminaries settled, a short document embodying
them was drawn up in duplicate, and these treaties were
signed by the three Spaniards who formed the deputation
and by the governor on the one side, and by the four
representatives of the forest men on the other.

Thus ended the first successful resistance to Spanish
power among the islands of the western seas.

The governor and his son then left for the city, and the
forest men retired to what was now their country. Ned
and Gerald impressed upon their allies the importance of
observing strictly the conditions of peace, and at the same
time of continuing their exercises in arms and maintaining
their discipline. They pointed out to them that a treaty
of this kind, extorted as it were from one, and that the
strongest of the contracting powers, was certain not to
have long duration. The Spaniards would smart at the
humiliation which had in their opinion befallen them, and
although the fugitive clause might for some time act
favourably, it was sure sooner or later to be a bone of
contention. They impressed upon them also that although
they might, as had been shown, achieve successes for a

152 Under Drake's Flag

time, yet that in the long run the power of the Spaniards
must prevail, and that nothing short of extermination
awaited them; therefore he urged the strictest adherence
to the treaty, and at the same time a preparedness for
the recommencement of hostilities.

Some months passed without incident, and the relations
between the little community in the mountains and the
Spaniards became more pacific. The latter found that the
natives if left alone did them no damage. Bad masters
learned that a course of ill treatment of their slaves was
certain to be followed by their flight, and upon the bad
treatment being proved, these found shelter among the
mountains. Upon the other hand, the owners who treated
their slaves with kindness and forbearance found that if
these took to the mountains in a fit of restlessness, a
shelter there was refused them.

Upon the edge of the forest patches of plantation ground
made their appearance, and the treaty was upon the whole
well observed on both sides.

It was about a year after they had taken to the hill's
that news reached the boys that an English ship had
come into those waters. It was brought them across at
an island by some Simeroons who had been where the
English ship anchored. They said that it was commanded
by Master John Oxenford. The boys knew him, as he
had been on board Captain Francis Drake's ship during
the last expedition, and they determined to make an effort
to join him. He had, however, left the island before the
natives started with the news, and they made an arrange
ment with them to convey them across to that place, when
it should be learned that the vessel was returning or was
again there.

It was not long before they were filled with grief at the

Baffled 153

news that reached them, although they felt not a little
thankful that they had not been able to join Captain Oxen-
ford when he first reached the islands.

This adventurous seaman had, after the return to Eng
land of Captain Francis Drake's expedition, waited for
some time on shore, and then fretting under forced inac
tivity, — for Captain Drake had for the time abandoned any
project which he had entertained of a return to the Spanish
seas, and had engaged in a war in Ireland, — determined
to equip an expedition of his own with the assistance of
several of those who had sailed in the last voyage with
him, and of some Devonshire gentlemen who thought that
a large booty might be made out of the venture.

He equipped a sloop of 140 tons burden and sailed for
Darien. When he arrived at this isthmus he laid up his
ship and marched inland, guided by Indians. After tra
velling twelve leagues among the mountains, he came to a
small river running down into the Pacific. Here he and
his comrades built a boat, launched it in the stream, and
dropped down into the bay of Panama, then he rowed to
the Isle of Pearls, and there captured a small barque from
Quito with sixty pounds of gold. This raised the spirits
of the adventurers, and six days later they took another
barque with a hundred and sixty pounds of silver. They
then set off in quest of pearls. They searched for a few
days, but did not find them in proportion to their expecta
tions; they therefore determined to return, and re-entered
the mouth of the river they had descended. Here they
loosed the prizes they had taken and let them go.

The delay at Pearl Island was a mistake and a mis
fortune; Captain Oxenford should have known that the
Spanish authorities of the mainland would, when they
heard that a single boat's load of Englishmen was rav-

154 Under Drake's Flag

their commerce, make a great effort to capture him,
and his attack should have been swift and determined, and
his retreat made without a halt. The fortnight which had
been allowed to slip away caused his ruin. The news of
their presence speedily arrived at Panama. Captain Ortuga
was dispatched with four barques in search of them, and
falling in with the liberated prizes learned the course that
the English had taken. The river had three branches,
and the Spaniard would have been much puzzled to know
which to ascend, but the carelessness of the adventurers
gave him a clue, for as he lay with his boats wondering
which river he should ascend, he saw floating on the water
large quantities of feathers. These were sufficient indica
tions of a camp on the banks, and he at once followed that
branch of the stream.

In four days he came upon the boat, which was hauled
upon the sand, with only six men with her. They were
lying asleep on the bank, and the coming of the Spaniards
took them completely by surprise, and one of them was
killed before he could make his escape into the woods.
The rest got off. The Spaniards left twenty men to guard
the boat, and with eighty others went up the country.
Half a league away they found some huts, and in these
the treasures of gold and silver which the English had
captured were discovered.

Satisfied with having recovered these, Captain Ortuga
was about to return to the river with his men when Oxen-
ford with the English and two hundred Simeroons attacked
them. The Spaniards fought bravely, and the Simeroons
would not stand against their fire. The English struggled
desperately, eleven of these were killed, and the Simeroons
took to their heels. Oxenford and a few of his companions
escaped and made their way back towards the spot where

Baffled 155

they had left their ship. News of what was going on had,
however, been sent across from Panama to Nombre de
Dios, and four barques from that port had put out, and
had found and taken Oxenford's ship. A band of a hundred
and fifty men scoured the mountains, and into the hands
of these Captain Oxenford and his companions fell. All
of them were executed on the spot except Oxenford, th«
master, the pilot, and five boys. These were taken to
Panama, where the three men were executed, the lives of
the five boys being spared.

This news was a sore blow to the lads, who had hoped
much to be able to reach the ship and to return to England
in her. The delay, however, was not long, for a few
weeks afterwards came the news that another English ship
was in those waters. A party of Simeroons offered to take
Ned and Gerald thither in their boat, and they determined
to avail themselves of the offer.

Great was the lamentation among the community in the
forest when the news that their leaders were about to
leave became known. The simple Indians assembled
around them, and wept and used every entreaty and prayer
to change their resolution. However, the boys pointed
out to them that they had already been absent near three
years from home, and that, as the settlers were now able
to defend themselves, and had earned the respect of the
Spaniards, they would, if they continued their present
course of avoiding giving any cause of complaint to the
whites, no doubt be allowed to live in peace. They had,
too, now learned the tactics that should be pursued in case
of difficulty, and by adhering to these the boys assured
them that they might rely upon tiring out the Spaniards,
Some of the negroes were in favour of retaining the Eng
lish leaders by force, but this was objected to by the

156 Under Drake's Flag

majority. Many of the Indians possessed gold which had
been the property of their ancestors before the arrival of
the Spaniards, and some of these treasures were now dug
up and the boys were presented with a great store of
pretty ornaments and other workmanship of the natives.
Much rough gold was also placed on board their canoe,
and a great portion of the dwellers of the hills marched
down at night with them to the point of embarkation, a
lonely creek far from the settlement of the Spaniards, to
bid them farewell.

The boys themselves were affected by the sorrow of
their friends, and by the confidence which these had placed
in them, and they promised that should they return to
those parts they would assuredly pay a visit to them again
in the hills. Before leaving they had seen that two of the
worthiest and wisest of the natives were chosen as leaders,
and to these all the rest had sworn an oath, promising to
obey their orders in all respects. They had constantly acted
with the boys, and had, indeed, been their chief advisers
in the matters internal to the tribe, and the lads had little
doubt that for some time at least things would go well in
the mountains; as to the ultimate power of the refugees
to maintain their independence, this must, they felt, depend
upon events beyond them. If the Spaniards were left at
peace and undisturbed by English adventurers or other
troubles, there was little doubt, sooner or later, they would
destroy the whole of the natives of this island, as they had
destroyed them in almost every place where they had come
in contact with them. However, the boys had the satis
faction of knowing that they had been the means of at
least prolonging the existence of this band, and of putting
off the evil day, perhaps for years to come.

The Simeroons paddled out from the creek, and hoisting-

Baffled 157

the sail the boat merrily danced over the water, and the
boys felt their spirits rise at the hope of seeing their
countrymen and hearing their native tongue again after
eighteen months passed absolutely separate from all civi
lized communion. After two days' sailing and paddling
they reached the bay where the natives had reported the
English ship to be lying, and here, to their great delight,
they found the Maria> Captain Cliff, lying at anchor.

Ned and Gerald, when they explained who they were,
were received with great joy and amazement. The story
of their loss had been told in England, and the captain,
who came from the neighbourhood where Gerald's father
dwelt, reported that the family had long mourned him as
dead. He himself was bent, not upon a buccaneering
voyage, although, no doubt, if a rich ship had fallen into
his hands he would have made no scruple in taking it, but
his object was to trade with the natives, and to gather
a store of such goods as the islands furnished in exchange
for those of English make. He had, too, fetched slaves
from the western coast of Africa, and had disposed of
them to much advantage, and the ship was now about to
proceed on her way home, each man's share of the profits
of the expedition amounting to a sum which quite answered
his expectations.

It was two months later before the boys, to their great
delight, again saw the hills behind Plymouth. None who
had seen them embark in the Sioanne would have recog
nized in the stalwart young fellows who now stepped
ashore on the Hoe the lads who then set sail. Nearly
three years had passed, the sun of the tropics had burnt
their faces almost to a mahogany colour; their habit of
command among the natives had given them an air and
bearing beyond their years; and though Ned was but

is8 Under Drake's Flag

eighteen, and Gerald a little older, they carried themselves
like men of mature years.

It had been, indeed, no slight burden that they had
endured. The fighting which had formed the first epoch
of their stay in the island, serious as it had been, had been
less wearing to them than the constant care and anxiety
of the subsequent quiet time. The arrival of each fugitive
slave was a source of fresh danger, and it had often needed
all their authority to prevent the younger and wilder spirits
of their little community from indulging in raids upon the
crops of the Spaniards.

Once in Plymouth, the lads said good-bye to each other,
promising to meet again in a few days. Each then pro
ceeded to his home. Ned, indeed, found that he had a
home no longer; for on reaching the village he found that
his father had died a few months after his departure, and a
new pedagogue had taken his place and occupied the little
cottage.

The shock was a great one although hardly unexpected,
for his father's health had not been strong, and the thought
that he would not be alive when he returned had often
saddened Ned's mind during his absence. He found, how
ever, no lack of welcome in the village. There were many
of his school friends still there, and these looked with
astonishment and admiration on the bronzed, military-
looking man, and could scarce believe that he was their
playmate the " Otter". Here Ned tarried a few days,
and then, according to his promise to Gerald, started for
the part of the country where he lived, and reoeived a most
cordial welcome from the father and family of his friend.

CHAPTER X

Southward Ho !

UPON making enquiries Ned Hearne found that Captain
Drake had, upon the return of his expedition, set aside
the shares of the prize money of Gerald Summers, himself,
and the men who were lost in the wreck of the prize, in
hopes that they would some day return to claim them.
Upon the evidence given by Gerald and himself of the
death of the others, their shares were paid by the bankers
at Plymouth who had charge of them to their families,
while Ned and Gerald received their portions.

Owing to the great mortality which had taken place
among the crews each of the lads received a sum of
nearly a thousand pounds, the total capture amounting
to a value of over a million of money. As boys, they
each received the half of a man's share, the officers of
course had received larger shares, and the merchants who
had lent money to get up the expedition, gained large
profits.

Ned thought at first of embarking his money in the
purchase of a share in a trading vessel, and of taking to
that service; but hearing that Captain Drake intended to
fit out another expedition, he decided to wait for that
event, and to make one more voyage to the Spanish Main
before determining on his future course. Having there
fore his time on his hands he accepted the invitation of

159

160 Under Drake's Flag

the parents of his three boy friends, Tom Tressilis, Gerald
Summers, and Reuben Gale. He was most warmly wel
comed, for both Tom and Gerald declared that they owed
their lives to him. He spent several weeks at each of
their homes, and then returned to Plymouth, where he
put himself into the hands of a retired master mariner tc
learn navigation and other matters connected with his
profession, and occupied his spare time in studying the
usual branches of a gentleman's education.

It was some months before Captain Francis returned
from Ireland, but when he did so he at once began his
preparations for his next voyage. The expedition was to
be on a larger scale than that in which he had formerly
embarked, for he had formed the resolve to sail round
Cape Horn, to coast along north to the Spanish settle
ments upon the great ocean he had seen from the tree top
in the Isthmus of Darien; and then, if all went well, to
sail still farther north, double the northern coasts of
America, and to find some short way by which English
ships might reach the Pacific. These projects were, how
ever, known to but few, as it was considered of the utmost
importance to prevent them from being noised abroad,
lest they might come to the ears of the Spaniards, and
so put them upon their guard.

In spite of the great losses of men upon the former
expedition, the number of volunteers who came forward
directly Captain Drake's intention to sail again to the
Indies was known, was greatly in excess of the require
ments. All, however, who had sailed upon the last voyage,
and were willing again to venture, were enrolled, and
Captain Drake expressed a lively pleasure at meeting Ned
Hearne and Gerald Summers, whom he had given up as
lost. The expenses of the expedition were defrayed partly

Southward Ho! 161

from the funds of Captain Drake and his officers, partly
by moneys subscribed by merchants and others who took
shares in the speculation. These were termed adventurers.
Ned embarked five hundred pounds of his prize money in
the venture, as did each of his three friends. He was now
nineteen, and a broad strongly built young fellow. His
friends were all somewhat older, and all four were entered
by Captain Francis as men, and ranked as "gentlemen
adventurers ", and would therefore receive their full share
of prize money.

On the 1 2th of November, 1577, the fleet sailed out of
Plymouth Sound amid the salutes of the guns of the fort
there. It consisted of five ships : the Pelican, of 100 tons,
the flagship, commanded by Captain - general Francis
Drake; the Elisabeth, 80 tons, Captain John Winter; the
Marigold, a barque of 30 tons, Captain John Thomas ; the
Swan, a flyboat of 50 tons, Captain John Chester; and
the Christopher, a pinnace of 15 tons, Captain Thomas
Moore.

The voyage began unfortunately, for meeting a head
wind they were forced to put into Falmouth, where a
tempest ill-treated them sorely. Some of the ships had
to cut away their masts, and the whole were obliged to
put back into Plymouth to refit, entering the harbour in
a very different state to that in which they had left it a
fortnight before. Every exertion was made, and after a
few days' delay the fleet again set sail.

They carried an abundance of stores of all kinds, together
with large quantities of fancy articles as presents for the
savage people whom they might meet in their voyaging.
The second start was more prosperous than the first, and
after touching at various points on the west coast of Africa
they shaped their way to the mouth of the La Plata, sailing

(162 J 11

162 Under Drake's Flag

through the Cape de Verde Islands, where their appear
ance caused no slight consternation among the Portuguese.
However, as they had more important objects in view they
did not stop to molest any of the principal towns, only land
ing at quiet bays to procure a fresh supply of water, and
to obtain fruit and vegetables, which in those days, when
ships only carried salt provisions, were absolutely neces
sary to preserve the crews in health. All were charmed
with the beauty and fertility of these islands, which were
veritable gardens of tropical fruits, and they left these seas
with regret.

The fleet reached the La Plata in safety, but made no
long stay there, for the extreme shallowness of the water
and the frequency and abundance of the shoals in the
river made the admiral fear for the safety of his ships;
and accordingly, after a few days' rest, the anchors were
weighed and the fleet proceeded down the coast. For some
time they sailed without adventure, save that once or twice
in the storms they encountered, one or other of the ships
were separated from the rest. After several weeks' sailing
they put into the bay of St. Julian on the coast of Pata
gonia. Here the crews landed to obtain water. Soon the
natives came down to meet them. These were tall active
men, but yet far from being the giants which the Spaniards
had represented them, few of them being taller than a
tall Englishman. They were dressed in the scantiest
clothing — the men wearing a short apron made of skin,
with another skin as a mantle over one shoulder, the
women wearing a kind of petticoat made of soft skin.
The men carried bows and arrows and spears, and were
painted strangely — one half the head and body being
painted white, the other black. Their demeanour was
perfectly friendly, and Captain Drake, fearing no harm,

Southward Ho! 163

walked some distance inland, and many of those not en
gaged in getting water into the boats also strolled away
from the shore. Among those who rambled farthest were
Ned and Tom Tressilis, together with another gentleman
adventurer named Arbuckle. When they left Captain
Francis, the armourer, who had brought a bow on shore
with him, was showing the natives how much farther
our English bow could carry than the native weapon.

Wondering what the country was like beyond the hills,
the little party ascended the slope. Just as they reached
the top they heard a shout. Looking back they saw that
all was confusion.

The string of the armourer's bow had snapped, and the
natives, knowing nothing of guns, believed that the party
were now unarmed. As the armourer was restringing his
bow one of the natives shot an arrow at him, and he fell
mortally wounded. One standing near now raised his
arquebus, but before he could fire he too was pierced
by two arrows and fell dead. The admiral himself
caught up the arquebus and shot the man who had first
fired.

The little party on the hill had been struck with amaze
ment and consternation at the sudden outburst, and were
recalled to a sense of their danger by the whiz of an arrow,
which struck Master Arbuckle in the heart, and at the
same moment a dozen of the savages made their appear
ance from among the trees below them. Seeing the dead-
liness of their aim, and that he and Tom would be shot
down at once before they could get to close quarters,
Ned turned to fly.

"Quick, Tom, for your life!"

Fortunately they stood on the very top of the ascent,
so that a single bound backwards took them out of sight

164 Under Drake's Flag

and range of their enemies. There was a wood a few
hundred yards inland, apparently of great extent, and
towards this the lads ran at the top of their speed. The
savages had to climb the hill, and when they reached
its crest the fugitives were out of bowshot range.

A yell broke from them as they saw the lads, but these
had made the best use of their time and reached the wood
some two hundred yards ahead of their pursuers. Ned
dashed into the undergrowth and tore his way through
it, Tom close at his heels. Sometimes they came to open
spaces, and here each time Ned changed the direction of
their flight, choosing spots where they could take to the
underwood without showing any sign, such as broken
boughs, of their entrance.

After an hour's running the yells and shouts, which had
at first seemed close behind, gradually lessened, and were
now but faintly heard. Then, utterly exhausted, the lads
threw themselves on the ground.

In a few minutes, however, Ned rose again.

" Come, Tom," he said, "we must keep on. These
fellows will trace us with the sagacity of dogs ; but, clever
as they may be, it takes time to follow a track. We must
keep on now. When it gets dark, which will be in another
hour or so, they will be able to follow us no longer, and
we can then take it easily."

"Do as you think best, Ned; you are accustomed to
this kind of thing."

Without another word they started off at a run again,
keeping as nearly as they could a straight course, for
Ned's experience in forest life enabled him to do this
when one unused to woodcraft would have lost all idea
of direction. The fact, however, that the mosses grew on
the side of the trees looking east, was guide enough for

Southward Ho! 165

him, for he knew that the warm breezes from the sea
would attract them, while the colder inland winds would
have an opposite effect. Just as it was getting dark
they emerged from the wood, and could see stretch
ing far before them an undulating and almost treeless
country.

" Fortunately there has been no rain for some time,
and the ground is as hard as iron," Ned said. "On the
damp soil under the trees they will track our steps, but
we shall leave no marks here; and in the morning, when
they trace us to this spot, they will be at fault."

So saying, he struck off across the country. For some
hours they walked, the moon being high and enabling
them to make their way without difficulty. At last
they came upon a clump of bushes, and here Ned pro
posed a halt. Tom was perfectly ready, for they had
now walked and run for many hours, and both were
thoroughly fatigued; for after so long a voyage in a
small ship they were out of condition for a long journey
on foot.

"The first thing to do is to light a fire," Ned said;
"for it is bitterly cold."

" But how do you mean to light it?"

"I have flint and steel in my pouch," Ned said, "and
a flash of powder for priming my pistols in my sash here*
It is a pity, indeed, we did not put our pistols into our
belts when we eame ashore. But even if I had not had
the flint and steel I could have made a fire by rubbing
two dead sticks together. You forget I have lived among
savages for a year."

"You don't think that it is dangerous to light a
fire?"

" Not in the least. It was dark when we left the wood,

166 Under Drake's Flag

and they must have halted on bur track far back among
the trees to follow it up by daylight; besides, we have
walked five hours since then, and must be twenty miles
away, and we have crossed five or six hills. Find a few
dead sticks and I will pull a handful or two of dried grass;
we will soon have a fire."

Ned made a little pile of dried grass, scooped out a
slight depression at the top, and placed a dead leaf in
it; on this he poured a few grains of powder, added a
few blades of dried grass, and then set to work with his
flint and steel. After a blow or two a spark fell into the
powder; it blazed up, igniting the blades of grass and
the leaf, and in a minute the little pile was in a blaze.
Dried twigs and then larger sticks were added, and soon
a bright fire burned up.

" Throw on some of the green bush," Ned said 5
" we do not want a blaze, for although we have thrown
out the fellows in pursuit of us there may be others
about."

"And now, Ned," Tom said, after sitting for some
time gazing into the red fire, "what on earth are we to
do next?"

"That is a question more easily asked than answered,"
Ned said cheerfully; "we have saved our skins for the
present, now we have got to think out what is the best
course to pursue."

"I don't see any way to get back to the ship," Tom
said after a long pause; "do you?"

"No," Ned replied, "I don't, Tom. These savages
know that they have cut us off, and will be on the watch,
you may be sure. They shoot so straight with those little
bows and arrows of theirs that we should be killed without
the least chance of ever getting to close quarters. Besides,

Southward Ho! 167

the admiral will doubtless believe that we have been slain,
and will sail away. We may be sure that he beat off the
fellows who were attacking him, but they will all take
to the woods, and he would never be able to get any
distance among the trees; besides, he would give up all
hope of finding us there. As to our getting back through
the wood, swarming with savages, it seems to me hope
less."

"Then whatever is to become of us?" Tom asked
hopelessly.

"Well, the lookout is not bright," Ned said thought
fully, "but there is a chance for us. We may keep our
selves by killing wild animals, and by pushing inland we
may come upon some people less treacherous and bloody
than those savages by the seashore. If so, we might
hunt and live with them."

Tom groaned. '• I am not sure that I would not
rather be killed at once than go on living like a
savage."

"The life is not such a bad one," Ned said; "I tried
it once, and although the negroes and Indians of Porto
Rico were certainly a very different people to these
savages, still the life led on these great plains and hills,
abounding with game, is more lively than being cooped
up in a wood as I was then. Besides, I don't mean that
we should be here always. I propose that we try and
cross the continent. It is not so very wide here, and
we are nearly in a line with Lima. The admiral means
to go on there, and expects a rich booty. He may be
months before he gets round the Horn, and if we could
manage to be there when he arrives we should be rescued.
If not, and I own that I have not much hope of it, we
could at least go down to Lima some time or other. I

i68 Under Drake's Flag

can talk Spanish now very fairly, and we shall have such
a lot of adventures to tell that, even if they do not take
us for Spanish sailors, as we can try to feign, they will
not be likely to put us to death. They would do so if
we were taken in arms as buccaneers, but coming in
peaceably we might be kindly treated. At any rate, if
we get on well with the Indians we shall have the choice
of making, some day or other, for the Spanish settlements
on the west coast; but that is all in the distance. The
first thing will be to get our living somehow, the second
to get farther inland, the third to make friends with the
first band of natives we meet. And now the best thing
to do is to go off to sleep. I shall not be many minutes,
I can tell you."

Strange as was the situation, and many the perils
that threatened them, both were in a few minutes fast
asleep.

The sun was rising above the hills when with a start
they awoke and at once sprang to their feet, and in
stinctively looked round in search of approaching danger.
All was, however, quiet. Some herds of deer grazed in
the distance, but no other living creature was visible.
Then they turned their eyes upon each other and burst
into a simultaneous shout of laughter. Their clothes were
torn literally into rags by the bushes through which they
had forced their way, while their faces were scratched and
stained with blood from the same cause.

"The first thing to be done," Ned said when the laugh
was over, "is to look for a couple of long springy saplings
and to make bows and arrows. Of course they will not
carry far, but we might knock down any small game we
come across."

Both lads were good shots with a bow, for in those

Southward Hoi 169

days, although firearms were coming in, all Englishmen
were still trained in the use of the bow.

" But what about strings?" Tom asked.

"I will cut four thin strips from rny belt," Ned said.
" Each pair tied together will make 'a string for a five-
foot bow, and will be fully strong enough for any weapon
we shall be able to make."

After an hour's walk they came to a small grove of
trees growing in a hollow. These were of several species,
and trying the branches they found one kind which was
at once strong and flexible. With their hangers, or short
swords, they cut down a small sapling of some four inches
in diameter, split it up, pared each half down, and manu
factured two bows, which were rough, indeed, but suffi
ciently strong to send an arrow a considerable distance.
They then made each a dozen shafts, pointed and notched
them. Without feathers or metal points these could not
fly straight to any distance, but they had no thought of
long-range shooting.

11 Now," Ned said, " we will go back to that bare space
of rock we passed a hundred yards back; there were
dozens of little lizards running about there, it will be
hard if we cannot knock some over."

" Are they good to eat?" Tom asked.

"I have no doubt they are," Ned said; "as a rule
everything is more or less good to eat; some things may
be nicer than others, but hardly anything is poisonous.
I have eaten snakes over and over again, and very good
they are. I have been keeping a lookout for them ever
since we started this morning."

When they reached the rock the lizards all darted off
to their cracks and crevices, but Ned and Tom lay down
with their bows bent and arrows in place, and waited

170 Under Drake's Flag

quietly. Ere long the lizards popped up their heads again
and began to move about, and the lads now let fly their
arrows. Sometimes they hit, sometimes missed, and each
shot was followed by the disappearance of the lizards, but
with patience they found by the end of an hour that they
had shot a dozen, which was sufficient for an ample meal
for them.

" How will you cook them, Ned?"

" Skin them as if they were eels, and then roast them
on a stick."

'* I am more thirsty than hungry," Tom said.

"Yes, and from the look of the country water must be
scarce. However, as long as we can shoot lizards and
birds we can drink their blood."

The fire was soon lighted, and the lizards cooked;
they tasted like little birds, their flesh being tender and
sweet.

"Now we had better be proceeding," Ned said, when
they had finished their meal. "We have an unknown
country to explore, and if we ever get across we shall have
materials for yarns for the rest of our lives."

"Well, Ned, I must say you are a capital fellow to get
into a scrape with. You got Gerald and me out of one,
and if anyone could get through this I am sure you could
do so. Gerald told me that he always relied upon you,
and found you always right; you may be sure that I will
do the same. So I appoint you captain-general of this
expedition, and promise to obey all orders unquestion-
ingly."

"Well, my first order is," Ned said laughing, "that
we each make a good pike. The wood we made our
bows from will do capitally, and we can harden the
points in the fire. We may meet some wild beasts, and

Southward Ho! 171

a good strong six-foot pike would be better than our
swords."

Two hours' work completed the new weapons, and with
their bows slung at their backs, and using their pikes as
walking staves, they again set out on their journey across
the continent.

CHAPTER XI

The Marvel of Fire

are those — natives?" exclaimed Tom suddenly.
Ned looked steadily at them for some time.

"No, I think they are great birds; the ostrich abounds
in these plains; no doubt they are ostriches."

" I suppose it is of no use our chasing1 them?"

" Not a bit. They can run faster than a horse can
gallop."

During1 the day's walk they saw vast numbers of deer of
various kinds, but as they were sure that these would not
allow them to approach they did not alter their course,
which was, as nearly as they could calculate by the sun,
due west. The sun was warm during the day, but all the
higher hilltops were covered with snow. " If the worst
comes to the worst," Ned said, "we must go up and get
some snow. We can make a big ball of it and bring it
down with us in one of our sashes. But I should think
there must be some stream somewhere about. The snow
must melt; besides, these great herds of deer must drink
somewhere."

Late in the afternoon they came on the crest of a ridge.

"There," Ned said, pointing to a valley in which were
a number of trees. "We shall find water there, or I am
mistaken."

An hour's tramp brought them to the valley. Through

172

The Marvel of Fire 173

this a stream ran between steep banks. They followed it
for half a mile and then came to a spot where the banks
sloped away. Here the ground was trampled with many
feet, and the edge of the stream was trodden into mud.

*' Hurrah, Tom! here is meat and drink too. It is hard
if we did not kill something or other here. Look at that
clump of bushes where the bank rises. If we hide there
the deer will almost touch us as they pass to water, and we
are sure to be able to shoot them even with these bows
and arrows. But first of all for a drink. Then we will
cross the stream and make a camping ground under the
trees opposite."

The stream was but waist-deep, but very cold, for it
was composed of snow water.

" Shall we light a fire, Ned; it might frighten the deer?"

" No, I think it will attract them," Ned said; " they are
most inquisitive creatures, and are always attracted by
anything strange."

A fire was soon lighted, and after it got quite dark they
piled up dry wood upon it, recrossed the river, and took
their places in the bushes.

An hour passed, and then they heard a deep sound. In
a minute or two the leading ranks of a great herd of deer
appeared on the rise, and stood looking wonderingly at
the fire. For some little time they halted, and then, pushed
forward by those behind and urged by their own curiosity,
they advanced step by step with their eyes fixed on the
strange sight. So crowded were they that as they ad
vanced they seemed a compact mass, those outside coming
along close to the bushes in which the boys lay. Silently
these raised their bows, bent them to the full strain, and
each launched an arrow. The deer were not five feet from
them, and two stags fell pierced through and through.

174 Under Drake's Flag

They leaped to their feet again, but the boys had dashed
out with their swords in hand, and in an instant had cut
them down.

There was a wild rush on the part of the herd, a sound
of feet almost like thunder, and then the boys stood alone
by the side of the two deer they had killed. They were
small, the two together not weighing more than a good-
sized sheep. The boys lifted them on their shoulders re
joicing, and waded across the stream. One they hung up
to the branch of a tree, the other they skinned and cut up,
and were soon busy roasting pieces of its flesh over the
fire.

They had just finished an abundant meal when they
heard a roar at a short distance which brought them to
their feet in a moment. Ned seized his pike and faced the
direction from which the sound had come.

"Throw on fresh sticks, Tom; all animals fear fire."

A bright blaze soon lit up the wood.

" Now, Tom, do you climb the tree; I will give you the
pieces of meat up, and then do you lift the other stag to a
higher branch. I don't suppose the brute can climb, but
he may be able to do so; at any rate we will sleep in the
tree, and keep watch and ward."

As soon as Tom had followed these instructions Ned
handed him up the bows and arrows and spears, and then
clambered up beside him. As the fire again burned low
an animal was seen to approach cautiously.

11 A lion !" whispered Tom.

" I don't think that he is as big as a lion," Ned said,
4< but he certainly looks like one. A female, I suppose, as it
has got no mane."

Of course the lads did not know, nor indeed did anyone
else at that time, that the lion is not a native of America;

The Marvel of Fire 175

the animal before them was what is now called the South
American lion, or puma.

The creature walked round and round the fire snuffing,
and then with an angry roar raised itself on its hind legs
and scratched at the trunk of the tree. Several times it
repeated this performance, and then with another roar
walked away into the darkness.

" Thank goodness it can't climbl" Ned said; " I expect
with our spears and swords we could have beaten it back
if it had tried, still it is just as well not to have had to do
it ; besides, now we can both go to sleep. Let us get well
up the tree, so that if anything that can climb should come,
it will fall to at the deer to begin with; that will be certain
to wake us."

They soon made themselves as comfortable as they could
in crutches of the tree, tied themselves with their sashes
to a bough to prevent a fall, and were soon asleep.

The next day they rested in the wood, made fresh bow
strings from the twisted gut of the deer, cut the skins up
into long strips, thereby obtaining a hundred feet of strong
cord, which Ned thought might be useful for snares.
Here, too, they shot several birds, which they roasted,
and from whose feathers, tied on with a threadlike fibre,
they further improved their arrows. They collected a good
many pieces of fibre for further use, for, as Tom said,
when they got on to rock again they would be sure to find
some splinters of stone which they could fasten to the
arrows for points, and would be then able to do good
execution even at a distance.

They cut a number of strips of flesh off the deer and
hung them in the smoke of the fire, by which means they
calculated that they could keep for some days, and could
be eaten without being cooked, which might be an advan-

176 Under Drake's Flag

tage, as they feared that the odour of cooking might attract
the attention of wandering Indians

The following morning they again started, keeping their
tacks as before to the sun*

" Look at these creatures," Tom said suddenly as a
herd of animals dashed by at a short distance; "they do
not look like deer."

" No, they look more like sheep or goats, but they have
much longer legs. I wonder what they can beJ"

During the day's journey they came across no water,
and by the end of the tramp were much exhausted.

"We will not make a fire to-night," Ned said; "we
must be careful of our powder. I don't want to be driven
to use sticks for getting fire ; it is a long and tedious busi
ness. We will be up at daybreak to-morrow, and will
push on till we find water. We will content ourselves for
to-night with a bit of this smoked venison."

They found it dry work eating this without water, and
soon desisted, gathered some grass to make a bed, and
were asleep a short time after it became dark. They were
now in an open district, not having seen a tree since they
started in the morning, and they had therefore less fear of
being disturbed by wild beasts. They had indeed talked
of keeping watch by turns, but without a fire they felt that
this would be dull work, and would moreover be of littb
avail, as in the darkness the stealthy tread of a lion would
not be heard, and they would therefore be attacked as
suddenly as if no watch had been kept. If he should
announce his coming by a roar both would be sure to
awake quickly enough. So lying down close together
with their spears at hand, they were soon asleep, with the
happy carelessness of danger peculiar to youth.

With the first streak of daybreak they were up and on

The Marvel of Fire 177

their way. Until midday they came upon no water, their
only excitement being the killing of an armadillo. Then
they saw a few bushes in a hollow, and making towards
it found a small pool of water. After a hearty drink,
leaves and sticks were collected, a fire made, and slices of
the smoked deer's meat were soon broiling over it.

" This is jolly," Tom said. " I should not mind how long
I tramped if we could always find water."

" And have venison to eat with it," Ned added laughing.
41 We have got a stock to last a week, that is a comfort,
and this armadillo will do for supper and breakfast. But
I don't think we need fear starvation, for these plains
swarm with animals, and it is hard if we can't manage to
kill one occasionally somehow or other."

" How far do you think it is across to the other coast?"

" I have not an idea," Ned said. " I don't suppose any
Englishman knows, although the Spaniards can of course
tell pretty closely. We know that after rounding Cape
Horn they sail up the coast north-west, or in that direc
tion, so that we have got the base of a triangle to cross ;
but beyond that I have no idea whatever. Hallo!"

Simultaneously the two lads caught up their spears
and leaped to their feet. Well might they be alarmed, for
close by were a party of some twenty Indians who had,
quietly and unperceived, come down upon them. They
were standing immovable, and their attitude did not be
token hostility. Their eyes were fixed upon them, but
their expression betrayed wonder rather than enmity.

" Lay down your spear again, Tom," Ned said; "let us
receive them as friends."

Dropping their spears the lads advanced a pace or two
holding out their hands in token of amity. Then slowly,
step by step, the Indians advanced.

(162) 12

178 Under Drake's Flag

44 They look almost frightened," Ned said. " What can
they be staring so fixedly at?"

"It is the fire!" Tom exclaimed; " it is the fire! I
do believe they have never seen a fire before."

It was so, as Sir Francis Drake afterwards discovered
when landing on the coast, the Patagonian Indians at
that time were wholly unacquainted with fire. When the
Indians came down they looked from the fire to the boys,
and perceived for the first time that they were creatures
of another colour from themselves. Then simultaneously
they threw themselves on their faces.

"They believe that we are gods or superior beings of
some kind," Ned said; "they have clearly never heard
of the Spaniards. What good fortune for us! Now let
us reassure them."

So saying he stooped over the prostrate Indians, patted
them on the head and shoulders, and after some trouble
he succeeded in getting them to rise. Then he motioned
them to sit down round the fire, put on some more meat,
and when this was cooked, offered a piece to each, Tom
and himself setting the example of eating it.

The astonishment of the natives was great. Many of
them, with a cry, dropped the meat on finding it hot, and
an excited talk went on between them. Presently, how
ever, the man who appeared to be the chief set the
example of carefully tasting a piece. He gave an ex
clamation of satisfaction, and soon all were engaged
upon the food.

When they had finished Ned threw some more sticks
on the fire, and as these burst into flames and then con
sumed away, the amazement of the natives was intense.
Ned then made signs to them to pull up some bushes and
cast on the fire. They all set to work with energy, and

The Marvel of Fire 179

soon a huge pile was raised on the fire. At first great
volumes of white smoke only poured up, then the leaves
crackled, and presently a tongue of flame shot up, rising
higher and higher till a great bonfire blazed away far
above their heads. This completed the wonder and awe
of the natives, who again prostrated themselves with every
symptom of worship before the boys. These again raised
them, and by signs intimated their intention of accom
panying them.

With lively demonstrations of gladness and welcome the
Indians turned to go, pointing to the west as the place
where their abode lay.

"We may as well leave our bows and arrows," Ned
said. "Their bows are so immensely superior to ours
that it will make us sink in their estimation if they see
that our workmanship is so inferior to their own."

The Indians, who were all very tall, splendidly made
men, stepped out so rapidly that the lads had the greatest
difficulty in keeping up with them, and were sometimes
obliged to break into a half trot, seeing which the chief
said a word to his followers, and they then proceeded at
a more reasonable rate. It was late in the evening before
they reached the village, which lay in a wooded hollow
at the foot of some lofty hills. The natives gave a loud
cry, which at once brought out the entire population, who
ran up and gazed, astonished at the newcomers. The
chief said a few words, when with every mark of awe
and surprise all prostrated themselves as the men had
before done.

The village was composed of huts made of sticks closely
intertwined, and covered with the skins of animals. The
chief led them to a large one, evidently his own, and
invited them to enter. They found that it was also lined

i8o Under Drake's Flag

with skins, and others were laid upon the floor. A pile
of skin served as a mat and bed. The chief made signs
that he placed this at their disposal, and soon left them
to themselves. In a short time he again drew aside the
skin which hung across the entrance, and a squaw ad
vanced, evidently in deep terror, bearing some raw
meat. Ned received it graciously, and then said to
Tom, " Now we will light a fire and astonish them
again."

So saying, the boys went outside, picked up a dry stick
or two, and motioned to the Indians who were gathered
round that they needed more. The whole population at
once scattered through the grove, and soon a huge pile of
dead wood was collected. The boys now made a little heap
of dried leaves, placed a few grains of powder in a hollow
at the top, and the flint and steel being put into requisition,
the flame soon leaped up amid a cry of astonishment and
awe from the women and children; wood was now laid
on, and soon a great fire was blazing. The men gathered
round and sat down, and the women and children gradu
ally approached and took their places behind them. The
evening was cold, and as the natives felt the grateful
heat, fresh exclamations of pleasure broke from them, and
gradually a complete babel of tongues broke out. Then the
noise was hushed, and a silence of expectation and atten
tion reigned as the lads cut off slices of the meat, and
spitting them on pieces of green wood, held them over
the fire. Tom made signs to the chief and those sitting
round to fetch meat and follow their example; some of
the Indian women brought meat, and the men with sharp
stone knives cut off pieces and stuck them on green sticks
as they had seen the boys do. Then very cautiously they
approached the fire, shrinking back and exhibiting signs

The Marvel of Fire 181

of alarm at the fierce heat it threw out as they approached
near to it.

The boys, however, reassured them, and they presently
set to work. When the meat was roasted it was cut up
and distributed in little bits to the crowd behind, all of
whom were eager to taste this wonderful preparation. It
was evident by the exclamations of satisfaction that the
new viand was an immense success, and fresh supplies
of meat were soon over the fire.

An incident now occurred which threatened to mar the
harmony of the proceedings. A stick breaking, some of
the red-hot embers scattered round. One rolled close to
Ned's leg, and the lad, with a quick snatch, caught it up
and threw it back upon the fire. Seeing this, a native
near grasped a glowing fragment which had fallen near
him, but dropped it with a shriek of astonishment and
pain.

All leaped to their feet as the man danced in his agony.
Some ran away in terror, others instinctively made for
their weapons, all gesticulated and yelled. Ned at once
went to the man and patted him assuringly. Then he
got him to open his hand, which was really severely
burned. Then he got a piece of soft fat and rubbed it
gently upon the sore, and then made signs that he wanted
something to bandage it with. A woman brought some
large fresh leaves which were evidently good for hurts,
and another a soft thong of deer hide. The hand was
soon bandaged up, and although the man must still have
been in severe pain he again took his seat, this time at
a certain distance from the fire.

This incident greatly increased the awe with which the
boys were viewed, as not only had they the power of
producing this new and astonishing element, but they

182 Under Drake's Flag

could, unhurt, take up pieces of wood turned red by it,
which inflicted terrible agony on others.

Before leaving the fire and retiring to their tent, the
boys made signs to the chief that it was necessary that
someone should be appointed to throw on fresh wood from
time to time to keep the fire alight. This was hardly
needed, as the whole population were far too excited to
think of retiring to bed. After the lads had left they
gathered round the fire, and each took delight in throw
ing on pieces of wood and in watching them consume,
and several times, when they woke during the night, the
boys saw by the bright light streaming in through the
slits in the deerskin, that the bonfire was never allowed
to wane.

In the morning fresh meat was brought to the boys,
together with raw yams and other vegetables. There were
now other marvels to be shown. Ned had learned when
with the negroes how to cook in calabashes, and he now
got a gourd from the natives, cut it in half, scooped its
contents out, and then filled it with water. From the
stream he then got a number of stones, and put them
Into the fire until they became intensely hot. Then with
two sticks he raked them out and dropped them into the
water. The natives yelled with astonishment as they saw
the water fizz and bubble as the stones were thrown in.
More were added until the water boiled. Then the yams,
cut into pieces, were dropped in, more hot stones added
to keep the water boiling, and when cooked, the yams
were taken out. When sufficiently cooled, the boys dis
tributed the pieces among the chiefs, and again the signs
of satisfaction showed that cooked vegetables were ap
preciated. Other yams were then cut up and laid
among the hot embers to bake.

The Marvel of Fire 183

After this the boys took a few half-burned sticks, carried
them to another spot, added fresh fuel and made another
fire, and then signed to the natives to do the same. In
a short time a dozen fires were blazing, and the whole
population were engaged in grilling venison, and in boiling
and baking yams. The boys were both good trenchermen,
but they were astounded at the quantity of food which the
Patagonians disposed of.

By nighttime the entire stock of meat in the village was
exhausted, and the chief motioned to the boys that in the
morning he should go out with a party to lay in a great
stock of venison. To this they made signs that they
would accompany the expedition. While the feasting
had been going on, the lads had wandered away with
two of the Indian bows and arrows. The bows were
much shorter than those to which they were accustomed,
and required far less strength to pull. The wood of which
the bows were formed was tough and good, and as the
boys had both the handiness of sailors and, like all lads
of that period, had some knowledge of bow-making, they
returned to the camp and obtained two more of the
strongest bows in the possession of the natives. They
then set to work with their knives, and each taking two
bows, cut them up, fitted and spliced them together.

The originals were but four feet long, the new ones six.
The halves of one bow formed the two ends, the middle
being made of the other bow doubled. The pieces were
spliced together with deers' sinews, and when, after some
hours' work, they were completed, the boys found that
they were as strong and tough as the best of their home
made bows, and required all their strength to draw them
to the ear. The arrows were now too short, but upon
making signs to the natives that they wanted wood for

184 Under Drake's Flag

arrows, a stock of dried wood, carefully prepared, was at
once given them, and of these they made some arrows of
the regulation cloth-yard length. The feathers, fastened
on with the sinews of some small animals, were stripped
from the Indian arrows, and fastened on, as were the
sharp-pointed stones which formed their heads, and on
making a trial the lads found that they could shoot as
far and as straight as with their own familiar weapons.

" We can reckon on killing a stag, if he will stand still,
at a hundred and fifty yards," Ned said, "or running, at
a hundred; don't you think so?"

11 Well, six times out of seven we ought to at any rate,"
Tom replied, "or our Devonshire archership has deserted
us."

When they heard, therefore, that there was to be a
hunt upon the following day they felt* that they had
another surprise for the natives, whose short bows and
arrows were of little use at a greater distance than fifty
yards, although up to that distance deadly weapons in
their hands.

CHAPTER XII

Across a Continent

THE work upon which the boys were engaged passed
unnoticed by the Indians, who were too much absorbed
by the enjoyment of the new discovery to pay any attention
to other matters. The bows and arrows had been given
to them, as anything else in camp for which they had
a fancy would have been given, but beyond that none
had observed what was being done. There were then
many exclamations of astonishment among them when
Ned and Tom issued from their hut in the morning to
join the hunting party, carrying their new weapons. The
bows were of course unstrung, and Ned handed his to
the chief, who viewed it with great curiosity. It was
passed from hand to hand and then returned to the chief.
One or two of the Indians said something, and the chief
tried its strength. He shook his head. Ned signed to
him to string it, but the chief tried in vain, as did several
of the strongest of the Indians. Indeed, no man, however
powerful, could string an old English bow unless trained
to its use.

When the Indians had given up the attempt as hopeless,
the two lads strung their bows without the slightest diffi
culty, to the intense surprise of the natives. These again
took the bows, but failed to bend them even to the length
of their own little arrows. The lads then took out their

186

1 86 Under Drake's Flag

newly-made shafts and took aim at a young tree of a foot
diameter, standing at about two hundred yards distance,
and both sent their arrows quivering into the trunk.

The Indians gave a perfect yell of astonishment.

"It is not much of a mark," Tom said; "Hugh
Willoughby of our village could hit a white glove at that
distance every time, and the fingers of a. glove five times
out of six; it is the length of the shots, not the accuracy,
which astounds these fellows. However, it is good enough
to keep up our superiority."

The party now started on their hunt. There was but
little difficulty in finding game, for numerous herds could
be seen grazing; the task was to get within shot. The
boys watched anxiously to see the course which the
Indians would adopt. First ascertaining which way the
wind was blowing, the chief, with ten others, accompanied
by the boys, set off to make a circuit so as to approach
one of the herds up wind. When they had reached the
point desired all went down upon their bellies and crawled
like snakes until they reached a clump of low bushes a
quarter of a mile from the herd. Then they lay quiet,
waiting for their comrades, whose turn it now was to act.
These also making a circuit, but in the opposite direction,
placed themselves half a mile to windward of the deer in
a long line. Then they advanced toward the herd, making
no effort to conceal themselves.

Scarcely had they risen to their feet than the herd
winded them. For a minute or two they stood motion
less, watching the distant figures, and then turning,
bounded away. The chief uttered an exclamation of dis
gust, for it was evident at once that from the direction
that they were taking the herd would not pass, as he
hoped, close by the bushes. The lads, however, were

Across a Continent 187

well satisfied, for the line would take them within a
hundred and fifty yards. As in a closely packed body
they came along Ned and Tom rose suddenly to their
feet, drew their bows to their ears, and launched their
arrows. Each had, according to the custom of English
archers, stuck two arrows into the ground by the spot
where they would stand up, and these they also discharged
before the herd was out of shot. With fair shooting it
was impossible to miss so large a mark, and five of the
little deer rolled over, pierced through by the arrows,
while another, hit in a less vital spot, carried off the
weapon.

The Indians raised a cry of joy and surprise at shooting
which to them appeared marvellous indeed, and when the
others came up showed them with marks of astonish
ment the distance at which the animals had fallen from
the bush from which the arrows had been aimed. Two
more beats were made. These were more successful, the
herds passing close to the places of concealment, and
upon each occasion ten stags fell. This was considered
sufficient.

The animals were not all of one kind. One herd was
composed of deer far larger than, and as heavy as good-
sized sheep, while the others were considerably smaller,
and the party had as much as their united efforts — except
those of Ned and Tom, whose offer to assist was peremp
torily declined — could drag back to the village, where the
feasting was at once renewed.

The lads, when the natives had skinned the deer, took
some of the smaller and finer skins, intending to dry them,
but the natives, seeing their intention, brought them a
number of the same kind, which were already well cured
and beautifully supple. Fashioning needles from small

i88 Under Drake's Flag

pieces of bone, with sinews for thread, and using" their
own tattered clothes as patterns, the two lads set to work,
and by the following" evening had manufactured doublets
and trunks of deerskin, which were a vast improvement
upon their late ragged apparel, and had at a short dis
tance the appearance of being made of a bright brownish-
yellow cloth.

By this time the Indians had become quite accustomed
to them. The men, and sometimes even the women, came
to the hut and sat down and tried to talk with them. The
boys did their best to learn, asking the name of every
article and repeating it until they had thoroughly learned
it, the Indians applauding like children when they attained
the right pronunciation.

The next morning- they saw a young Indian starting
alone with his bow and arrow. Anxious to see how he
was going to proceed by himself the boys asked if they
might accompany him. He assented and together they
started off. After an hour's walking they arrived at an
eminence from which an extensive view could be obtained.
Here their companion motioned to them to lie down and
watch his proceeding's. They did so, and saw him make
a wide circuit and work up towards the herd of deer.

"They will be off long before he can get within bow
shot," Tom said; "look, they are getting fidgety already,
they scent danger, and he is four hundred yards away.
They will be off in a minute. Look, what on earth is he
doing?"

The Indian was lying on his back, his body being almost
concealed by the grass, which was a foot high. In the
air he waved his legs to and fro, twisting and twining
them. The boys could not help laughing at the curious
appearance of the two black objects waving slowly about.

Across a Continent 189

The herd of deer stood staring stupidly at the spectacle.
Then, as if moved by a common impulse of curiosity, they
began slowly to approach in order to investigate more
closely this singular phenomenon. Frequently theystopped,
but only to continue their advance, which was made with
a sort of circling movement, as if to see the object from all
sides. Nearer and nearer they approached, until the
leaders were not more than fifty yards away, when the
native leaped to his feet and discharged his arrows with
such rapidity and accuracy that two of the animals fell
before they could dart away out of range. The lads soon
joined the native, and expressed their approval of his skill.
Then while he threw one carcass over his shoulder they
divided the weight of the other between them, and so
accompanied him into camp.

The next day Ned and Tom, walking to an eminence
near the camp, saw in the distance some ostriches feeding.
Returning to the huts they found the young hunter whom
they had accompanied on the preceding day, and beckoned
to him to accompany them. When they reached the spot
from which the ostriches were visible they motioned to
him to come out and shoot them. He at once nodded.

As they were about to follow him back to camp for their
bows and arrows, he shook his head and signed to them
to stay where they were, and going off by himself returned
with his bow and arrow, and, to the surprise of the boys,
the skin of an ostrich.

To show the lads what he intended to do he put on the
skin, sticking one arm up the long neck, his black legs
alone showing. He now imitated the motions of the bird,
now stalking along, now picking up bits of grass, and
this with such an admirable imitation of nature that Ned
and Tom shouted with laughter. The three then set off

Under Drake's Flag

together, taking a line which hid them from the view of
the ostriches. The Indian at last led them to a small emi
nence and signed to them to ascend this, and there to lie
down and watch the result. On arriving at their post
they found themselves about a quarter of a mile from the
group of great birds.

It seemed a long time before they could see any signs of
the native, who had to make a long detour so as to approach
the birds up wind. About a hundred and fifty yards from
the spot where they were feeding was a clump of bushes,
and presently the lads suddenly beheld an ostrich feeding
quietly beside this clump.

1 'There was no bird near those bushes two minutes
ago," Tom said; "it must be the Indian."

Very quietly and by degrees the ostrich approached the
group. When within four yards of them, the ostrich, as
if by magic, vanished, and an Indian stood in his place.
In another moment his bow twanged and the ostrich next
to him fell over, pierced through with an arrow; while the
rest of the flock scattered over the plain at an immense
speed. Ned and Tom now rose to their feet and ran down
the slope to the Indian, who was standing by the dead
bird. He pulled out the tail feathers and handed them to
them, cut off the head and legs, opened and cleaned the
body, and then putting it on his shoulder started again
for the camp.

For another week they remained in the Indian village,
and in that time picked up a good many native words.
They then determined that they must be starting on their
westward journey. They therefore called upon the chief
and explained to him by signs eked out with a few words,
that they must leave him and go towards the setting sun.
The grief of the chief was great, as was that of the tribe

Across a Continent 191

when he communicated the tidings to them. There was
great talking among the groups round the fire that night,
and Ned saw that some question was being debated at
great length. The next morning the chief and several of
the leading men came into their hut, and the chief made
a speech accompanied with great gesticulation. The lads
gathered that he was imploring them not to leave them,
and pointing out that there would be hostile Indians on
the road who would attack them. Then the chief led them
to the fires and signed that if they went out the tribe
would be cold again, and would be unable to cook their
food.

Already, indeed, on one occasion after a great feast the
tribe had slept so soundly that all the fires were out before
morning, and Ned had been obliged to have recourse to
his flint and steel. After this two fires had been kept con
stantly burning night and day; others were lighted for
cooking, but these were tended constantly, and Ned saw
that there was little chance of their ever going out together
so long as the tribe remained in the village.

Now, however, he proceeded to show them how to carry
fire with them. Taking one blazing stick and starting out
as for a journey he showed that the fire gradually went
out. Then he returned to the fire and took two large
pieces, and started, keeping them so crossed that the parts
on fire were always in contact. In this way, as he showed
them, fire could be kept in for a very long time ; and that
if two brands were taken from each fire there would be
little difficulty in keeping fire perpetually.

Finally, he showed them how in case of losing fire in
spite of all these precautions, it could be recovered by
means of friction. He took two pieces of dried wood,
one being very hard grained and the other much softer.

192 Under Drake's Flag

Of the former he cut a stick of about a foot long and an
inch round, and pointed at both ends. In the other he
made a small hole. Then he unstrung one end of a bow
string, twisted it once round the stick, and strung it again.
Then he put one point of the stick in the hole in the other
piece of wood, which he laid upon the ground. Round
the hole he crumbled into dust some dry fungus. On the
upper end c;f the short stick he placed a flat stone, which
he bade one of the natives press with moderate force.
Now working the bow rapidly backwards and forwards
the stick was spun round and round like a drill. The
Indians, who were unable to make out what Ned was
doing, watched these proceedings with great attention.
When a little smoke began to curl up from the heated
wood they understood at once, and shouted with wonder.
In a few minutes sparks began to fly from the stick, and
as these fell on the dried fungus they rapidly spread. Tom
knelt down and blew gently upon them, adding a few
dried leaves, and in another minute a bright flame sprang
up.

The iaatives were delighted; they had now means of
making fire, and could in future enjoy warmth and cooked
food, and their gratitude to the lads was unbounded.
Hitherto they had feared that when these strange white
beb-gs departed they would lose their fires, and return to
their former cheerless existence, when the long winter
evenings had to be spent in cold and darkness. That
evening the chief intimated to his visitors that he and a
portion of the men of the tribe would accompany them for
some distance, the women remaining behind with the rest
of the fighting men as their guard. This decision pleased
the young men much, for they could not hope to go far
without meeting other tribes; and although, as had been

Across a Continent 193

found in the present instance, the gift of fire would be sure
to propitiate the Indians, it was probable that they might
be attacked on the march and killed without having an
opportunity of explanation. Their friends, however, would
have the power of at once explaining to all comers the
valuable benefits which they could bestow.

During- the time that they had been staying in the village
they had further improved their bows by taking them to
pieces, fitting the parts more accurately together, and
gluing them with glue prepared by boiling down sinews
of animals in a gourd. Then rebinding them with fine
sinews, they found that they were in all respects equal to
their English weapons. They had now no fear as to their
power of maintaining themselves with food on the way,
and felt that, even when their new friends should leave
them, they would have a fair chance of defending them
selves against attack, as their bows would carry more
than thrice as far as those of the natives.

The following morning the start was made. The chief
and twenty picked warriors accompanied them, together
with six young Indians, two of whom carried lighted
brands; the others dragged light sleighs, upon which
were piled skins and long poles for making tents at
night, for the temperature was exceedingly cold after sun
down. The whole village turned out to see the party
off, and shouts of farewell and good wishes rang in the
air.

For the first three days no adventures were met with.
The party had no difficulty in killing game sufficient for
their needs, and at night they halted at streams or pools.
Ned observed, however, that at the last halting-place the
chief, who had hitherto taken no precaution at night, gave
some orders to his followers, four of whom, when the others

(162) 13

i94 Under Drake's Flag

lay down to rest, glided off in different directions into the
darkness.

Ned pointed to them enquiringly, and the chief intimated
that they were now entering the hunting grounds of another
tribe. The following day the band kept closely together.
A vigilant lookout on the plains was kept up, and no
straggling was allowed. They had sufficient meat left
over from their spoils of the day before to last for the day,
and no hunting was necessary.

The next evening, just as they had retired to rest, one
of the scouts came in and reported that he heard sounds
around which betokened the presence of man. The calls
of animals were heard on the plain, and a herd of deer
which had evidently been disturbed, had darted past at
full speed.

The chief now ordered great quantities of dried wood to
be thrown into the fire, and a vast blaze soon shot up high,
illuminating a circle of a hundred yards in diameter.
Advancing to the edge of this circle the chief held out his
arms to show that he was unarmed, and then shouted at
the top of his voice to the effect that he invited all within
hearing to come forward in peace. The strange appear
ance that they saw was a boon given to the Indian people
by two great white beings who were in his camp, and that
by its aid there would be no more cold.

Three times he shouted out these words, and then retired
to the fire and sat down. Presently from the circle of dark
ness a number of figures appeared, approaching timidly
and with an awestruck air until within a short distance of
the fire.

Then the chief again rose and bade them welcome.
There were some fifty or sixty of them, but Ned and his
friend had no fear of any treachery, for they were evi-

Across a Continent 195

dently under the spell of a sense of amazement greater
than that which had been excited among those they first
met, and this because they first saw this wonder by night.

When the newcomers had taken their seats the chief
explained to them the qualities of their new discovery.
That it made them warm and comfortable their own feel
ings told them ; and on the morrow, when they had meat,
he would show them how great were its effects. Then he
told them of the dancing water, and how it softened and
made delicious the vegetables placed in it. At his com
mand one of his followers took two brands, carried them
to a distance, and soon lighted another fire.

During the narrative the faces of the Indians lighted up
with joy, and they cast glances of reverence and gratitude
towards the young white men. These finding that amity
was now established retired to sleep to the little skin tents
which had been raised for them, while the Indians remained
sitting round the fire engrossed with its wonders.

The young men slept late next morning, knowing that
no move could be made that day. When they came out
of the tents they found that the natives had lost no time.
Before daybreak hunting parties had gone out, and a store
of game was piled near the fire, or rather fires, for a dozen
were now burning, and the strangers were being initiated
in the art of cooking by their hosts.

Two days were spent here, and then after much talk
the tribe at which they had now arrived arranged to
escort and pass the boys on to their neighbours, while
the first party returned to their village. Ned and Tom
were consulted before this matter was settled, and ap
proved of it. It was better that they should be passed
on from tribe to tribe than that they should be escorted
all the way by a guard who would be as strange as

196 Under Drake's Flag

themselves to the country, and who would naturally be
longing to return to their homes and families.

For some weeks the life led by the travellers resembled
that which has been described. Sometimes they waited
for a few days at villages where great festivities were
held in their honour. The news of their coming in many
cases preceded them, and they and their convoy were
often met at the stream, or other mark which formed
the acknowledged boundary between the hunting grounds,
by large bodies eager to receive and welcome them.

They had by this time made considerable progress in
the language, knew all the names of common objects, and
could make themselves understood in simple matters. The
language of savage people is always simple; their range
of ideas is narrow; their vocabulary very limited, and
consequently easily mastered. Ned knew that at any
time they might come across people in a state of active
warfare with each other, and that his life might depend
upon the ability to make himself understood, consequently
he lost no opportunity of picking up the language. On
the march Tom and he, instead of walking and talking
together, each went with a group of natives and kept
up a conversation, eked out with signs, with them, and
consequently they made very considerable progress with
the language.

CHAPTER XIII

Through the Cordilleras

AFTER three months of steady travel, the country, which
had become more and more hilly as they advanced toward
the west, assumed a different character. The hills became
mountains, and it was clear that they were arriving at
a great range running north and south. They had for
some time left the broad plains behind them, and game
was very scarce. The Indians had of late been more and
more disinclined to go far to the west, and the tribe with
whom they were now travelling told them that they could
go no farther. They signified that beyond the mountains
dwelt tribes with whom they were unacquainted, but who
were fierce and warlike. One of the party, who had once
crossed, said that the people there had fires like those
which the white men had taught them to make.

"You see, Tom," Ned said, "they must have been in
contact with the Spaniards, or at least with tribes who
have learned something from the Spaniards. In that case
our supernatural power will be at an end, and our colour
will be against us, as they will regard us as Spaniards,
and so as enemies. At any rate we must push on and
take our chance."

From the Indian they learned that the track lay up a
valley before them, that after a day's walking they would
have to begin the ascent. Another day's journey would

197

198 Under Drake's Flag

take them to a neck between two peaks, and the passage
of this would occupy at least a day. The native described
the cold as great here even in summer, and that in winter
it was terrible. Once across the neck the descent on the
other side began.

"There can be no snow in the pass now, Tom; it is
late in December, and the hottest time of the year; and
although we must be a very great height above the sea,
for we have been rising ever since we left the coast, we
are not so very far south, and I cannot believe the snow
can now lie in the pass. Let us take a good stock of
dried meat, a skin for water — we can fill it at the head
of the valley — and make our way forward. I do not
think the sea can lie very far on the other side of this
range of mountains, but at any rate we must wait no
longer. Captain Drake may have passed already, but
we may still be in time."

The next morning they bade adieu to their companions,
with whom they had been travelling for a fortnight.
These, glad again to turn their faces homeward, set off
at once, and the lads, shouldering their packs, started
up the valley. The scenery was grand in the extreme,
and Ned and Tom greatly enjoyed it. Sometimes the
sides approached in perpendicular precipices, leaving
barely room for the little stream to find its way between
their feet, at others it was half a mile wide. When the
rocks were not precipitous the sides were clothed with
a luxuriant foliage, among which the birds maintained
a concert of call and song. So sheltered were they
that, high as it was above the sea, the heat was very
oppressive, and when they reached the head of the valley
late in the afternoon they were glad indeed of a bathe in
a pool of the stream.

Through the Cordilleras 199

Choosing a spot of ground near the stream, the lads
soon made a fire, put their pieces of venison down to
roast, and prepared for a quiet evening.

" It seems strange to be alone again, Tom, after so
many months with those Indians, who were ever on the
watch for every movement and word, as if they were
inspired. It is six months now since we left the western
coast, and one almost seems to forget that one is English.
We have picked up something of half a dozen Indian
dialects ; we can use their weapons almost as well as they
can themselves; and as to our skins, they are as brown
as that of the darkest of them. The difficulty will be
to persuade the people on the other side that we are
whites."

" How far do you think the sea lies on the other side
of this range of giant mountains?" Tom asked.

"I have no idea," Ned replied, "and I do not suppose
that anyone else has. The Spaniards keep all matters
connected with this coast a mystery; but I believe that
the sea cannot be many days' march beyond the moun
tains."

For an hour or two they chatted quietly, their thoughts
naturally turning again to England and the scenes of their
boyhood.

"Will it be necessary to watch, think you?" Tom
asked.

" I think it would be safer, Tom; one never knows,
I believe that we are now beyond the range of the natives
of the Pampas. They evidently have a fear of approach
ing the hills; but that only shows that the natives from
the other side come down over here. I believe that they
were, when the Spaniards landed, peaceable people, quiet
and gentle. So at least they are described. But those

200 Under Drake's Flag

who take to the mountains must be either escaped slaves,
or fugitives from the cruelty of the Spaniards, and even
the gentlest man, when driven to desperation, becomes
savage and cruel. To these men our white skins would
be like a red rag to a bull. They can never have heard
of any white people save the Spaniards, and we need
expect little mercy if we fall into their hands. I think
we had better watch, turn about; I will take the first
watch, for I am not at all sleepy, and my thoughts seem
busy to-night with home."

Tom was soon fast asleep, and Ned sat quietly watching
the embers of the fire, occasionally throwing on fresh
sticks, until he deemed that nearly half the night was
gone. Then he aroused his companion and lay down
himself, and was soon fast asleep.

The grey light was just beginning to break when he
was aroused by a sudden yell, accompanied by a cry from
Tom. He leaped to his feet just in time to see a crowd
of natives rush upon himself and his comrade, discharging
as they did so numbers of small arrows, several of which
pierced him as he rose to his feet. Before they could
grasp their bows or any other weapons the natives were
upon them. Blows were showered down with heavy clubs,
and although the lads made a desperate resistance they
were beaten to the ground in a short time. The natives
at once twisted strong thongs round their limbs, and
then dragging them from the fire, sat down themselves
and proceeded to roast the remains of the boys' deer
meat.

"This is a bad business indeed, Tom," Ned said.
"These men doubtless take us for Spaniards. They
certainly must belong to the other side of the moun
tains, for their appearance and language are altogether

Through the Cordilleras 201

different to those of the people we have been staying with.
These men are much smaller, slighter, and fairer. Run
aways though no doubt they are, they seem to have
more care about their persons, and to be more civilized
in their appearance and weapons, than the savages of the
plains."

11 What do you think they will do with us, Ned?"

" I have no doubt in the world, Tom, that their inten
tion is either to put us to death with some horrible tor
ture, or to roast us. The Spaniards have taught them
these things if they did not know them before, and in
point of atrocities nothing can possibly exceed those
which the Spaniards have inflicted upon them and their
fathers."

Whatever were the intentions of the Indians it was soon
evident that there would be some delay in carrying them
out. After they had finished their meal they rose from
the fire. Some amused themselves by making arrows
from the straight reeds that grew by the stream. Others
wandered listlessly about. Some threw themselves upon
the ground and slept, while others coming up to the boys,
poured torrents of invective upon them, among which
they could distinguish in Spanish the words "dog" and
" Spaniard ", varying their abuse by violent kicks. As,
however, these were given by the naked feet, they did
not seriously inconvenience the boys.

"What can they be waiting for?" Tom said. "Why
don't they do something if they are going to do it."

"I expect," Ned answered, "that they are waiting for
some chief, or for the arrival of some other band, and that
we are to be kept for a grand exhibition."

So it proved. Three days passed, and upon the fourth
another band, smaller in numbers, joined them. Upon

202

Under Drake's Flag

the evening of that day the lads saw that their fate was
about to be brought to a crisis. The fire was made up
with huge bundles of wood; the natives took their seats
around it with gravity and order; and the boys were led
forward by four natives armed with spears. Then began
what was a regular trial. The boys, although they could
not understand a word of the language, could yet follow
the speeches of the excited orators. One after another
arose and told the tale of the treatment that he had ex
perienced. One showed the weals which covered his
back. Another held up his arm from which the hand
had been lopped. A third pointed to the places where
his ears once had been. Another showed the sear of a
hot iron on his arms and legs. Some went through a
pantomime which told its tale of an attack upon some
solitary hut, the slaughter of the old and infirm, and the
dragging away of the men and women into slavery.
Others spoke of long periods of labour in a bent position
in a mine under the cruel whip of the taskmaster. All
had their tale of barbarity and cruelty to recite, and as
each speaker contributed his quota the anger and excite
ment of the rest rose.

"Poor devils!" Ned said; "no wonder that they are
savage against us. See what they have suffered at the
hands of the white men. If we had gone through as
much, you may be sure that we should spare none. Our
only chance is to make them understand that we are not
Spanish, and that, I fear, is beyond all hope."

This speedily proved to be the case. Two or three of
the natives who spoke a few words of Spanish came to
them, calling them Spanish dogs. Ned shook his head
and said, "Not Spanish." For all reply the natives
pointed to the uncovered portions of their body, pulled

Through the Cordilleras 203

back the skins which covered their arms, and pointing
to the white flesh, laughed incredulously.

"White men are Spaniards, and Spaniards are white
men," Tom groaned, "and that we shall have to die for
the cruelty which the Spaniards have perpetrated is clear
enough.

"Well, Ned, we have had more good fortune than we
could have expected. We might have been killed on the
day when we landed, and we have spent six jolly months
in wandering together as hunters on the plain. If we
must die, let us behave like Englishmen and Christians.
It may be that our lives have not been as good as they
should have been; but so far as we know, we have both
done our duty, and it may be that, as we die for the
faults of others, it may come to be considered as a balance
against our own faults."

"We must hope so, Tom. I think we have both done,
I won't say our best, but as well as could be expected in
so rough a life. We have followed the exhortations of
the good chaplain and have never joined in the riotous
ways of the sailors in general. We must trust that the
good God will forgive us our sins, and strengthen us to
go through this last trial."

While they had been speaking the natives had made
an end of their deliberation. Tom was now conducted
by two natives with spears to a tree and was securely
fastened. Ned, under the guard of the other two, was
left by the fire. The tree was situated at a distance of
some twenty yards from it, and the natives mostly
took their place near the fire. Some scattered among
the bushes and presently reappeared bearing bundles of
dry wood. These were laid in order round the tree at
such a distance that the flames would not touch the

204 Under Drake's Flag

prisoner, but the heat would gradually rotfst him to
death.

As Ned observed the preparations for the execution of
his friend the sweat stood in great drops on his forehead,
and he would have given anything to be able to rush to
his assistance and to die with him. Had his hands been
free he would, without hesitation, have snatched up a bow
and sent an arrow into Tom's heart to release him from
the lingering death which awaited him, and he would then
have stabbed himself with a spear. But while his hands
were sufficiently free to move a little, the fastenings were
too tight to admit of his carrying out any plan of that
sort.

Suddenly an idea struck him, and he began nervously to
tug at his fastenings. The natives when they seized them
had bound them without examining their clothes. It was
improbable that men in savage attire could have about
them any articles worth appropriating. The knives, indeed,
which hung from their belts had been cut off; but these
were the only articles which had been touched. Just as
a man approached the fire, and, seizing a brand, stooped
forward to light the pyre, Ned succeeded in freeing his
hands sufficiently to seize the object which he sought.
This was his powder flask, which was wrapped in the folds
of the cloth round his waist» With little difficulty he suc
ceeded in freeing it, and, moving a step closer to the fire,
he cast it into the midst of it at the very moment the man
with the lighted brand was approaching Tom. Then he
stepped back as far as he could from the fire.

The natives on guard over him, not understanding the
movement, and thinking he meditated flight, closed around
him.

An instant later there was a tremendous explosion. The

Through the Cordilleras 205

red-hot embers were flaming in all directions, and both
Ned and the savages who stood by him were, with many
others, struck to the ground. As soon as he was able
Ned struggled up again.

Not a native was in sight. A terrific yell had broken
from them at the explosion, which sounded to them like
one of the cannons of their Spanish oppressors, and
smarting with the wounds simultaneously made by the hot
brands, each, without a moment's thought, had taken to
his heels. Tom gave a shout of exultation as Ned rose.
The latter at once stooped and with difficulty picked up
one of the still blazing brands and hurried towards the
tree.

" If these fellows will remain away for a couple of
minutes, Tom, you shall be free," he said, "and I don't
think they will get over their scare as quickly as that."

So saying, he applied the end of the burning brand to
the dry withes with which Tom was bound to the tree.
These at once took fire and flared up, and the bands fell
to the ground.

" Now, Tom, do me the same service."

This was quickly rendered, and the lads stood free.

" Now let us get our weapons."

A short search revealed to them their bows laid carefully
aside, while the ground was scattered with the arms which
the natives in their panic had dropped.

" Pick them all up, Tom, and toss them on the fire.
We will take the sting out of the snake, in case it tries to
attack us again."

In a minute or two a score of bows, spears, and other
weapons were thrown on the fire, and the boys then,
leaving the place which had so nearly proved fatal to them,
took their way up the mountain side.

206 Under Drake's Flag

It was a long pull, the more so that they had the food,
water, and large skins for protection from the night air to
carry. Steadily as they kept on, with only an occasional
halt for breath, it was late before they emerged from the
forest and stood upon a plateau between two lofty hills.
This was bare and treeless, and the keen wind made them
shiver as they met it.

" We will creep among the trees, Tom, and be off at
daybreak to-morrow. However long the journey, we must
get across the pass before we sleep, for the cold there
would be terrible." A little way down the crest it was so
warm that they needed no fire, while a hundred feet higher,
exposed to the wind from the snow-covered peaks, the
cold was intense. They kept careful watch, but the night
passed quietly. The next morning they were on foot as
soon as the voices of the birds proclaimed the approach of
day. As they emerged from the shelter of the trees they
threw their deerskins round them to act as cloaks, and
stepped out at their best pace. The dawn of day was yet
faint in the east, the stars burning bright as lamps over
head in the clear thin air, and the cold was so great that
it almost stopped their breathing. Half an hour later the
scene had changed altogether. The sun had risen, and
the air felt warm. The many peaks on either side glistened
in the flood of bright light. The walking was easy indeed
after the climb of the previous day, and their burdens were
much lightened by their consumption of food and water.
The pass was of irregular width, sometimes but a hundred
yards, sometimes fully a mile across. Long habit and
practice with the Indians had immensely improved their
walking powers, and with long elastic strides they put
mile after mile behind them. Long before the sun was at
its highest a little stream ran beside them, and they saw

Through the Cordilleras 207

by the course of its waters that they had passed the highest
part of the pass through the Cordilleras.

Three hours later they suddenly emerged from a part
where the hills approached nearer on either side than they
had done during the day's walk, and a mighty landscape
opened before and below them. The boys gave simul
taneously a loud shout of joy, and then dropped on their
knees in thanks to God, for far away in the distance was a
dark level blue line, and they knew the ocean was before
them.

" How far off should you say it was, Ned?" Tom asked
when they had recovered a little from their first outburst
of joy.

"A long way off," Ned said; "I suppose we must be
fifteen thousand feet above it, and even in this transparent
air it looks an immense distance away. I should say it
must be a hundred miles."

4 'That's nothing!" Tom said; "we could do it in two
days, in three easily."

" Yes, supposing we had no interruption and a straight
road," Ned said. "But we must not count our chickens
yet. This vast forest which we see, contains tribes of
natives bitterly hostile to the white man, maddened by the
cruelties of the Spaniards, who enslave them and treat
them worse than dogs. Even when we reach the sea we
may be a hundred or two hundred miles from a large
Spanish town, and however great the distance, we must
accomplish it, as it is only at large towns that Captain
Drake is likely to touch."

" Well, let us be moving," Tom said; " I am strong for
some hours' walking yet, and every day will take us nearer
to the sea."

"We need not carry our deerskins any farther," Ned

208 Under Drake's Flag

said, throwing his down. " We shall be sweltering" under
the heat to-morrow below there."

Even before they halted for the night the vegetation had
assumed a tropical character, for they had already de
scended some five thousand feet.

" I wish we could contrive to make a fire to-night,"
Ned said.

"Why?" Tom asked; " I am bathed in perspiration
now."

"We shall not want it for heat, but the chances are
that there are wild beasts of all sorts in this forest."

Ned's premises turned out correct, for scarcely had night
fallen when they heard deep roarings, and lost no time in
ascending a tree, and making themselves fast there, before
they went to sleep.

In the morning they proceeded upon their journey. After
walking a couple of hours Ned laid his arm upon Tom's
shoulder.

" Hush!" he whispered; " look there."

Through the trees, at a short distance off, could be seen
a stag. He was standing gazing intently at a tree, and
did not appear to have heard their approach.

" What can he be up to?" Tom whispered. " He must
have heard us.",

"He seems paralysed," Ned said. "Don't you see
how he is trembling? There must be some wild beast in
the tree."

Both gazed attentively at the tree, but could see nothing
to account for the attitude of the deer.

"Wild beast or no," Ned said, "he will do for our
dinner."

So saying, he unslung his bow and fitted an arrow;
there was a sharp twang, and the deer rolled over, struck

Through the Cordilleras 209

to the heart. There was no movement in the tree, but
Ned placed another arrow in place; Tom had done the
same.

They stood silent for a few minutes, but all was still.

" Keep your eyes on the tree and advance slowly," Ned
said. " Have your sword ready in case of need. I cannot
help thinking1 there is something1 there, though what it is
I can't make out."

Slowly, and with the greatest caution, they approached
the tree. All was perfectly still.

"No beast big enough to hurt us can be up there, >?
Ned said at last; " none of the branches are thick enough
to hide him. Now for the stag.''

Ned bent over the carcass of the deer, which lay a few
feet only from the tree. Then suddenly there was a rapid
movement among the creepers which embraced the trunk,
something swept between Ned and Tom, knocking the
latter to the ground, while a cry of alarm and astonish
ment rose from Ned.

Confused and surprised Tom sprang to his feet, instinc
tively drawing his sword as he did so. For a moment he
stood paralysed with horror. A gigantic snake had wound
its coils round Ned's body. Its head towered above his,
while its eyes flashed menacingly, and its tongue vibrated
with a hissing sound as it gazed at Tom; its tail was
wound round the trunk of the tree.

Ned was powerless, for his arms were pinioned to his
side by the coils of the reptile. It was but a moment that
Tom stood appalled. He knew that at any instant by the
tightening of its folds the great boa could crush every
bone of Ned's body; while the very closeness of its embrace
rendered it impossible for him to strike at it for fear ot
injuring its captor* There was not an instant to be lost,

(162) 14,

2io Under Drake's Flag

Already the coils were tightening, and a hoarse cry broke
from Ned. With a rapid spring Tom leaped beyond his
friend, and with a blow, delivered with all his strength,
severed the portion of the tail coiled round the tree from
the rest of the body.

Unknowingly he had taken the only course to save Ned's
life. Had he, as his first impulse had been, struck at the
head as it raised itself above that of Ned, the convulsion
of the rest of the body would probably have crushed the
life out of him ; but by cutting off the tail he separated
the body from the tree which formed the fulcrum upon
which it acted.

As swiftly as they had enclosed him the coils fell from
Ned a writhing mass upon the ground, and a second blow
from Tom's sword severed the head from the body. Even
now the folds writhed and twisted like an injured worm;
but Tom struck and struck until the fragments lay, with
only a slight quivering motion in them, on the ground.

Then Tom, throwing down his cutlass, raised Ned,
who, upon being released from the embrace of the
boa, had fallen senseless. Alarmed as Tom was at his
comrade's insensibility, he yet felt that it was the shock
and the revulsion of feeling which caused it, and not any
serious injury which he had received. No bones had been
heard to crack, and although the compression had been
severe, Tom did not think that any serious injury had been
inflicted.

He dashed some water from the skins over Ned's face,
rubbed his hand, spoke to him in a loud voice, and ere
long had the satisfaction of seeing him open his eyes.

"Thank God!" Tom exclaimed fervently. " There,
don't move, Ned, take it quietly, it's all right now. There,
drink a little water."

Through the Cordilleras an

He poured a few drops down Ned's throat, and the
latter, whose eyes had before had a dazed and wondering
expression, suddenly sat up and strove to draw his sword.
"Gently, Ned, gently; the snake is dead, chopped up into
pieces. It was a near shave, Ned."

CHAPTER XIV

On the Pacific Coast

"A CLOSE shave indeed," Ned said, raising himself with
difficulty from the ground. " Another moment and I
think my ribs would have given in. It seemed as if all
the blood in my body had rushed to my head."

" Do you feel badly hurt?" Tom asked anxiously.

"No," Ned said, feeling himself all over. "Horribly
bruised, but nothing broken. To think of our not seeing
that monstrous boa! I don't think," he continued, "that
I can walk any farther to-day. I feel shaken all over."

"Then we will camp where we are," Tom said cheer
fully. " We have got a stag, and he will last us for some
days, if necessary. There is plenty of fruit to be picked
in the forest, and on this mountain side we are sure to
be able to find water within a short distance."

Lighting a fire, the deer was soon cut up, and the lads
prepared to spend a quiet day, which was all the more
welcome inasmuch as for the last three weeks they had
travelled without intermission.

The next day Ned declared himself well enough to pro
ceed on his journey ; but his friend persuaded him to stop
for another day.

Late in the evening Ned exclaimed, "What is that,
Tom, behind that tree?"

Tom seized his bow and leaped to his feet,

m

On the Pacific Coast 213

" I see nothing*," he said.

"It Was either a native or a gigantic monkey. I saw
him quite plainly glide along behind the tree."

Tom advanced cautiously, but on reaching the tree he
found nothing.

" You are sure you were not mistaken?" he asked.

"Quite certain," Ned said. "We have seen enough of
Indians by this time to knotv them. We must be On
the lookout to-night. The natives on this side dre hot
like those beyond the mountains. They have been so
horribly ill-treated by the Spaniards that they must hate
any white face, and would kill us without hesitation if
they got a chance. We shall have difficulty with the
Spaniards when we fall into their hands, but they will
at least be more reasonable than these savages."

All night they kept up their fire and sat up by turns on
watch. Several times they thought that they heard slight
movements among the fallen leaves and twigs; but these
might have been caused by any prowling beast. Once
or twice they fancied that they detected forms moving
cautiously just beyond the range of the firelight, but they
could not be certain that it was so.

Just as morning was breaking Ned sprang to his feet.

"Wake up, Tom!" he exclaimed; "we are attacked;"
and as he spoke an arrow quivered in the tree just over
his head.

They had already discussed whether it would be bettef
to remain, if attacked, in the light of the fire or to retreat
into the shadow, and concluding that the eyes of thd
natives would be more accustomed to see in darkness
than their own, they had determined to stay by the fire,
throwing themselves down on their faces, and to keep the
natives at bay beyond the circle of the light of the flames

214 Under Drake's Flag

till daylight. They had in readiness heaped a great pile
of brushwood, and this they now threw upon the fire,
making a huge pyramid of flame which lit the wood
around for a circle of sixty yards. As the light leaped
up Ned discharged an arrow at a native whom he saw
within the circle of light, and a shrill cry proclaimed that
it had reached its mark. There was silence for a while
in the dark forest, and each moment that passed the day
light became stronger and stronger.

" In ten minutes we shall be able to move on," Ned
said, "and in the daylight I think that the longer range
of our bows will enable us to keep them off. The question
is how many of them are there."

A very short time sufficed to show that the number of
the savages was large, for shrill cries were heard answer
ing each other in the circle around them, and numbers of
black figures could be seen hanging about the trees in
the distance.

" I don't like the look of things, Ned," Tom said. " It
is all very well ; we may shoot a good many before they
reach us, and in the open no doubt we might keep them
off. But by taking advantage of the trees they will be
able to get within range of their weapons, and at short
distances they are just as effective as are our bows."

As soon as it was broad daylight the lads started
through the forest, keeping up a running fight with the
natives.

" It is clear," Tom said, "we cannot stand this much
longer. We must take to a tree."

They were on the point of climbing when Ned ex
claimed, "Listen! I can hear the sound of bells."

Listening intently they could make out the sound of
little bells such as are carried by horses or mules.

On the Pacific Coast 215

" It must be a train to one of the mines. If we can
reach that we shall be safe."

Laying" aside all further thought of fighting, the boys
now ran at headlong pace in the direction of the sounds.
The natives, who were far fleeter of foot, gained fast upon
them, and the arrows were flying round them, and several
had inflicted slight wounds, when they heard ahead of
them the cry of " Soldiers on guard! the natives are at
hand; fire in the bushes."

The boys threw themselves upon their faces as from the
thickets ahead a volley of musketry was heard.

"Load again!" was the order in Spanish. "These
black rascals must be strong indeed to advance to attack
us with so much noise."

Crawling forward cautiously, Ned exclaimed in Spanish,
"Do not fire, sefiors; we are two Spaniards who have
been carried away from the settlements, and have for long
been prisoners among the natives."

A cry of surprise was heard, and then the Spaniard in
command called them to advance fearlessly. This they
did. Fortunately they had long before settled upon the
story that they would tell when they arrived among the
Spaniards. To have owned themselves Englishmen, and
as belonging to the dreaded buccaneers, would have been
to ensure their imprisonment, if not execution. The im
perfection of Ned's Spanish, and the fact that Tom was
quite ignorant of the language, rendered it difficult for
them to pass as Spaniards. But they thought that by
giving out that they had been carried away in childhood —
Tom at an earlier age than Ned — their ignorance of the
language would be accounted for.

It had been a struggle with both of them to decide upon
telling an untruth. This is a point upon which differences

216 Under Drake's Fla

g

of opinion must always arise. Some will assert that under
no circumstances can a falsehood be justified. Others will
say that to deceive an enemy in war or to save life, deceit
is justifiable, especially when that deceit injures no one.
It was only after very great hesitation that the boys had
overcome their natural instincts and teaching", and agreed
to conceal their nationality under false colours. Ned,
indeed, held out for a long time; but Tom had cited
many examples from ancient and modern history, showing
that people of all nations had, to deceive an enemy,
adopted such a course, and that to throw away their
lives rather than tell a falsehood which could hurt no
one would be an act of folly. Both, however, determined
that should it become necessary to keep up their character
as Spaniards by pretending to be true Catholics, they
would disclose the truth.

The first sight of the young men struck the captain
of the Spanish escort with astonishment. Bronzed to the
darkest brown by the sun of the plains and by the hard
ships they had undergone, dressed in the skins of animals,
and carrying weapons altogether uncouth and savage to
the Spanish eye, he found it difficult to believe that these
figures were those of his countrymen. His first question,
however, concerned the savages who had, as he supposed,
attacked his escort. A few words from Ned, however,
explained the circumstances, and that the yells he had
heard had been uttered by the Indians pursuing them,
and had no reference whatever to the convoy. This con
sisted of some two hundred mules, laden with provisions
and implements on its way to the mines. Guarded by a
hundred soldiers were a large number of natives, who,
fastened together as slaves, were on their way up to
work for their cruel taskmasters.

On the Pacific Coast 217

When the curiosity of the captain concerning the natives
was allayed, he asked Ned where he and his comrade
had sprung from. Ned assured him that the story was
a very long one, and that at a convenient opportunity he1
would enter into all details. In the first place he asked
that civilized clothes might be given to them, for, as he
said, they looked and felt at present rather as wild men
of the woods than as subjects of the King of Spain.

"YoU speak a very strange Spanish," the captain
said.

" I only wonder," Ned replied, "that I speak in Spanish
at all. I was but a child when I was carried away, and
sinc6 that time I have scarcely spoken a word of my
native tongue. When I reached the village to which my
captors conveyed me I found my companion here, who
was, as I could see, a Spaniard, but who must have
been carried off as an infant, as he even then could
speak no Spanish whatever. He has learned now from
me a few words; but beyond that is wholly ignorant."

"This is a strange story, indeed," the captain said.
"Where was it that your parents lived?"

" I know not the place," Ned said. " But it Was far
to the rising sun acrdss on the other ocean."

As it seemed perfectly possible that the boys might
have been carried away as children from the settlements
near Vera Cruz, the captain accepted the story without
the slightest doubt and at once gave a warm welcome
to the lads, who had, as he supposed, escaped after so
many weary years of captivity.

"I am going up now," he said, "to the mines, and
there must remain on duty for a fortnight, when I shall
return in charge of treasure. It will be dangerous, in
deed, for you to attempt to find your way to the coast

2i8 Under Drake's Flag

without escort. Therefore you had better come on with
me and return under my protection to the coast."

" We should be glad of a stay with you in the moun
tains," Ned said. "We feel so ignorant of everything
European that we should be glad to learn from you a
little of the ways of our countrymen before we venture
down among them. What is the nearest town on the
coast?"

"Arica," the captain said, "is the port from which
we have come. It is distant a hundred and thirty miles
from here, and we have had ten days' hard journeying
through the forest."

For the next fortnight the lads remained at the mines.
These were worked by the Spaniards entirely by slave
labour. Nominal wages were indeed given to the un
fortunates who laboured there. But they were as much
slaves as if they had been sold. The Spaniards, indeed,
treated the whole of the natives in the provinces occupied
by them as creatures to be used mercilessly for labour,
and as having no more feeling than the lower animals.
The number of these unfortunates who perished in the
mines from hard work and cruel treatment is beyond all
calculation. But it may be said that of the enormous
treasures drawn by Spain from her South American pos
sessions during the early days of her occupation, every
doubloon was watered with blood. The boys, who had
for nearly six months lived among the Indians and had
seen their many fine qualities, were horrified at the sights
which they witnessed, and several times had the greatest
difficulty to restrain their feelings of indignation and horror.
They agreed, however, that it would be worse than use
less to give vent to such opinions. It would only draw
upon them the suspicion of the Spaniards, and would set

On the Pacific Coast 219

the authorities at the mine and the captain of the escort
against them, and might prejudice the first report that
would be sent down to Arica concerning them.

During the first few days of their stay the boys acted
their parts with much internal amusement. They pre
tended to be absolutely ignorant of civilized feeding, seized
the meat raw and tore it with their fingers; sat upon the
ground in preference to chairs ; and in every way behaved
as persons altogether ignorant of civilization. Gradually,
however, they permitted themselves to be taught, and
delighted their entertainers by their docility and willing
ness. The Spaniards were indeed somewhat surprised by
the whiteness of their skin where sheltered from the sun,
and by the lightness of their hair and eyes. The boys
could hear many comments upon them, and wondering
remarks why they should be so much fairer than theii
countrymen in general. As, however, it was clearly use
less to ask them, none of the Spaniards thought of doing
so.

The end of the fortnight arrived, and under the charge
of the escort the lads set out, together with twenty mules
laden with silver for the coast. They had no longer any
fear of the attacks of the natives, or any trouble connected
with their food supply, an ample stock of provisions being
carried upon spare mules. They themselves were mounted,
and greatly enjoyed the journey through the magnificent
forests. They were, indeed, a little uneasy as to the
examination which they were sure to have to undergo
at Arica, and which was likely to be very much more
severe and searching than that to which the good-natured
captain had subjected them. They longed to ask him
whether any news had been heard of the arrival of an
English squadron upon the western coast. But it was

220 Under Drake's Flag

impossible to do this without giving rise to suspicion,
and they had the consolation at least of having heard
no single word concerning their countrymen uttered in
the conversations at the mine. Had Captain Francis
Drake and his companions arrived upon the coast, it
was almost certain that their presence there would be
the all-absorbing topic among the Spanish colonists.

Upon their arrival at Arica the boys were conducted
at once to the governor — a stern and haughty-looking
Spaniard, who received the account given by the captain
with an air of incredulity.

"This is a strange tale indeed," he said, "and passes
all probability. Why should these children have been
kidnapped on the eastern coast and brought across the
continent? It is more likely that they belong to this side.
However, they could not be malefactors who have escaped
into the forest, for their age forbids any idea of that kind.
They must have been stolen. But I do not recall any such
event as the carrying off of the sons of Spaniards here for
many years back. However, this can be enquired into
when they learn to speak our language well. In the
meantime they had better be assigned quarters in the bar
racks. Let them be instructed in military exercises and
in oilr language."

"And," said an ecclesiastic who was sitting at the table,
"in our holy religion, for methinks, stolen away as they
were in their youth, they can be no better than pagans."

Tom had difficulty in repressing a desire to glance at
Ned as these words were spoken. But the eyes of the
governor were fixed so intently upon them that he feared
to exhibit any emotion whatever. He resolved mentally,
however, that his progress in Spanish should be exceed
ingly small, and that many months should elapse before

On the Pacific Coast 221

he could possibly receive even rudimentary instruction in
religious matters.

The life in the barracks at Arica resembled pretty closely
that which they had led so long on board ship. The
soldiers received them with good feeling and camaraderie,
and they were soon completely at home with them. They
practised drill, the use of the pike and rapier, taking very
great care in all these exercises to Betray exceeding clumsi
ness. With the bow alone they were able to show how
expert they were. Indeed the Spaniards were in no slight
degree astonished by the extraordinary power and accu
racy of their shooting. This Ned accounted for to them
by the long practice that he had had among the Indians,
declaring that among the tribes beyond the mountains he
was by no means an exceptionally good shot — which,
indeed, was true enough at short distances, for at these
the Indians could shoot with marvellous dexterity.

"By San Josef!" exclaimed one of the Spanish officers,
after watching the boys shooting at a target two hundred
yards distant with their powerful bows, "it reminds me
of the way that those accursed English archers draw their
bows and send their arrows singing through the air. In
faith, too, these men with their blue eyes and their light
hair remind one of these heretic dogs."

"Who are these English?" Ned asked carelessly. " I
have heard of no such tribe. Do they live near the sea-
coast, or among the mountains?"

"They are no tribe, but a white people like ourselves,"
the captain said. "Of course you will not have heard of
them. And, fortunately, you are not likely ever to see
them on this coast; but if you had remained where you
were born, on the other side, you would have heard little
else talked of than the doings of these pirates and

222 Under Drake's Flag

scoundrels, who scour the seas, defy the authority of his
sacred majesty, carry off our treasures under our noses,
burn our towns, and keep the whole coast in an uproar."

"But," said Ned in assumed astonishment, "how is
it that so great a monarch as the King of Spain and
Emperor of the Indies does not annihilate these ferocious
sea robbers? Surely so mighty a king could have no
difficulty in overcoming them."

"They live in an island," the officer said, "and are half
fish, half men."

"What monsters!" Ned exclaimed. "Half fish and
half men! How then do they walk?"

" Not really; but in their habits. They are born sailors,
and are so ferocious and bloodthirsty that at sea they
overcome even the soldiers of Spain, who are known,"
he said, drawing himself up, "to be the bravest in the
world. On land, however, we should teach them a very
different lesson; but on the sea it must be owned that,
somehow, we are less valiant than on shore."

Every day a priest came down to the barracks, and
for an hour endeavoured to instil the elements of his re
ligion into the minds of the now civilized wild men. Ned,
although progressing rapidly in other branches of his
Spanish education, appeared abnormally dull to the ex
planations of the good father, while Tom's small stock
of Spanish was quite insufficient to enable him to com
prehend more than a word here and there.

So matters might have remained for months had not
an event occurred which disclosed the true nationality
of the lads.

One day the ordinarily placid blue sky was overclouded.
The wind rose rapidly, and in a few hours a tremendous
storm was blowing on the coast. Most of the vessels

On the Pacific Coast 223

in the harbour succeeded in running into shelter. But
later in the day a cry arose that a ship had just rounded
the point of the bay, and that she would not be able to
make the port. The whole population speedily gathered
upon the mole, and the vessel, a small one employed in
the coasting trade, was seen struggling with the waves,
which were rapidly bearing her towards a reef lying a
quarter of a mile from the shore. The sea was at this
time running with tremendous force. The wind was howl
ing in a fierce gale, and when the vessel struck upon the
rocks, and her masts at once went by the board, all hope
of safety for the crew appeared at an end.

44 Cannot a boat be launched," said Ned to the soldiers
standing round, " to effect the rescue of these poor fellows
in that wreck?"

"Impossible!" they all said; "no boat could live in
that sea."

After chatting for a time Tom and Ned drew a little
apart from the rest of the crowd, and watched the ill-fated
vessel.

"It is a rough sea, certainly," Ned said; "but it is all
nonsense to say that a boat could not live. Come along,
Tom. Let us push that shallop down. There is a
sheltered spot behind that rock where we may launch
her, and methinks that our arms can row her out to
yonder ship."

Throwing off their doublets, the young men put their
shoulders to the boat and soon forced it into the water.
Then, taking their seats and putting out the oars, they
rowed round the corner of the sheltering rock, and
breasted the sea which was rolling in. A cry of astonish
ment broke from the crowd on the mole as the boat made
its appearance, and the astonishment was heightened when

224 Under Drake's Flag

it was declared by the soldiers that the two men on board
were the wild men of the wood, as they were familiarly
called among themselves.

It was a long struggle before the boys reached the
wreck, and it needed all their strength and seamanship
to avoid being swamped by the tremendous seas. At
last, however, they neared it, and catching a line thrown
to them by the sailors, brought the boat up under the
lee of the ship, and as the captain, the four men who
composed his crew, and a passenger, leaped one by one
from the ship into the sea, they dragged them on board
the boat, and then turned her head to shore.

CHAPTER XV

The Prison of the Inquisition

AMONG the spectators on the mole were the governor and
other principal officers of Arica.

" It seems almost like a miracle from heaven," the
priest, who was standing next the governor, exclaimed.

The governor was scowling angrily at the boat.

" If there be a miracle," he said, "good father, it is
that our eyes have been blinded so long. Think you for
a moment that two lads who have been brought up among
the Indians from their childhood could manage a boat in
such a sea as this? Why, if their story were true they
could neither of them ever have handled an oar, and
these are sailors, skilful and daring beyond the common,
and have ventured a feat that none of our people here
on shore were willing to undertake. How they got here
I know not; but assuredly they are English sailors. This
will account for their blue eyes and light hair, which have
so puzzled us, and for that ignorance of Spanish which
they so craftily accounted for."

Although the assembled mass of people on the beach
had not arrived at the conclusions to which the governor
had jumped, they were filled with astonishment and ad
miration at the daring deed which had been accomplished,
and when the boat was safely brought round behind the

(162) 226 15

226 Under Drake's Flag

shelter of the rock, and its occupants landed on the shore,
loud cheers broke from the crowd, and the lads received
a perfect ovation, their comrades of the barracks being
especially enthusiastic. Presently the crowd were severed
by two soldiers who made their way through it, and
approaching Ned and Tom, said :

" We have the orders of the governor to bring you to
him."

The lads supposed that the governor desired to thank
them for saving the lives of the shipwrecked men, for
in the excitement of the rescue the thought that they
had exposed themselves by their knowledge of seaman
ship had never crossed their minds. The crowd followed
tumultuously, expecting to hear a flattering tribute paid
to the young men who had behaved so well. But the
aspect of the governor, as, surrounded by his officers,
he stood in one of the batteries on the mole, excited a
vague feeling of astonishment and surprise.

"You are two English seamen," he said, when the
lads approached. " It is useless lying any longer. Your
knowledge of seamanship and your appearance alike
convict you."

For an instant the boys were too surprised to reply,
and then Tom said boldly, "We are, sir. We have done
no wrong to any man, and we are not ashamed now to
say we are Englishmen. Under the same circumstances,
I doubt not that any Spaniard would have similarly tried
to escape recognition. But as chance has betrayed us,
any further concealment were unnecessary.'*

"Take them to the guardhouse," the governor said,
"and keep a close watch over them; later, I will inter
rogate them myself in the palace."

The feelings of the crowd on hearing this unexpected

The Prison of the Inquisition 227

colloquy were very mixed. In many, the admiration which
the boys' conduct had excited swallowed up all other feel
ing. But among- the less enthusiastic minds a vague
distrust and terror was at once excited by the news that
English sailors were among them. No Englishman had
ever been seen on that coast, and they had inflicted such
terrible losses on the West Indian Islands and on the
neighbouring coast, that it is no matter for surprise that
their first appearance on the western shores of South
America was deemed an omen of terrible import.

The news rapidly spread from mouth to mouth, and
a large crowd followed in the rear of the little party,
and assembled around the governor's house. The sailors
who had been rescued had many friends in the port, and
these took up the cause of the boys, and shouted that
men who had done so gallant a deed should be pardoned,
whatever their offence. Perhaps, on the whole, this party
were in the majority. But the sinister whisper that cir
culated among the crowd, that they were spies who had
been landed from English ships on the coast, gradually
cooled even the most enthusiastic of their partisans, and
what at one time appeared likely to become a formidable
popular movement, gradually calmed down and the crowd
dispersed.

When brought before the governor the boys affected
no more concealment; but the only point upon which they
refused to give information was respecting the ships on
which they had sailed, and the time at which they had
been left upon the eastern coast of America. Without
absolutely affirming the fact, they led to the belief that
they had passed some years since they left their vessels.

The governor presently gazed sharply upon them and
demanded, "Are you the two whites who headed the

228 Under Drake's Flag

negro revolt in Porto Rico, and did so much damage to
our possessions in that island?"

Ned would have hesitated as to the answer, but Tom
at once said firmly, " We are not those two white men,
sir, but we know them well; and they were two gallant
and loyal Englishmen who, as we know, did much to
restrain the atrocities of the Indians. We saw them
when they regained their ships."

It was lucky, indeed, that the governor did not put
the question separately instead of saying, "Were you
two the leaders?" for in that case Ned would have been
forced to acknowledge that he was one of them.

The outspokenness of Tom's answer allayed the gover
nor's suspicions. A great portion of his questioning was
directed to discovering whether they really had crossed
the continent, for he as well as the populace outside had
at first conceived the idea that they might have been
landed on the coast as spies. The fact, however, that
they were captured far up among the Cordilleras, their
dress and their appearance, and their knowledge of the
native tongues — which he tested by bringing in some
natives, who entered into conversation with them — con
vinced him that all this portion of their story was true.
As he had no fear of their escaping he said that at present
he should not treat them as prisoners, and that their
gallant conduct in rowing out to save the lives of Span
iards in danger entitled them to every good treatment;
but that he must report their case to the authorities at
Lima, who would of course decide upon it. The priest,
however, urged upon the governor that he should con
tinue his instructions to them in the Catholic religion ; and
the governor then pointed out to Ned, who alone was
able to converse fluently in Spanish, that they had now

The Prison of the Inquisition 229

been so long- separated from their countrymen that they
might with advantage to themselves become naturalized
as Spaniards, in which case he would push their fortunes
to the utmost, and with his report in their favour they
might rise to positions of credit and honour; whereas, if
they insisted upon maintaining their nationality as Eng
lishmen, it was but too probable that the authorities at
Lima would consider it necessary to send them as
prisoners to Spain. He said, however, that he would
not press them for an answer at once.

Greatly rejoiced at finding that they were not at present
to be thrown into prison, but were to be allowed to con
tinue their independent life in the barracks, the lads took
their departure from the governor's house, and were most
cordially received by their comrades. For a short time
everything went smoothly. The suspicion that they were
spies had now passed away, and the remembrance of their
courageous action made them popular among all classes
in the town. A cloud, however, began to gather slowly
round them. Now that they had declared their nation
ality, they felt that they could no longer even pretend that
it was likely that they might be induced to forsake their
religion, and they accordingly refused positively to submit
any longer to the teaching of the priests. Arguments
were spent upon them in vain, and after resorting to
these, threats were not obscurely uttered. They were
told, and with truth, that only two or three months be
fore six persons had been burned alive at Lima for defying-
the authority of the church, and that if they persisted in
their heretical opinions a similar fate might fall upon
them.

English boys are accustomed to think with feelings of
unmitigated horror and indignation of the days of the

230 Under Drake's Flag

Inquisition, and in times like these, when a general tolera
tion of religious opinion prevails, it appears to us almost
incredible that men should have put others to death in
the name of religion. But it is only by placing ourselves
in the position of the persecutors of the middle ages that
we can see that what appears to us cruelty and barbarity
of the worst kind was really the result of a zeal in its
way as earnest, if not as praiseworthy, as that which now
impels missionaries to go with their lives in their hands
to regions where little but a martyr's grave can be ex
pected. Nowadays we believe — at least all right-minded
men believe — that there is good in all creeds, and that
it would be rash indeed to condemn men who act up to
the best of their lights, even though those lights may
not be our own. In the middle ages there was no idea
of tolerance such as this. Men believed fiercely and
earnestly that any deviation from the creed to which
they themselves belonged meant an eternity of unhappi-
ness. Such being the case, the more earnestly religious
a man was, the more he desired to save those around
him from this fate. The inquisitors and those who sup
ported them cannot be charged with wanton cruelty.
They killed partly to save those who defied the power of
the church, and partly to prevent the spread of their
doctrines. Their belief was that it was better that one
man should die, even by the death of fire, than that
hundreds should stray from the pale of the church, and
so incur the loss of eternal happiness. In the Indies,
where the priests in many cases showed a devotion and
heroic qualities equal to anything which has ever been
displayed by missionaries in any part of the world, per
secution was yet hotter than it ever was in civilized
Europe. These men believed firmly that it was their

The Prison of the Inquisition 231

bounden duty at any cost to force the natives to become
Christians; and however we may think that they were
mistaken and wrong, however we may abhor the acts
of cruelty which they committed, it would be a mistake
indeed to suppose that these were perpetrated from mere
lightness of heart and wanton bloodthirstiness. The laws
of those days were in all countries brutally severe. In
England, in the reign of Henry VIII, the loss of an ear
was the punishment inflicted upon a man who begged.
The second time he offended his other ear was cut off.
A third repetition of the offence, and he was sold into
slavery; and if he ran away from his master he was
liable to be put to death by the first person who met
him. The theft of any article above the value of three
shillings was punishable by death, and a similar code of
punishment prevailed for all kinds of offences. Human
life was then held in such slight regard that we must
remember that, terrible as the doings of the Inquisition
were, they were not so utterly foreign to the age in which
they were perpetrated as would appear to us living in
these days of moderate punishment and general humanity.
By the boys, however, brought up in England, which
at that time was bitterly and even fiercely anti-Catholic —
a state of things which naturally followed the doings in
the reign of Queen Mary, and the threatening aspect
maintained by Spain towards this country — popery was
held in utter abhorrence, and the Inquisition was the bug
bear with which mothers frightened their children when
disobedient. The thought, therefore, of falling into the
hands of this dreaded tribunal was very terrible to the
boys. They debated between themselves whether it
would not be better for them to leave Arica secretly, to
make for the mountains, and to take up their lot for life

232 Under Drake's Fkg

among the natives of the plains, who had so hospitably
received them. They had, indeed, almost arrived at the
conclusion that this would be their best plan of procedure.

They lingered, however, in the hope, daily becoming
fainter, of the arrival of Drake's fleet, but it seemed that
by this time it must have failed in its object of doubling
the Horn. Nearly six months had elapsed since they had
been left on the eastern coast, and according to their
calculation of distance two months should have amply
sufficed to enable them to make the circuit of Southern
America. They could not tell that the fleet had been
delayed by extraordinary accidents. When off the Cape
they had met with storms which continued from the yth
of September to the 28th of October without intermission,
and which the old chronicler of the expedition describes
as being "more violent and of longer continuance than
anything since Noah's flood". They had to waste much
time, owing to the fact that Captain Winter with one of
the ships had, missing his consorts in the storm, sailed
back to England, that two other ships were lost, and that
Captain Drake with his flagship, which alone remained,
had spent much time in searching for his consorts in
every inlet and island.

Among those saved in the boat from the Spanish ship
was a young gentleman of rank and fortune, and owner
of large estates near Lima, who had come down upon
some business. He took a great affection for the young
Englishmen, and came each day to visit them, there being
no let or hindrance on the part of the governor. This
gentleman assured them that he possessed great influence
at Lima, and that although he doubted not that the
military authorities would treat them with all courtesy
after the manner in which they had risked their lives to

The Prison of the Inquisition 233

save subjects of his majesty, yet that, should it be other
wise, he would move heaven and earth in their favour.
"There is but one thing I dread," he said, and a cloud
came over his handsome face.

"You need hardly say what it is," Ned said gravely.
"You mean, of course, the Inquisition."

The Spaniard signified his assent by a silent movement
of the head.

' ' We dare not speak above our breath of that dreaded
tribunal," he said. "The very walls appear to have ears,
and it is better to face a tiger in his den than to say ought
against the Inquisition. There are many Spaniards who,
like myself, loathe and abhor it; but we are powerless.
Their agents are everywhere, and one knows not in
whom he dare confide. Even in our families there are
spies, and this tyranny which is carried on in the name
of religion, is past all supporting. But even should
the ' holy office ' lay its hands upon you, keep up heart.
Be assured that I will risk all that I am worth, and my
life to boot, to save you from it."

"Would you advise us to fly?" Ned said. "We can
without doubt escape from here, for we are but lightly
guarded, and the governor, I am sure, is friendly towards
us."

" Whither would you fly?" asked the young Spaniard.

"We would cross the mountains to the plains, and
join the Indians there."

" It would be a wretched life," the Spaniard said, "and
would cut you off from all kindred and friends. I can
give you no advice. To me, I confess, death would be
preferable, even in its worst forms. But to you, fond of
exercise, and able to cause yourselves to be respected and
feared by the wild Indians of the Pampas, it might be

234 Under Drake's Flag

different. However, you need not decide yet. I trust
that even should the worst befall you, I may be able at
the last moment to give you the opportunity of choosing
that life in preference to death in the dungeons of the
Inquisition."

It was about ten days from the date of the governor's
writing that a ship came in from Lima, and the same
evening the governor came in to them with a grave face.
He was attended by two officials dressed in the deepest
black.

"Senors," he said, "it is my duty, in the first place,
to inform you that the governor of Lima, acting upon
the report which I sent him of the bravery which you
manifested in the matter of the wreck here, has agreed
to withdraw all question against you touching your past
connection with the English freebooters, and to allow you
freedom, without let or hindrance, and to further your
passage to such place as opportunity may afford, and
where you may be able to meet with a ship from your
own country. That is all I have to say to you."

Then the men in black stepped forward and said, "We
arrest you in the name of the holy Inquisition on the charge
of heresy. "

The young men glanced at the governor, believing that
he was sufficiently their friend to give them a sign if resis
tance would be of any avail. He replied to the unspoken
question by an almost imperceptible shake of the head,
and it was well that the boys abandoned the idea, for the
door opened and a guard of six men, armed to the teeth,
although in plain dark clothes, entered. These were the
alguazils of the holy office, the birds of night whose appear
ance was dreaded even by the most bigoted Spaniards,
and at whose approach mothers clasped their children

The Prison of the Inquisition 235

closer to their breast, and men crossed themselves at the
thought that their passage boded death to some unhappy
victim. For it must be remembered that the Inquisition,
framed at first only for the discovery and punishment of
heresy, later became an instrument of private vengeance.
Men denounced wives of whom they wished to be rid,
wives husbands, no relations of kin were sufficient to ensure
safety. The evidence, sometimes true, was more often
manufactured by malice and hate, until at last even the
most earnest and sincere Catholics trembled when they
thought that at any moment they might be denounced and
flung into the dungeons of the Inquisition.

Brave as the lads were, they could not avoid a thrill of
horror at the presence of the familiars of this dreaded
body. They were, however, cheered by the thought of
the promises of the young Spaniard, in whose honesty
and honour they had great faith; and with a few words of
adieu to the governor, and thanks to him for what he had
done in their behalf, they followed the officers of the Inqui
sition along the streets of Arica, and suffered themselves
to be placed on board the boat which lay alongside the
mole.

Although it was late in the evening, their passage was
not unobserved. Many of the soldiers recognized in the
two men marching, surrounded by the black guard of the
Inquisition, their late comrades, and, confident in their num
bers, these did not hesitate to lift their voices in loud protest
against this seizure of men who had behaved so gallantly.
In the darkness, too, they feared not that their faces would
be recognized, and their curses and threats rose loud in
the air. People looking out from their doors to hear the
cause of the uproar were variously affected. Some joined
in the movement of the soldiers; but more shrank back

236 Under Drake's Flag

with dread into their houses rather than be compromised
with so dreaded a body. The threats, however, did not
proceed to open violence, and as the young men themselves
gave no sign of attempting an effort for freedom, their
comrades contented themselves with many shouts of good
wishes, mingled with curses upon their captors, and the
lads were embarked without the alguazils having to use
the swords which they had drawn in readiness for the
expected fray.

"You are witness, sefior officer," Ned said, "that we
came without resistance, and that, had we chosen, we
could with the assistance of the soldiers have easily broken
from the hold of your men. We are willing, however, to
proceed with you to Lima, where we doubt not that the
justice of our judges will result in our acquittal. No one
can blame us that we are of the religion of our fathers.
Had we been born Catholics and then relapsed into heresy,
it would have been reasonable for you to have considered
our case; but as we but hold the religion which we have
been taught, and know indeed of no other, we see not
how in any man's eyes blame can rest upon us."

"I take note," the officer said, "of the docility with
which you have remained in our hands, and will so far
testify in your favour. Touching the other matter, it is
beyond my jurisdiction."

The vessel in which the boys were embarked was a slow
one, and two days after leaving Arica they saw a small
sailing craft pass them at no great distance, sailing far
more rapidly than they themselves were going. The boys
gave no thought to this occurrence until they arrived at
the harbour of Lima. A large number of ships were here
anchored, and after the solitude of the sea which they had
endured during their voyage from England, this collection

The Prison of the Inquisition 237

of fine galleons greatly pleased the boys, who had never
seen so large a number of ships collected together, there
being nigh forty sail then in harbour.

As the officers of the Inquisition scarcely ever passed
through the streets in the daytime, owing to the known
hostility of the mass of the population, no attempt at a
landing was made until nightfall. The officer in charge
was, however, surprised, upon reaching the landing-place,
to find a large crowd assembled, who saluted his party
with hisses and groans, and loud cries of " Shame!"
Those behind pressed forward, and those in front were
forced into the ranks of the alguazils, and it seemed at
one time as if the prisoners would be separated from their
guards. A man in a rough peasant's dress was forced in
contact with Ned, and said hastily in a low voice to him,
" Keep up your heart; when preparations are made I will
act."

Ned recognized the voice of the young Spanish gentle
man whom he had left at Arica, and guessed immediately
that he had taken passage in the swift-sailing caravel, in
order to be able to reach Lima before the vessel containing
the prisoners.

Ned had in confidence, in his talks with him, informed
him that he still hoped, although his hopes had now fallen
almost to zero from the long tarrying of the fleet, that the
English admiral would arrive, and that he should be able
to go on board and so rejoin his countrymen. This expec
tation, indeed, it was which had prevented Ned and Tom
making their escape when they could have done so and
taking to the mountains, for it was certain that some time
at least would elapse before stringent measures would be
taken against them. Another effort would without doubt
be made to persuade them to abandon their religion, and

238 Under Drake's Flag

every day might bring with it the arrival of the English
vessels.

The young men were conducted to a dark and sombre
building which bore the appearance of a vast monastery.
The interior was even more dismal in its appearance than
the walls without. A solitary figure met them at the
doorway; their guards entered, and the gates were closed
behind. The officer in charge handed to the newcomer a
paper, and the latter, receiving it, said, " I accept the
charge of the prisoners, and your duties are at an end
concerning them."

Motioning them to follow, he led them through some
long dark corridors into a room much better furnished
and provided than they had expected. Here, placing a
lamp upon the table and pointing to two manchets of
bread and a vessel of water which stood on the table, and
to two truckle-beds in the corner of the room, he left them
without a word. Ned had already agreed with his com
panion that they would not, when once within the build
ing, say a word to each other which they would not have
heard by their jailers, for they were well aware that these
buildings were furnished with listening places, and that
every word which prisoners said would be overheard and
used against them. They comforted themselves, there
fore, with general observations as to their voyage, and to
the room in which they now were, and to the hopes which
they entertained that their judges would take a favourable
view of their conduct. Then with a sincere prayer to God
to spare them through the dangers and trials which they
might have to undergo, they lay down for the night, and,
such is the elasticity and strength of youth, they were, in
spite of the terrible position in which they were placed, in
a few minutes fast sleep.

The Prison of the Inquisition 239

The next day the door of the apartment opened and two
attendants, dressed in black from head to foot and bearing
white wands, entered, and motioned to them to follow
them. Through more long corridors and passages they
went until they stopped at some thick curtains overhang
ing a door. These were drawn aside, the door behind them
was opened, other curtains hanging on the inside were
separated, and they entered a large apartment lighted
artificially by lamps from above. At a table at the end of
the room were seated three men, also in black. They were
writing, and for some time did not look up from their
work. The attendants stood motionless by the side of the
lads, who, in spite of their courage, could not but shudder
at the grim silence of this secret tribunal. At last the
chief inquisitor laid down his pen, and lifting his eyes
towards them said, "Your names are Edward Hearne
and Thomas Tressilis. You are English sailors, who,
having crossed from the other side of the continent, made
your way to Arica, where you did, as I am told, a brave
action in saving the lives of some Spanish sailors."

Tom assented gravely to the address.

"You are accused," the inquisitor went on, "of being
steeped in the errors of heresy, and of refusing to listen to
the ministrations of the holy father who tried to instruct
you in the doctrines of the true church. What have you
to say to this?"

"It is true, sir," Ned said, "every word. We were
born Protestants, and were brought up in that church.
Had we been born in Spain we should no doubt have been
true members of your church. But it is hard that men
once engrained in a faith should change it for another. It
were like asking a tiger to become a leopard. We are
unlearned men, and in no way skilled in the exercises of

240 Under Drake's Flag

theology. We accepted what we were taught, and would
fain die in the same belief. Doubtless your priests could
give us arguments which we should be unable to refute,
whatever might be done by learned men of our church,
and we would pray you to suffer us to hold to the creed in
which we have been reared."

" It is impossible," the inquisitor said, "that we should
permit you to go on straightway in the way of damnation.
Your bodies are as nothing to the welfare of your souls,
and to save the one it were indeed for your good that the
other were tormented. We will not, however, press you
now to recant your errors. You shall be attended by a
minister of the true religion, who will point out to you the
error of your courses, and in three days we shall expect
an answer from you. If you embrace the faith of the Holy
Church you may, if you choose to remain here, rise to
posts of honour and wealth, for we have heard good things
of your courage and prudence. If, however, you remain
stubborn, we shall find means to compel you to do that
which we would fain that you should do of your freewill;
and if you still defy at once the kindness and the chastise
ment of the church, you will receive that doom which
awaits all who defy its authority."

The attendants now touched the lads on the arm in
token that the audience was over, and led them back to
the room in which they had first been confined. When
left alone the boys examined this closely, although seem
ing to be looking without motive at the walls. The win
dows were placed high up from the ground, far beyond
their reach, and were thickly barred. The door was of
massive oak, and the room, although in appearance but an
ordinary apartment, was truly a dungeon as safe and as diffi
cult to break out of as if far below the surface of the earth.

The Prison of the Inquisition 241

Later on, when an attendant came in with the bread and
water which formed the substance of each meal, as he
placed it on the table he said in a low muttered whisper,
" Hope always. Friends are working." This intimation
greatly raised the spirits of the prisoners, as they felt that
their friend the Spaniard had already succeeded in cor
rupting some at least of the familiars of the Inquisition,
and that no means would be spared to secure their escape
should the worst occur.

For three days they were visited for many hours daily
by a priest, who endeavoured to explain to Ned the points
of difference between the two religions, and to convince
him of the errors of that of England. Ned, however,
although but a poor theologist, gave answer to all his
arguments, that he could in no way reply to the reason
ings of the priest, but that he was, nevertheless, convinced
of their error, and sure that a divine of his church would
have found replies to difficulties to which he could see no
outlet. The priest strove earnestly with him, but at the
end of the third day he retired exasperated, saying angrily
that he now left them to other hands.

062> 10

CHAPTER XVI

The Rescue

THE next day they were again brought before the tribunal,
and the grand inquisitor, without this time entering into
any length of speech, informed them briefly that he gave
them another three days, and that if, at the end of the
third day, their obstinacy did not yield, he would use the
means at his disposal, and he pointed to various instru
ments hanging on the walls or ranged on the table. Of
these, although the lads were ignorant of their uses, they
entertained no doubt whatever, that they were the instru
ments of torture of which they had heard, — thumbscrews,
iron gags, the boot, the rack, and other devilish inven
tions. They made no reply to the address, and were
taken away this time down several winding stairs to a
black and noxious dungeon far below the general level
of the earth. No ray of light entered this cell. The walls
were damp with moisture. In the corner the boys dis
covered by the sense of feeling a small pile of rotten straw,
which had, without doubt, formed the bed of some other
unfortunate who had before tenanted the prison. Here,
at least, they had no fear of being overheard; but as the
ingenuity of the inquisitors was well known they agreed
to say no word of the hopes they still cherished, but to
talk of other matters purely personal to themselves. Here,

242

The Rescue 243

as hour after hour passed, they strengthened each other
in their resolutions by an agreement that no torture should
wring from them a recantation of their faith, and by many
prayers for strength and support from above.

Once a day the door opened and an attendant brought
in bread and water, which he placed in silence on the
ground. The second day, as he did so, he placed a
bundle by the side of the bread, and, whispering, "Be
prudent: use these only as the last resource: friends are
preparing to help you," retired as noiselessly as usual.
When left in darkness again the lads seized upon the
parcel. It was large and heavy, and, to their great de
light, they found that it contained two daggers and two
brace of heavy pistols.

" I wonder," Ned said in a whisper to Tom, "that our
friend does not contrive to get us passed through the
prison. But I suppose that he finds that only one or
two, perhaps, of the attendants are corruptible, and that
our jailer, although he might free us from this cell, could
not pass us through the corridors and out of the build-
ing."

" Let us see," Tom said, " if we can make our way into
any cell which may adjoin this. If it is empty we might
perchance make our escape."

All night the boys laboured with their daggers, having
first tapped the wall all round to hear if any difference
of sound gave an intimation that a hollow space was
behind. They could not perceive this, but fancying that
upon the one side there was some very slight difference,
they attempted to remove the stones there. All through
the night and next day they continued their labour, and
succeeded with great difficulty in removing two of the
stones of the wall. Behind these, however, was a mass

244 Under Drake's Flag

of rubble, formed of cement so hard that the daggers
failed to make any impression whatever upon it, and after
labouring" through the whole day they were forced to
abandon the design and replace the stones as they had
before been, filling up the interstices with the mortar which
they had dug out, so that no trace of the task upon which
they were employed should remain.

That night when the door opened, two figures, as be
fore, presented themselves, and they knew that their
summons before the dreaded court was at hand. With
their daggers and pistols concealed within their vests
they followed their guides ; each with a grasp of his hand
assuring the other of his steadfastness and faith. They
had resolved that, sooner than submit to torture, which
would cripple them for life, they would fight to the last
and die resisting.

This time they found in the audience hall, in addition
to the three judges, four men clothed also in black, but
evidently of an inferior order. These were standing
ranged along by the wall, in readiness to obey the orders
of the judges. Their attendants fell back to the door, and
the prisoners remained standing alone in the centre of the
room.

" Acting in all kindness," the judge said, "we have
given you ample time to retract and to consider your
position, and we now call upon you to consent formally
to abandon your accursed heresies, and to embrace the
offer which the Holy Church kindly makes to you, or to
endure the pains which it will be necessary that we should
inflict, in order to soften your hardness of heart."

"We are perfectly resolved," Ned said, "to maintain
the religion of our fathers. As Englishmen we protest
against this outrage. When your countrymen fall into

The Rescue 245

our hands no man dreams of endeavouring" to compel
them to abandon their faith. They are treated as honour
able prisoners; and if any outrage be attempted upon our
bodies, sooner or later, be assured, the news of it will
come to the ears of our English captains; and for every
drop of blood of ours shed, a Spanish life will answer."

"You are insolent," the inquisitor said coldly. "It is
rash to threaten men in whose power you are. These
walls reveal no secrets, and though the town were full
of your English pirates, yet would your doom be accom
plished without a possibility of rescue, and without your
fate ever becoming known beyond these four walls. Be
think you," he said, "before you compel me to use the
means at my disposal ; for men have spoken as bravely
and as obstinately as you, but they have changed their
minds when they felt their bones cracking under the
torture. We would fain abstain from injuring figures
as manly as yours; but, if needs be, we will so reduce
them to wrecks that you will envy the veriest cripple who
crawls for alms on the steps of the cathedral here."

The boys remained silent, and the inquisitor, with an
air of angry impatience, motioned to the men ranged
along by the wall to seize their prisoners.

The lads saw that the time for action was come. Each
produced his pistol from his breast, the one levelling his
at the head of the grand inquisitor, while the other faced
the foremost of those advancing towards them.

"One step nearer," Ned said, "and the two of you
are dead men."

A silence as of death fell in the chamber. The judges
were too astonished even to rise from their seats, and the
familiars paused in their advance.

"You see," Ned said to the grand inquisitor, "that

246 Under Drake's Flag

you are not masters of the situation. One touch upon
my trigger and the death with which you threaten me is
yours. Now, write, as I order you, a pass by which we
may be allowed to quit these accursed walls without
molestation."

Without hesitation the judge wrote on a piece of paper
the required order.

"Now," Ned said, "you must come with us, for I put
no faith whatever in your promises, for I know the ways
of your kind, that promises made to heretics are not
considered sacred. You are yourself my best safe
guard, for be assured that the slightest interruption to
us upon our way, and I draw my trigger and send you
to that eternity to which you have dispatched so many
victims."

The judge rose to his feet, and Ned could see that, quiet
as he appeared, he was trembling with passion. Tom had
at the first alarm retreated to the door so as to prevent the
escape of the attendants stationed there, or of any of the
others, to give the alarm. He now opened it, and Ned
was about to pass out with the inquisitor when, glancing
round, he saw that one of the other judges had dis
appeared, doubtless by some door placed behind the arras
at the end of the room.

"Treachery is intended," he muttered to the inquisitor;
" but remember that you will be the first victim."

Slowly Ned passed along the corridors, the inquisitor
between the two Englishmen, the attendants following
in a group behind, uncertain what course to pursue, and
without orders from their superior, when at last they
came to a door. This was locked, and Ned ordered the
inquisitor to have it opened.

" I have not the keys," he said; "they are in the hands

The Rescue 247

of the attendant whose duty it is to attend to this portion
of the building."

"Call them," Ned said impatiently.

The inquisitor struck on the closed door with his hands
and called aloud, but no answer was returned.

" Bid these men behind you force it in," Ned said.

The men advanced, but as they did so a small side door
in the passage, behind Ned, opened noiselessly, and sud
denly a thick blanket was thrown over his head, while an
arm struck up the hand which had the pistol. He drew the
trigger, however, and the grand inquisitor with a groan
sank to the ground. At the same instant a number of
men rushed through the door and threw themselves upon
the lads, and were joined by the attendants standing be
hind. A desperate struggle ensued. Tom shot the two
first men who sprang upon him, and for some minutes
the lads maintained a desperate struggle. Again and
again the crowd of their assailants pulled <pne or other
of them to the ground; but it was not until their strength
was utterly exhausted by their struggles that both were
secured and bound hand and foot. Then at the order
of one of the other judges, who, now that all danger
was over, appeared upon the scene, they were lifted
bodily, carried back to their dungeon, and cast upon
the ground.

Panting and breathless, the lads lay for some time too
exhausted to speak.

" I am afraid that I missed that rascally chief inquisitor,"
Ned said; "did you notice, Tom?"

" I scarcely saw, for at the same moment I was struck
from behind; but I fancy that he fell when your pistol
exploded."

"In that case," Ned said, "we may have a respite for

248 Under Drake's Flag

a day or two. He will feel inclined to be present at the
ceremony of torturing, himself. On one thing I am de
termined. We will not be taken by the men in black
and submit to having our limbs wrenched without an
effort. I should think that if we snatch up some of the
iron instruments lying about, we can manage to make
such a resistance that they will have to kill us before we
are overcome. If I could kill myself I certainly would
do so, I do not think I am a coward, Tom, but I confess
that the sight of those horrible instruments makes my
blood run cold."

"I feel with you, Ned; death itself were nothing; but
to be torn limb from limb is something horrible."

The day passed without any visit being paid to them.
No food was brought in, and they were left as if forgotten
by their jailers. Thus they were unable to tell the hour,
and as it was perfectly dark it was by guesswork that they
at last lay down to sleep on the damp stones.

Presently they were awoke by the tramp of numerous
footsteps. Then there was a tremendous battering at the
door.

"What on earth are they doing?" Ned exclaimed.
"Have they lost the key, and are they going to break
open the door and finish with us now? Get ready; we
will make a fight at once, and try and end it."

Presently the door gave way before the heavy blows
which were struck upon it, and to the astonishment of
the lads a band of Indians, naked to the waist and holding
torches, burst into the cell.

"Here they are!" exclaimed one of them in Spanish.
"Quick! there is not a moment to be lost. Follow
us;" and, stooping down, he cut the cords which bound
them.

The Rescue 249

Bewildered and confused with the sudden light, and by
the unexpected irruption, the boys followed the speaker,
and, closely surrounded by the Indians, made their way
down the passages and out into the courtyard. There
was no resistance or interference. The familiars had,
apparently, fled at the sudden attack upon the jail, and
no one appeared to bar their exit. The great gates of
the courtyard stood uninjured, but the postern door had
been battered in. Another body of natives, armed with
spears and bows and arrows, were standing round the
entrance; and a good many of the people of the neigh
bourhood, roused by the sudden tumult, were standing
at the doors. These looked on apparently with mere
curiosity, and with no desire to interfere with what was
going on. Indeed, the Inquisition was never popular with
the great body of the Spaniards, over whom its secret
proceedings and terrible cruelties hung like a dark cloud,
as none could ever say that they might not be the objects
of denunciation.

It was clear that the Indians were acting upon a fixed
plan, for the moment that those from within the prison
sallied out, all formed in a compact body, and at a brisk
slinging trot started down the street, the lads being kept
well in the centre, so as to conceal them from the gaze
of the public. Not a word was spoken till they had issued
from the town. For another quarter of a mile their hur
ried march continued, and then, without a word, the whole
of the escort, with the exception of one man, turned up
a crossroad and vanished into the darkness.

"Heaven be praised that I have saved you, senors!"
said the Indian who remained. "Do you not recognize
me? I am Don Estevan, whose life you saved at Arica.
I feared that I might be too late to find you unharmed;

250 Under Drake's Flag

but it required time to get the necessary force together.
You recognized me, of course, on the pier when you
landed. The instant I heard of your arrest I chartered
a swift -sailing country craft, and arrived here the day
before you. I was the bearer of a letter, signed by many
of the soldiers in garrison at Arica, to their comrades
here, saying how bravely you had behaved, and that you
had become good comrades in the regiment, and urging
them to do anything in their power to save you from
the Inquisition. This I thought might be useful, as they
would be sure to be called out in case of an attack upon
the Inquisition, and I prayed them to be as slow as possible
in their movements, in case of any sudden alarm. This
will account for the fact that none of them arrived upon
the spot before we had finished our business just now.
But there is not a moment to delay. I have horses two
miles away in readiness, and we must make for there.
They will be sure to put on bloodhounds in pursuit, and
we may have to ride for it."

The boys briefly expressed their intense gratitude to
their preserver for his efforts in their behalf, Ned adding,
" I fear, Don Estevan, that your generous deed of to-night
will involve you in fearful danger."

" I have taken every precaution," the young Spaniard
said. " I did not charter the vessel in my own name, and
came up in disguise. All my friends believe me to be still
at Arica, and no one, so far as I know, has recognized me
here. I was obliged to go to my estate, which lies a hun
dred miles up the country. There I armed my peons and
vaqueros, and a number of Indians who were living near,
to whom I have always shown kindness. None of them
knew that it was the dungeon of the Inquisition which
they were to attack, but believed that it was merely a

The Rescue 251

prison they were about to force; for the power of super
stition is very great in this country, and although a great
many of the men may lead wild and godless lives, they
tremble at the thought of lifting their hands against that
mysterious and awful body, the Inquisition. News travels
slowly indeed in this country, and it is not likely that the
fact that the prison of the Inquisition has been broken
open will ever reach the men on my estate. The priest
of the village is a worthy man, and he has, I know, no
sympathy with bigotry and cruelty. Consequently, if any
of them should in their confession tell him that they have
been engaged in breaking a prison, he will perchance guess
what prison it was, and may imagine that I had a hand
in it. But I feel sure that the knowledge so gained would
go no further. I might, had I chosen, have had the horses
brought to the point where we separated from my men.
But in that case the hounds might have followed upon
the main body, and so some clue would have been gained
as to the direction from which they came. As it is, they
will follow us up at any rate until we take horses. We
will make our track visible for some distance, so that the
pursuit may be carried on. Before it is over they will
have lost all track of the rest of their assailants, and will
not indeed be able to trace the direction in which they
went. They, too, have horses at a short distance, and
will speedily regain the estate."

"How did you know in which cell we were con
fined?"

1 * Through the jailer. The man who attended you was
once employed by my father. I met him the day I arrived
from Arica, and bribed him to convey the arms to you,
with which I thought that, should they bring you to trial
and torture before I could collect my force, you might

252 Under Drake's Flag

make a resistance, for I judged that you would rather
die than suffer mutilation and agony. When you dis
closed your arms to-day he slipped at once from the
building, as he knew that he would be suspected. Chang
ing his clothes in a house near, he mounted his horse and
rode to meet us, conveying the news that the crisis had
arrived. How it ended he could not tell; but he hoped
that some delay might occur in resuming proceedings
against you."

By this time they had reached their horses, which
were tied in a clump of trees at a short distance from
the road.

"They are fine animals," Don Estevan said, "and we
may reckon upon showing our heels to any of those who
pursue us; for I can assure you that the chase is likely
to be a hot one."

"Whither do you intend to go?"

" I am thinking of making for Arica. Before we reach
that town you can, if you choose, strike to the hills and
join the natives beyond, as you proposed when at Arica;
or, should you prefer it, you can, in disguises, enter Arica
and remain there for a time until all possibility of your
friends appearing before that place be at an end. My
absence will not have been noticed, for I mentioned to
friends there that I was going into the interior to investi
gate a mine, of whose existence I had heard from some
Indians. When I return, therefore, I shall say that the
mine was not sufficiently promising in appearance for me
to care about asking for a concession from the govern
ment. I shall, of course, pretend to be extremely vexed
at the time that has been wasted, and I do not see that
any suspicion can fall upon me as having been concerned
in the affair at Lima. We will walk our horses at a slow

The Rescue 253

pace, in order to save them as far as possible, and to
ascertain whether our pursuers have correctly followed
our steps. When we once hear them we can then put
on our best speed; and as they will not know that we
are but a short distance ahead, they will go at a moderate
pace. Besides, the speed of bloodhounds when tracking
is by no means great."

An hour later they heard a faint sound in the distance.
Instinctively they checked their horses, and again in the
darkness of the night the deep distant bay of a hound
was heard.

"Just as I thought!" Don Estevan exclaimed. "They
have got the bloodhounds, and I should think, by the
sound, that they must have just reached the spot where
we mounted. The hounds will be puzzled now; but the
sagacity of these creatures is so great that I am by no
means sure that they will be unable to follow us by the
track of the horses. Now let us set spur."

For the next four or five hours they proceeded at a
steady gallop towards the south. The country was flat,
the road sandy, but even, and the cool night air was
exhilarating indeed after the confinement in the dark and
noisome dungeon at Lima. So rejoiced were the boys
with their newly-recovered freedom that it was with diffi
culty they restrained themselves from bursting into shouts
of joy. But they were anxious that no sounds should be
heard by the villagers of the little hamlets lying along
the road. The sound of the horses' hoofs on the sandy
track would scarcely arouse a sleeping man ; and the fact
that their tracks would be plainly visible in the sand when
daylight came caused them no concern, as, so far, they
had made no effort to deceive their pursuers.

Soon after daylight arrived they found themselves upon

254 Under Drake's Flag

a stream which ran down from the mountains and crossed
the road.

"Now," Don Estevan said, "it is time to begin to
throw them off our track. They will believe that the
party consist solely of Indians, and our turning east will
seem as if we intended to take refuge in the mountains.
Let us then strike up the river for a while, land at a spot
where the horses' hoofs will be clearly visible, and then
pursue a course to the south-east, taking us nearer and
nearer to the hills. Three leagues hence is another
stream. This we will enter, and they will make sure
that we have pursued our former tactics — that we have
followed it up and again struck for the hills. Instead
of doing this we will follow it down for a mile or two,
and quit it at some spot where the bank is firm, and will
leave no marks of our footsteps. Then we will strike
across the country and regain the road some seven or
eight leagues further south."

The plan appeared a capital one, and was followed out
as arranged. Late in the evening they were again in the
vicinity of the southern road. In their wallets was a
plentiful supply of provisions, and they had filled their
water bottles at the last stream which they had crossed.
Entering a grove of trees, they unsaddled their horses and
allowed them to crop the foliage and shrubs, while they
threw themselves down upon the soft earth, stiff and
wearied with their long journey.

"We will travel by night always," Don Estevan said.
" I do not think that any suspicion whatever will arise
that we have again struck south ; but should any enquiry
be made, it is as well that no one along the road shall
have seen three mounted men."

For another two days they journeyed as proposed by

The Rescue 255

night, resting1 by day in quiet places, and, so far as they
knew, without having been seen by any of the scattered
population. It was in the middle of the third night, as
they were cantering slowly along, that they heard the
tread of a horse at full gallop approaching from the
south.

"You had better withdraw from the road," Don
Estevan said, "so that but one horseman will be met.
I will stop the rider and hear why he gallops so fast.
It may be that news has preceded us, and it is as well
to gather what intelligence we can."

The boys withdrew from the road, Don Estevan pro
ceeding ahead. They heard the sound of the galloping
hoofs pause as their rider met the Spaniard. There was
a talk for a few minutes, and then the horseman again
rode forward at full speed. Don Estevan paused for a
little while to allow him to get beyond earshot, and then
rejoined his companions.

"I have great news," he said, "and it is for you to
decide whether it will alter your plan of proceeding. The
man whom I have just met is a messenger dispatched
by the governor of Arica to Lima to warn the governor
there that an English ship, under the noted freebooter
Francis Drake, has put into that harbour, and has started
again, sailing for the north, after exacting certain con-
tributions, but otherwise refraining from injuring the
town."

The boys gave a shout of joy, for they had begun
to fear that the expedition must have met with some
disaster in doubling Cape Horn, and been compelled to
return.

"What will you do?" the Spaniard asked.

•'Return to Lima!" the boys exclaimed simultaneously.

256 Under Drake's Flag

" We shall be there before the admiral can arrive, and can
then rejoin our comrades."

"That will indeed be your best plan/' Don Estevan
said; "but you must be disguised thoroughly. However,
you are not likely to be so close investigated as you other-
wise would be at Lima; for you may be sure that when
the messenger arrives there the town will be in such a
ferment of excitement at the approach of your country
men that our little affair will for the time be entirely
forgotten. "

"I trust," Ned said, "that we shall be able to do
something to render your security more perfect; for, if I
mistake not, when the admiral hears of the doings of the
officials of the Inquisition, how many people they have
burned to death lately at Lima, and what frightful cruel
ties they have perpetrated in that ghastly prison, he will
burn the place to the ground and hang up the judges,
in which case we may be sure that no further enquiry
will ever be thought of concerning the attack on the
prison. What do you advise us to do, senor, for it is
clear that your best course is to return to Arica direct?"

" I cannot think of doing that," the generous young
Spaniard replied. "A few days' longer absence will pass
unnoticed, especially as people will have plenty of other
matters to think and talk about. I do not see how you
can possibly obtain disguises without my assistance, and
as our pursuers will long since have been thrown off our
track and will probably have given up the search and
have returned to Lima, convinced that we already have
crossed the mountains and are beyond their reach, I think
that there is little danger in my nearing the city. Come,
let us turn our horses' heads at once."

In a few minutes they were returning by the route they

The Rescue 257

had hitherto travelled. They were already dressed as
young Spaniards. The disguises had been brought by
their rescuer, and assumed at the first halt. He himself
had also washed the paint from his face and hands, and
had assumed European garb, in order that any enquiry
about three mounted Indians might be baffled.

"There is now," he said, " no longer any occasion for
us to ride by night. We are journeying north, and any
enquiries which may ever be set on foot will certainly
point only to men going south, and whereas our Indian
disguises might have been suspected, I am now in my
proper character and my passing through can excite no
rumour or comment."

Don Estevan had, indeed, assumed the garb of a
Spanish proprietor of rank, while the boys were dressed
as vaqueros; and as they passed through villages in the
daytime kept their horses half a length behind that of
their leader. They avoided on their ride back putting
up at any of the posadas or village inns on their road,
sleeping as before in the woods. Their marches were
long, but were performed at a much slower rate of speed,
us they were certain that they would reach Lima long
before the admiral's ship, even should he not pause at
any place on the way.

It was upon the sixth day after their rescue from prison
that they again approached Lima. After much consulta
tion they had agreed to continue in their Spanish dresses,
taking only the precaution of somewhat staining their
faces and hands to give them the colour natural to men
who spend their lives on the plains. Don Estevan him
self determined to enter the city with them after nightfall,
and to take them to the house of a trusty friend, where
they should lie concealed until the news arrived that the

(162) 17

258 Under Drake's Flag

English ship was off the port. He himself would at once
mount his horse and retrace his steps to Arica.

The programme was carried out successfully. No one
glanced at the hidalgo as with his vaqueros he rode
through the streets of Lima. There were no lights in
those days save those which hung before shrines by the
roadside, or occasionally a dim oil lamp suspended before
the portico of some mansion of importance.

The friend to whom Don Estevan assigned them was a
young man of his own age, a cousin, and one, like him
self, liberal in his opinions, free from bigotry, and hating
the cruelties perpetrated in the name of religion by the
Inquisition. He heard with surprise the narrative which
Don Estevan related, for the latter had not visited him
during his short stay in the city, and was supposed still
to be at Arica. Great was his astonishment indeed when
he found that the attack upon the prison of the Inquisition,
which had caused such intense excitement in the city, had
been planned and executed by his cousin; and his expres
sions of approval of the deed were warm and frequent.
He assured the boys that he would do everything in his
power to make them comfortable until the arrival of the
English ship. A discussion took place as to whether it
was better that they should appear as friends of his who
had come in from their country estate, or whether they
should continue their disguise as vaqueros. There were
objections to either plan. In the first place, the attendants
in waiting would detect the shortcomings in Ned's Spanish,
and would be astonished at the silence of his companion.
Upon the other hand, it would seem strange that they
should be kept apart from the servitors of the house.
Finally, it was agreed that they should appear as men of
rank, but that Tom should feign sickness and therefore

The Rescue 259

keep his room; Ned for the most part remaining shut up
with him and taking- his meals there. This course was
followed out, and when the arrangement was complete
they took a hearty leave of the noble young Spaniard,
who at once remounted his horse and started on his weary
ride back again to Arica.

CHAPTER XVII

The "Golden Hind'*

THE lads were all anxiety to know what course had been
determined upon with reference to the arrival of the Eng
lish vessel. They were told that a large fleet was
assembled in the harbour, but that great dissension existed
among the authorities as to whether resistance should be
offered or not.

"Surely," Ned said, "they will never allow one vessel
to enter a harbour thronged with shipping, and with a
strong garrison on shore ready to take part in the defence?"

Their host flushed a little, and said, " You English must
form but a poor opinion of Spanish courage. On shore,
however, we have proved on the battlefields of the Con
tinent that we can hold our own against all comers. But
I own to you that your sea-dogs have caused such a panic
among our sailors of the western isles that they are looked
upon as invincible, and our men appear to be paralysed at
the very name of the English buccaneers."

"Why we are particularly anxious to know," Ned said,
" is, that if resistance is to be offered, it is clear that we
must be ready to embark in a canoe and to join the ship
before she arrives off the harbour, as otherwise, if she is
beaten off we may have no opportunity whatever of regain
ing her."

" I think," the Spaniard said, " that when the time

The "Golden Hind" 261

comes it is probable that no resistance may be offered,
and that the valour of those who, so long" as the ship is at
a distance, are anxious to fight, will evaporate very rapidly.
The citizens, too, are for the most part opposed to resis
tance, for they argue that if the English conquer they are
likely to lay the town in ruins; whereas if unopposed they
may content themselves with certain exactions upon the
richer citizens, as has been their custom in the west."

During the days that elapsed, many arguments took
place between the Spaniard and Ned as to the lawfulness
of the war which the English buccaneers carried on with
the colonies of a nation at peace with their own, the
Spaniard saying that they approached very nearly to the
verge of piracy. Ned had never given the subject much
consideration before. He had done as others did, and had
regarded the Spaniards as lawful prey, their cruelty towards
the natives forming, in the eyes of the English sailors, a
justification for any treatment which they might inflict
upon them. He was, however, forced to confess, that
now the other side was presented to him, the conduct of
his countrymen was really indefensible, and he blushed as
he thought of the various acts of sacrilege in churches and
other deeds of plunder in which he had taken part. He
assured his friend that in the future neither he nor his
companion would ever share in such deeds again.

It was upon the evening of the i$th of February, two
days after their return to Lima, that their host entered
with the news that a ship was seen in the distance ap
proaching the port, and that it was the general opinion of
the mariners that she was the dreaded English pirate.
He had already made arrangements that a small boat
should be lying at one end of the mole. He told them
that he could not venture to engage rowers, as the fact of

262 Under Drake's Flag

the escape of two white men from the town might be
noticed and enquiries made. The boys assured him, how
ever, that they were perfectly able to row themselves, and
that the smaller the number in the boat, the less chances
there would be of their being received by a random shot
from their friends.

It was just nightfall when the English ship entered the
harbour, where thirty Spanish vessels were lying all pre
pared for defence. The Golden Hind entered the port and
dropped her anchor in the midst, and the quiet resolution
and confidence which this act betrayed struck such a panic
into the minds of the Spanish captains, that not one dared
be the first to fire a gun at the intruder. Half an hour
after the Golden Hind came to anchor a boat was seen
approaching and was met by the hail, " Who goes there?"

The joyful shout of " Friends, your comrades, Ned
Hearne and Tom Tressilis," was received by a cry of incre
dulity and astonishment by those on board the English
vessel. Two minutes later the lads were on deck receiving
the hearty embraces and congratulations of all the mess
mates, Reuben Gale and Gerald Summers being almost
beside themselves with joy at the return to them of the
comrades they believed to be so long ago dead. The
admiral himself was greatly moved at seeing them; for
their gallantry during the preceding voyage, and their
eager zeal to do all in their power for the expedition, had
greatly raised them in his affections.

They were soon seated in the cabin, which was thronged
by as many of the officers and gentlemen adventurers as
could find room there. A brief narrative was given of
their adventures since leaving the fleet upon the other side
of the continent, and loud were the expressions of surprise
and approval at the manner in which they had gone

The "Golden Hind" 263

through the various dangers and difficulties which they
had encountered, Tom insisting generously that the
credit was entirely due to the sagacity and coolness of
his friend. When the story of the scene in the dun
geons of the Inquisition was told, and Captain Drake
was informed that large numbers of persons had been
burned alive in Lima by the Inquisition, he was filled with
fury, and at once dispatched two boatloads of men, armed
to the teeth, to the shore, with orders to burn down
the prison, to release any prisoners found there and to
offer them a safe passage to Europe, and also to hang
all officials who might be found within the walls. Ned
acted as guide. The streets of Lima were deserted as
the news of the landing of a party from the English ship
spread through the town ; shops were closed and windows
barred, and it was as through a city of the dead that the
band passed rapidly along until they reached the prison of
the Inquisition. Here the doors were broken down, and
the English sailors entered the ghastly prison. The cells
were found to be tenanted only by natives, most of them
men who had been captured in the hills and who had
refused to accept the Catholic religion. These were all
loosed and allowed to depart in freedom for the mountains,
taking with them a store of such provisions for the way as
could be found within the walls. The sight of the torture
room roused the fury of the sailors to the utmost pitch,
and breaking into the part wherein dwelt the principal
inquisitors, these were seized and hung from their win
dows. The contents of the various rooms were then heaped
together, a light applied, and in a few minutes a glow of
flame told the people of Lima that the dreaded prison of
the Inquisition was no more.

The party then returned through the streets to the ship,

264 Under Drake's Flag

and took part in the further operations commanded by the
admiral. Proceeding from vessel to vessel, they took out
all goods which they fancied, and which were either valu
able, or might be useful to them in their further voyaging.
They hewed down the masts of all the largest ships, and
cutting their cables allowed them to drift on shore. No
more astonishing scene was ever witnessed than that of
thirty ships, backed by a garrison and considerable popu
lation on shore, allowing themselves to be thus despoiled
and wrecked by the crew of one, and this a vessel inferior
in size and in the numerical strength of her crew to many
of those within the harbour.

The next day a party landed and stripped many of the
churches of their valuables, and also levied a contribution
upon the principal inhabitants. Ned and Tom, not think
ing it worth while at this time to enter into a controversy
with the comrades to whom they had been so recently
restored as to the legality of their acts, simply declined to
make part of the party who landed, alleging that they had
had enough of the shore of the South American continent
for the rest of their lives.

The 1 5th of February, the date upon which the Golden
Hind arrived at the port of Lima, was indeed one to be
remembered throughout the lives of the rescued seamen.
Their future had appeared wellnigh hopeless. On the one
side the dungeon of the Inquisition and probably a death
by fire. On the other, a life passed in the midst of savages,
away from all possibility of ever rejoining their friends or
returning to their country. Now they were once again
among those delighted to see them, and proudly trod
the decks of the Golden Hind as gentlemen adventurers,
having a good share in the booty as well as in the honour
which would accrue to all on board. So far, indeed, the

The "Golden Hind" 265

plunder had been but small. Upon their way down to the
Cape they had gleaned nothing, and since rounding it
they had only touched at Valparaiso, where they had taken
all that they required in the way of wines, stores, and
provisions of all kinds, besides much gold and, it is sad
to say, the rich plunder of the churches, including golden
crosses, silver chalices, and altar cloths.

Nowadays it gives one a positive shock to hear of Eng
lish sailors rifling churches; but in those rough times acts
of sacrilege of this kind awakened but little reprobation.

The following day they hove the anchor and sailed north-
wards. In the port they had obtained news that, on the
evening before they arrived, a ship laden with much trea
sure from Panama had appeared, but receiving news of
the approach of the English, had again set sail. All deter
mined that, if possible, the treasures on board the Caca-
fuego should pass into the hold of the Golden Hind.
Spreading all sail, they pressed northward. On the 2oth
of February they touched at the port of Paita, but did not
find her there. On the 24th they passed the port of Guaya
quil, and on the 28th crossed the line. On the ist of
March a sail was descried ahead, and, sailing towards her,
they found that she was indeed the vessel of which they
were in search, and of which they had heard not only at
Lima, but from a ship which they took at Paita, laden
with wine; and from another, on board of which they
found eighty pounds weight in gold, in Guayaquil. The
Cacafuego had no thought that the solitary ship which
was seen approaching was that of Captain Drake; but
taking her for a Spaniard, made no effort to fly. When,
upon her coming close and hailing her to surrender, they
discovered their mistake, the captain made a bold fight.
Hastily loading his carronades, he poured a volley into

266 Under Drake's Flag

the Golden Hind, and did not surrender his ship until one
of his masts had fallen by the board and he himself was
wounded. Then, finding further resistance useless, he
hauled down his flag.

The booty taken was even greater than had been ex
pected. Of gold and silver alone there was on board her
to the value of .£750,000, equal to a vastly larger sum
in these days; besides immense quantities of precious
stones, silver vessels, and other valuables. For six days
they lay alongside the Cacafuego, transferring her cargo
to the Golden Hind\ and at parting Captain Drake was
considerate enough to give the captain a letter to Captain
Winter, or any of the other captains of the fleet, should
they come north and meet her, begging that she should
be allowed to pass without interruption; or that should
they have need of any of the few articles left on board
her, they would pay double the value. He also, in ex
change for the valuables transferred, was good enough
to bestow upon the master a little linen and some other
commodities.

As it was now certain that the whole coast would be
thoroughly alarmed, and the Governor-general at Panama
would be prepared with a powerful fleet to resist the
Golden Hind should she stir in that direction, Captain
Francis determined to sail boldly out to sea and then to
shape his course so as to strike the coast again far north
of the Spanish possessions. His object in thus under
taking a voyage which would seem likely to yield but
little profit was, that he hoped he might find a passage
round the north of America, and so not only shorten his
own return journey home, but open a most valuable
country for trade for his own countrymen.

On the 7th of March, before putting out to sea, he

The "Golden Hind" 267

touched at tne Island of Cano, off the coast of Nicaragua.
Here they had an alarm which startled even the boldest.
As they lay at anchor they felt the shock of a terrible
earthquake, which almost brought down tne masts of the
ship, and for a moment all thought that she had been
struck by some hostile machine, or had fallen down on
a rock. The pumps were manned, and it was happily
found that she made no water. Here they made their
last prize on the American coast — a ship which had come
across from China. She was laden with linen, China
silk, and China dishes. Among the spoil is enumerated
a falcon made of gold, with a great emerald set in his
breast. It was not until the i5th of April that they again
touched the land, and landed at Guatulco, whence, after
a stay of a few hours, they departed; "not forgetting",
the chronicler says, "to take with them a certain pot
of about a bushel in bigness, full of royals of plate,
together with a chain of gold, and some other jewels
which we entreated a gentleman Spaniard to leave behind
him as he was flying out of town". They then steered
out to sea, and did not see the land again until, after
sailing 1400 leagues, they came, on June 3, in sight of
land in 42° north latitude.

Before going further, the adventures of the fleet must
be briefly related from the day, being the 2ist of June,
when the attack was made upon them by the Patagonians
and the boys were driven into the wood. Captain Francis
and those of the crew on shore with him soon beat off
the natives, inflicting some loss upon them. These took
to the woods, in which they could not be followed, and
Captain Francis, mourning for the loss of his three adven
turers, and of the gunner killed by his side, and despairing
of ever recovering the bodies of those who were, as he

268 Under Drake's Flag

believed, cut off and murdered, embarked on board ship
and sailed down the coast. A few days later he put in
to another bay, and there remained some time.

Here a strange scene was enacted, which has cast a
shadow over the reputation of the great sea captain.
Calling his officers together, he accused one of them,
Captain Doughty, of treachery. He alleged that the
plots against him were commenced before leaving Ply
mouth, and yet, as he had promoted Captain Doughty
to the command of one of the ships when upon the
voyage, it is difficult to understand how he can at that
time have believed that he was unfaithful. Nor, again,
does it appear in what way his treachery could have
injured the admiral, for as all the officers and crew were
devoted to him, Captain Doughty might have tried in
vain to lead them aside from his authority. He professed
indeed the highest regard for the man he accused, and
spoke to the captains of the great goodwill and inward
affection, even more than brotherly, which he held towards
him. And yet he averred that it was absolutely necessary
that Captain Doughty should be put upon his trial.

Captain Doughty, it is said, stricken with remorse at
his conduct, acknowledged himself to have deserved
death, for that he had conspired not only for the over
throw of the expedition, but for the death of the admiral,
who was not a stranger, but a dear and true friend to
him, and he besought the assembly to take justice into
their hands in order to save him from committing suicide.

The forty officers and gentlemen who formed the
court, after examining the proofs, judged that "he had
deserved death, and that it stood by no means with their
safety to let him live, and therefore they remitted the
matter thereof, with the rest of the circumstances, to the

The "Golden Hind" 269

general". Then Captain Drake offered to the prisoner,
either that he should be executed there and then, or that
he should be left alone when the fleet sailed away, or that
he should be sent back to England, there to answer his
deeds before the lords of her majesty's council. Captain
Doughty asked for twenty-four hours to consider his
decision, and then announced his preference for instant
execution, saying that death were better than being left
alone in this savage land, and that the dishonour of being
sent back to England would be greater than he could
survive.

The next day Mr. Francis Fletcher, the pastor and
preacher of the fleet, held a solemn service. The general
and the condemned man received the sacrament together,
after which they dined " also at the same table together
as cheerful in sobriety as ever in their lives they had done
aforetime, each cheering the other up and taking their
leave by drinking each to other, as if some journey only
had been in hand". After dinner, Captain Doughty came
forth, kneeled down at the block, and was at once
beheaded by the provost-marshal.

Such is the story of this curious affair as told by the
chroniclers. But it must be remembered that these were
favourable to Captain Drake, and it certainly seems extra
ordinary that upon such a voyage as this Captain Doughty
could not have been deprived of his command and re
duced to the rank of a simple adventurer, in which he
could, one would think, have done no harm whatever to
the expedition.

At the island where this execution took place the fleet
abode two months, resting the crews, wooding, watering,
and trimming the ships, and bringing the fleet into a more
compact compass; destroying the Mary> a Portuguese

270 Under Drake's Flag

prize, and arranging the whole of the crews in three
ships, so that they might the more easily keep together.
On August the lyth they set sail, and on the 2oth reached
the entrance to the Straits, Cape Virgins. Here the
admiral caused his fleet, in homage to the Queen, to
strike their foresails, acknowledging her to have the
full interest and honour in the enterprise, and further, in
remembrance of his honoured patron, Sir Christopher
Hatton, he changed the name of the ship in which he
himself sailed from the Pelican to the Golden Hind> this
animal forming part of the chancellor's armorial bearings.

They now entered the narrow Straits of Magellan,
which are in many places no wider than a river; and in
the night passed a burning mountain, which caused no
little surprise to those who had never beheld anything of
the kind. Here all were astonished by the sight of huge
numbers of penguins, which were then for the first time
discovered by Englishmen. These strange birds, with
their long bodies, short necks, and absence of wings,
greatly astonished them, and were so tame that in the
course of an hour or two they killed no less than three
thousand of them, and found them to be excellent food.
One of these islands the admiral christened St. George.
Sailing on for some days they came to a bay in which they
found many natives, who came out in a canoe, whose
beauty and form were considered by all to be far superior
to anything that they had hitherto beheld, which was the
more singular, inasmuch as these people were of a very
low type. However, they appear in those days to have
been more advanced in civilization than their descendants
now are.

On the 6th of September they entered the South Sea,
Drake having been the fourth commander who had sailed

The "Golden Hind" 271

through the Straits. The first passage was made by
Magellan in 1520, the second by Loyasa in 1526, the
third by Juan de Ladrilleros from the Pacific side. In
this voyage the English commander had far better weather
than had been experienced by his predecessors, accom
plishing in a fortnight a voyage which had taken them
some months. His good fortune, however, here deserted
them, for upon the very day after they entered the South
Sea a contrary wind fell upon them, and increased to a
powerful hurricane. This augmented rather than de
creased in force, and on the night of September the 3oth
the Marygold, Captain John Thomas, was separated from
the rest of the fleet, and was never heard of after. Until
the 7th of October they did not again see land, being
driven far to the south. They then discovered an island,
and entering a harbour came to anchor. The shelter,
however, was a poor one, and the gale blew so furiously
that in the night the Elisabeth was blown from her
anchors and lost sight of the Golden Hind. It is a ques
tion whether this event was not partly caused by the
captain, Winter, who certainly behaved as if he had the
fixed intention of returning to England. He never made
any serious effort to rejoin the Golden Hind, but after
remaining for some little time in those quarters he sailed
for England, reaching home in safety some months after
wards.

They christened the bay "The Parting of Friends",
and the Golden Hind was driven down again into 55°
south latitude. Fresh gales fell upon them, and, as has
been said, it was not till October the 28th, after fifty-two
days of almost unexampled bad weather, that the sky
cleared, and they were able to renew their journey. They
searched the islands in all directions for their missing

272 Under Drake's Flag

friends, and in remembrance of them the admiral gave
them the name of the Elizabethedes.

Hoping that Captain Winter had sailed north, the
Golden Hind's head was turned in that direction, with
great hope that they might meet her in latitude 30°,
which had been before appointed as a place of rendezvous
should the fleet happen to be separated. Touching at
many points, they enquired everywhere of the natives, but
could hear no word of any ship having been seen before.
At the island of Mocha they had a misadventure. The
island was thickly inhabited by many Indians, whom the
cruel conduct of the Spaniards had driven from the main
land. With these people the admiral hoped to have
traffic, and the day after his landing they brought down
fruit and vegetables and two fat sheep, receiving in return
many little presents. They seemed to be well content,
and the next morning early, all being ready for a general
traffic, the admiral repaired to the shore again with two-
thirds of his men with water barrels to fill up the ship.
As they were peaceably engaged in this task the natives,
to the number of five hundred, suddenly sprang from an
ambush, and with their arrows shot very grievously at
the English. The general himself was struck in the face,
under his right eye and close by his nose. Nine other
persons of the party were all wounded grievously. The
rest gained the boats, and all put off. None of the
wounded died, which, considering that there was no
surgeon on board the ship, was looked upon by the
mariners as a special "miracle in their favour. There was
a great talk of returning to shore to punish the men who
had so treacherously attacked them. But the admiral,
seeing that many of the men were hurt, and believing
that the attack had been the result of the cruel treatment

The "Golden Hind" 273

bestowed upon the natives by the Spaniards, with whom
they had naturally confounded our men, determined to
leave them alone, and the same night sailed north, seek
ing some convenient spot where the men could land and
obtain a supply of fresh provisions.

Such a place they found at Philip's Bay, in latitude 32*.
Here they came to an anchor; and an Indian, described
as a comely personage of a goodly stature, his apparel
being a white garment reaching scarcely to his knees,
came on board in a canoe. His arms and legs were
naked; his hair upon his head very long, and without a
beard ; of very gentle, mild, and humble nature, and tract
able to learn the use of everything. He was courteously
entertained, and, receiving gifts, returned to the shore,
where his companions, being much pleased with his
reception, at once did all that they could for the fleet,
and brought down provisions and other things desired.
The natives also offered to guide them to a better har
bour, where, the people being more numerous, they could
obtain a greater store of the things desired. The offer
was accepted, and on the 4th of December, piloted by
him, they came to a harbour in such a place as was
wished for.

This was the Spanish harbour of Valparaiso, and here,
indeed, they found all that they desired, and that without
payment. The Spaniards, having no idea of the English
being in the vicinity, received them with all honour; but
as soon as the mistake was discovered they fled, and the
town fell into their hands. In a ship in the harbour,
called the Grand Captain, 1800 jars of wine and a large
quantity of gold were found. The churches were plun
dered of their ornaments and relics, and the storehouses
of the city laid under contribution of all things desired.

(162) 18

274 Under Drake's Flag

Sailing1 again on the iQth of December, they touched to
the southward of the town of Coquimbo, where fourteen
of them landed. The Spaniards here, however, appeared
to be bolder than their comrades in other towns, for a
hundred of them, all well mounted, with three hundred
natives, came up against them. This force being descried,
the English retreated, first from the mainland to a rock
within the sea, and thence to their boat. One man,
however, Richard Minnioy, refused to retire before the
Spaniards, and remained defying the advancing body
until they arrived. He, of course, fell a victim to his
obstinacy, and the Spaniards, having beheaded the body,
placed it against a post, and used it as a target for the
Indians. At nightfall they left it, and the English re
turned to shore in their boat and buried it. The next
day, finding a convenient place, they remained for a
month refitting the ships and resting the crews, obtain
ing an abundance of fish and other provisions such as
they required, fresh water, however, being absent.

Sailing along, they came to Iquique, and landing here
they lighted upon a Spaniard who lay asleep, and had
lying by him thirteen bars of silver. Thinking it cruel
to awaken him, they removed the money and allowed
him to take his sleep out in security. Continuing their
search for water, they landed again, and near the shore
met a Spaniard with an Indian boy driving eight " Peru
vian sheep ", as the chronicler calls them, these being,
of course, the llamas, which were used as beasts of our-
den. Each sheep bore two leathern bags, in each of
which was fifty pounds weight of refined silver. The
chronicler says, "We could not endure to see a gentle
man Spaniard turned carrier so, and therefore, without
entreaty, we offered our services, and became drivers, only

The "Golden Hind" a75

his directions were not so perfect that we could keep the
way which he intended, for almost as soon as he was
parted from us we, with our new kind of carriages, were
come unto our boats".

Beyond this Cape lay certain Indian towns, and with
the natives of these, who came out on frail rafts, they
trafficked knives, beads, and glasses, for dried fish. Here
they saw more of the llamas, which are described at great
length by the historians of the expedition, who considered,
and rightly, that they were extraordinary and most useful
animals. If, however, this assertion, that upon one of
their backs "did sit at one time three well-grown and tall
men and one boy " be true, they must have been consider
ably larger in those days than at present. It was but a
few days later that they arrived at Arica, at which place
also they gleaned considerable booty, and thence pro
ceeded to Lima, which they reached seven days after
leaving Arica.

After their long voyage out to sea they again bore
north, and reached the land at the Bay of San Francisco.
Here they complained bitterly of the cold, which is not
a little singular, inasmuch as the time of the year was
June, a period at which the heat at San Francisco is at
present excessive. It must be assumed, therefore, that
some altogether exceptional season prevailed during this
portion of the voyage. Here they were well north of the
Spanish possessions, and fell among a people who knew
nothing of the white man. A native in a canoe speedily
came out to the ship as soon as she cast anchor, and,
standing at a long distance, made delivery of a very prolix
oration, with many gestures and signs, moving his hand,
turning and twisting his head and body, and ending with
a great show of reverence and submission. He returned

276 Under Drake's Flag

to shore. Again, and for a third time, he came out and
went through the same ceremony; after which he brought
a little basket of rushes filled with an herb which is called
there tambac, which he threw into the boat. Then he
again returned to shore. The people came out, many of
them in boats, but would not approach the vessel; and
upon the third day the vessel, having received a leak at
sea, was brought to anchor nearer the shore, and pre
parations were made to land her stores.

CHAPTER XVIII

San Francisco Bay

AFTER his experience of the treachery of the natives, the
admiral determined to build a fort to protect the party on
shore. The people, seeing these preparations, appeared
in large numbers and approached, but their attitude ex
pressed astonishment rather than hostility. They then,
laying down their arms, gathered round the little party
of white men ; but as they brought their women with
them, the admiral concluded that no hostility was in
tended, and allowed them freely to mix with the whites.
Their attitude and deportment showed that they looked
upon them as gods, paying worship in the most abject
manner. In order to show them that his men were but
human, the admiral ordered them to eat and drink, that
the people might observe that they were but men as they.
Even this failed to convince them, and during the whole
time that they remained there they were treated as being
creatures of celestial origin.

Two days later the natives returned in great numbers.
A leader at their head again delivered a long and tedious
oration, "to which", according to the chronicler, "these
people appear to be much addicted ". This oration was
delivered with strange and violent gestures, the speaker's
voice being extended to the uttermost strength of nature,

277

278 Under Drake's Flag

and his words falling so thick, one in the neck of another,
that he could hardly fetch his breath again. When he
had concluded the people bowed to the earth, giving a
long cry of "Oh", which appears to have answered to our
"Amen". Then the men came forward, and the women
went through a number of exercises, which appear to have
shocked and appalled our seamen. "As if they had been
desperate, they used violence against themselves, crying
and shrieking piteously, tearing their flesh with their
nails from their cheeks in a monstrous manner, the blood
streaming down over their bodies. Then, holding their
hands above their heads so that they might not save
their bodies from harm, they would with fury cast them
selves upon the ground, never respecting whether it were
clean or soft, but dash themselves in this manner on hard
stones, knobby hillocks, stocks of wood, and prickly
bushes, or whatever else were in their way, iterating the
same course again and again some nine or ten times each,
others holding out for fifteen or sixteen times, till their
strength failed them." The admiral, horrified by this cruel
exhibition of reverence, ordered his men to fall to prayers,
and signified to them that the God whom we did serve
did not approve of such measures as they had taken.

Three days later, the king himself came down, and the
ceremonies were repeated. The king then offered to the
admiral the monarchy of that land, and perceiving that
this would please them, and having in mind the honour
and glory of her majesty, Captain Francis accepted the
crown, and with many ceremonies was installed king of
that country, taking possession of the land in the name
of the Queen. It is not a little singular that this, one
of the richest and most valuable portions of the United
States, should thus have become by right alike of dis-

San Francisco Bay 279

covery and of free gift of the people, a possession of
England.

For some days the people continued their cruel exercises
upon themselves, and so fixed were they in their idolatry
that, even when forcibly prevented acting this way, they
would, immediately they were released, set to with even
redoubled fury to cut and injure themselves. After a
time their worship took a new form. All the people of
the country having wounds, shrunken limbs, or diseases
of any kind were brought down to be cured, and the
people were much grieved that an instantaneous cure
could not be effected, but that our men proceeded by the
application of lotions, plasters, and unguents to benefit
those who had anticipated immediate remedy.

Altogether, the account given by the voyagers of the
people of this part of America is most favourable. They
appear to have been of a tractable, free, and loving nature,
without guile or treachery. They were finely built men,
and one of them could carry easily uphill and down a
weight which two or three Englishmen could scarcely
lift. They were swift at running, and could catch a fish
in the sea if it were in water within their depth. When
the ship was repaired, the admiral, with many of his
officers, made a journey into the interior, and found that
it was a goodly country with a very fruitful soil. There
were many thousands of large and fair deer grazing in
herds. This country was christened by the admiral,
Albion, partly from the colour of its cliffs, partly in re
membrance of his country. On the shore a monument
was set up, and on it a plate of brass was affixed engraven
with the Queen's name, the date of the arrival of the ship,
and of the free giving up of the province and kingdom into
her majesty's hand, and a piece of current English money

280 Under Drake's Flag

was fastened beneath a hole made in the brass plate, so
that it might remain as a proof that the English had taken
possession of this land to which the Spaniards had never
approached.

As the stores were being taken on board again, and the
natives saw the preparations for embarkation, the joy
with which the arrival of these white beings had been
received was changed into sorrow, and all the people
went about mourning and crying. For many days this
continued, and the parting when the ship set sail on the
23rd of July was a very sorrowful one, the people climbing
to the top of the hills so as to keep the ship in sight as
long as they could, and making great fires and burning
thereon sacrifices to the departing gods.

The admiral had now made up his mind to abandon
the search for a passage round the north of America.
The cold had become even greater while they remained
in the bay. The natives themselves were wrapped in
black cloths and huddled together for warmth, and those
in the ship suffered exceedingly. Moreover, the shores
of the country trended far more to the west than had
been expected, and the admiral concluded that far to the
north the shores of America and Asia must unite. He
thought, too, that in that country must be very lofty
mountains covered with snow, for so alone could he
account for the exceeding coldness of the wind. Believ
ing, therefore, that no passage could be made in that
way, and seeing that the ship had already gone through
heavy tempests, and the men, although still of good heart,
yet were longing for a return home after their great
labours, he steered to the west, making the Moluccas
his aim.

During the voyage from Lima, along the coast of South

San Francisco Bay 281

America, the boys had met with no special adventures.
Upon the day after they came on board ship Ned and
Tom were called by the admiral into his cabin, and there
recounted to him at great length all the adventures that
they had gone through. He wondered greatly at their
recital, and commended them exceedingly for the prudence
and courage which they had shown. The account of the
strange places never before trodden by the foot of white
men which they had seen, he ordered his secretary to
write down at full length, that it might be delivered to her
gracious majesty, together with the record of the voyage
of the Golden Hind, and he predicted that the Queen
would take great pleasure in this record of the first
journey across the continent.

* 'As to you," he said, turning to Ned, "you seem to
be fated to get into adventures, and to find your way
out of them. I have not forgotten the strange passage
in the Island of Puerta Rico, and I predict that if you
go on as you have begun you will come to great things."

Warmly, also, did he praise Ned's companion on the
journey; but the latter modestly ascribed all the success
which had attended their journey to the knowledge of
native life which Ned had gained among the negroes, and
to his courage and prudence.

"Nevertheless," said the admiral, "there is praise due
also to you, for you have known when to subordinate
yourself to one younger in years, although older in ex
perience. This virtue is rare and very commendable, and
I doubt not that had you not so freely given up your own
wishes and inclinations to those of your comrade, you
might both have perished miserably."

He further expressed his high opinion of Ned's bravery
and discretion by giving him a command in the ship as

282 Under Drake's Flag

third officer, finding", on enquiry, that he had learned how
to take the altitude of the sun and to do other things
necessary for the discovery of the position of the ship.
These signs of goodwill on the part of the admiral caused,
as might have been expected, some jealousy among a con
siderable portion of the equipage. Many, indeed, were
glad at the position which Ned had gained by his enter
prise and courage. Others, however, grumbled, and said
that it was hard that those who had done their duty on
board the ship should be passed over in favour of mere
youngsters who had been wandering on their own account
on land. Ned himself felt that there was some reason for
this jealousy upon the part of those who had borne the
burden of all the great labours which those on board the
Golden Hind had undergone, and he spoke to the admiral
and expressed his willingness, nay more, his desire, to
remain as a private gentleman and adventurer on board the
ship. This, however, Captain Francis would not hear of.

"Merit has to be rewarded," he said, "wheresoever it
is found. These men have done their duty. All indeed
on board the ship have wrought nobly for their own safety
and for the honour of her majesty the Queen. But you
have gone beyond this, and have by your journey across
the continent brought fame and credit to the country. It
is right that men who discover strange lands into which,
some day, the power of Christianity and civilization may
enter, should receive honour and credit of their country
men. Of those who seek to do these things many perish,
and those who survive should be held in honour."

Most of all delighted at the success and honour which
had befallen Ned, were his three friends. Two of them
considered that they owed their lives to him. All regarded
him as their leader as well as their comrade. But Reuben

San Francisco Bay 283

Gale grumbled much that he had had no share in the
adventures which had befallen his three friends.

"You have all three strange histories to tell. You have
seen wonderful things and have journeyed and fought with
wild men and Spaniards; while I with equal goodwill have
never had the chance of doing more than join in the taking1
of Spanish caravels, where the resistance was so poor that
children might have done the business."

Ned laughed, and promised him that the next adventure
he got into he would, if possible, have him as his comrade.

"We have a long1 voyage yet," he said. "We have
not gone much more than a third of the circumference
of the world, and before we reach England strange things
may happen yet. We left Plymouth with a noble fleet of
six ships. Now there remains but one, and fifty-eight
men. At the same rate we shall be reduced to a cock
boat, and four men, before we reach England. So keep
up your heart, there is plenty of time before us."

So great was the confidence which they felt in Ned
that Reuben was cheered with this promise, although he
knew, in his heart, that these adventures fell upon Ned
not from any effort of his own, but by the effect of
accident, or, as we may say, Providence.

The young men liked not their stay in San Francisco
Bay. Those who were best looking and youngest were
especially chosen out by the women as objects of their
adoration, and the lads were horrified at the way in
which these poor creatures beat and tore themselves and
grovelled upon the ground; and so, being sick at heart
at these mummeries, and at receiving a worship fit only
for the Creator of the world, they remained on board
ship as much as possible during the time that they tarried
there.

284 Under Drake's Flag

Except for a group of islands which they passed the
day after sailing west, the Golden Hind saw no more
land from the 23rd of July until September the 3oth,
sixty-eight days in all, when they fell in sight of some
islands lying about eight degrees to the northward of the
line. As soon as the ship was seen a great number of
canoes came out, having in them some four, some six,
some fourteen, or even twenty men paddling rapidly and
bringing cocoas, fish, and fruits. The beauty and work
manship of these canoes astonished the voyagers. They
were made out of one tree of great length, hollowed with
fire and axe, and being so smooth, both without and
within, that they shone like polished wood. The bow
and stern were alike in shape, rising high and falling
inwards almost in a semicircle, and being covered with
white and glistening shells for ornament. These canoes
had upon either side outriggers, — that is, pieces of cane
extending six or seven feet beyond the side, and to which
were fixed spars of very light wood, so that the boat
could in nowise overturn. These people evinced no fear
of the English, and it was clear that, although they might
not themselves have seen a ship before, the presence of
the Portuguese in these seas was known to the islanders,
and the manner of their vessels.

The nature of these people was very different from that
of the gentle savages on the western coast of America.
They did not trade honestly as these had done, but ob
tained as much as they could, and then pushed off from
the side of the ship without handing up the goods which
they had bargained to give, and behaved so rascally that
the admiral, seeing that their intentions were altogether
evil, ordered a gun to be fired, not with the intent of hurt
ing any, but of frightening them. The roar of the cannon

San Francisco Bay 285

was followed by the instant disappearance of every native
from the fleet of canoes, amid the laughter of those on
board ship. For a long time none could be seen, each
as he came above water keeping on the further side of
his canoe, and then paddling with it astern, so that the
ship, as she floated on, left them gradually behind. When
they thought that they were in safety they again took
their places in the canoes, and finding that none were
hurt, again paddled alongside the ship and made pretence
to barter. Some of them indeed came on board with their
wares, but while pretending to be engaged in honest trade
they stole the daggers and knives from the men's girdles,
and pillaged whatever they could lay their hands upon.
The admiral, being wroth at this conduct, had some of
these men seized and flogged, and then driving the rest
into their canoes, hoisted sail and went onwards, christen
ing the place the " Island of Thieves", so as to deter all
passengers hereafter from ever visiting it.

Passing through many other islands they made for
Tidore, the principal place in the Moluccas. But as they
passed the Island of Motir, which was then called Ternate,
a deputy, or viceroy, of the king of that island came off
to the ship in a great canoe, and entreated the admiral
to anchor at that island, and not at Tidore, assuring him
in the name of the king that he would be wondrous glad
to see him, and to do all that the admiral could require.
He himself promised to return to the king at once, who
would get all in readiness ; whereas if they went on to
Tidore, where the Portuguese held sway, they would find
in them deceit and treachery. On these persuasions Cap
tain Drake resolved to run into Ternate, where next
morning he came to anchor.

The admiral then sent a party, consisting of Ned and

Under Drake's Flag

three other adventurers, to the king, bearing the present
of a velvet cloak, as a testimony of his desire for friend
ship and goodwill, with the message that he should re
quire no other thing at his hands but that he might be
allowed by traffic and exchange of merchandise to obtain
provisions, of which, after his long voyage across the
seas, he had now but small store. As the boat rowed
to shore it was met by a large canoe coming out with
a message from the king, that he had heard from his
viceroy how great was the nobleness of the captain, and
of the Queen whom he served, and that he, who was the
enemy of the Portuguese, whom he had expelled from his
dominions, would gladly agree to aid him, and to enter
into treaties by which all ships of his nation might come
to Ternate, and trade for such things as they required,
all other white men being excluded. On arriving at the
shore the deputation were met by many personages. They
were dressed in white cloths of Indian manufacture, and
the party marvelled much at the difference between their
stately manners and ways and those of the people whom
they had lately left. Accompanied by these personages,
and with great honour, they were conducted to the in
terior of the island, where, in a house surprisingly large
for a people so far removed from civilization, and which,
indeed, they afterwards learned had been built by the
Portuguese, they found the king, who received them
with much honour. He was a tall and stout man, with
much dignity in his manner. It was clear that his autho
rity among his people was very great, for even the nobles
and councillors whom he had sent to greet them bowed to
the dust in his presence.

Ned had consulted with his comrades on the way, and
had agreed that, as the messengers of the admiral, and

San Francisco Bay 287

therefore in some way as the representatives of the Queen,
it was their duty to comport themselves as equal, at least,
in dignity to this island monarch. Therefore while all the
people knelt in the dust in humility, they walked straight
to his majesty and held out their hands in English fashion.
His majesty was in no whit offended at this, and indeed
by his manner strove to express his respect. A certain
amount of conversation was carried on with him, for in
the island were an Italian and a Spaniard, who, having
been made prisoners by the Portuguese, had escaped to
Ternate. These men, acting as interpreters, conveyed to
the king the messages sent by the admiral, and in return
informed Ned that the king was in all ways most anxious
to express his pleasure to the admiral, and that on the
morrow he would himself visit him on board ship. He
also, as a pledge, delivered his own signet ring to Ned
to carry on board.

Having returned on board ship with these messages,
they waited for the morrow, when three large canoes put
off from the shore. In these were the greatest personages
on the island. They sat in the canoes in accordance with
their rank, the old men in the stern. Next to these were
divers others, also attired in white, but with differences
in the way in which the clothes were worn. These also
had their places under the awning of reeds. The rest of
the men were soldiers, who stood ranged on each side.
On the outside of these again sat the rowers. These
canoes must have in some way resembled the old Roman
triremes, for it is said that " there were three galleries
on either side of the canoe, one being builded above the
other, and in each of these galleries were an equal number
of benches, whereon did sit the rowers, about the number
of fourscore in each canoe'*. In the forepart of each canoe

288 Under Drake's Flag

sat two men, one holding a drum and the other a piece of
brass, whereon both at once struck, marking the time for
each stroke. The rowers on their part ended each stroke
with a song, giving warning to those on the prow to strike
again; and so, rowing evenly, they came across the sea
at great speed. Each of these canoes carried a small
cannon of about a yard in length. All the men, except
the rowers, had swords, daggers, and shields, lances,
bows, and arrows, and some had guns. These canoes
came up to the ship and rowed round her in solemn pro
cession, to the great admiration of all on board, who had
never beheld a sight like this. But the admiral said that
the vessels reminded him of the descriptions which he
had read of the great barges of Venice. As they rowed
they did homage to the admiral, the greatest personages
beginning, first standing up and bowing their bodies to
the ground, the others following in order of rank. Then
a messenger came on board, signifying that they had
come before the king, who had sent them to conduct our
ship into a better anchorage, and desiring that a rope
might be given them out that they might, as their king
commanded, tow the ship to the place assigned.

Very shortly the king himself came out, having with
him in his canoe six grave and ancient fathers, and did
himself at once make a reverent kind of obeisance. He
was received in the best manner possible. The great
guns thundered, and as these had been filled with a large
quantity of small shot, they tore up the water in the dis
tance, and made a fine show for these people. The
trumpets also, and other instruments of music, sounded
loudly, whereat the king was much delighted, and re
quested that the music might come into a boat. The
musicians, at Captain Francis's orders, so did, and laying

San Francisco Bay 289

alongside the king's canoe, were towed behind the ship
by the rowers in the three first canoes.

The king and many others came on board and were
bountifully entertained, many presents being given to
them. When the anchorage was reached the king asked
leave to go on shore, promising that next day he would
again come on board and in the meantime send such
victuals as were requested. Accordingly, at night and
the next morning large quantities of hens, sugar canes,
rice, figos — which are supposed to have been plantains —
cocoas, and sago were sent on board. Also some cloves
for traffic; but of these the admiral did not buy many,
as he did not wish the ship to be crowded with goods.

At the time appointed, all things being set in readiness,
the admiral looked for the king's return, but he failed to
keep his promise, to the great discontent and doubt on
the part of the crew. The king's brother came off to
invite Captain Drake to land and visit him; but this
brother, who seemed to be an honest gentleman himself,
whispered a few words in confidence to the admiral,
warning him that it would be better that he should not
go on shore. With his free consent the admiral retained
this nobleman as a pledge, and then although, in conse
quence of the king's bad faith, he resolved not to land
himself, he sent many of his officers, who were conducted
with great honour to the large and fair house inhabited
by the king, where at least a thousand people were
gathered.

The king was seated In a great chair of state, and many
compliments were exchanged between him and the Eng
lish. The king was now attired in his full state, having
from the waist to the ground a robe of cloth of gold,
with many rings of plated gold on his head, making a

(162) 19

Under Drake's Flag

show something like a crown. On his neck he had a
chain of perfect gold, the links very large. On his left
hand were a diamond, an emerald, a ruby, and a tur
quoise, and on his right hand many beautiful gems.
Thus it will be seen that the king of these islands was
a potentate of no mean grandeur. Most of the furniture
and decorations of the court were obtained from the
Portuguese during the time that they inhabited the island.
Had they not followed the tyrannous ways of their people
they might have remained there in fair comfort; but, de
siring to obtain the entire authority, they had killed the
late king. This cruelty, however, had brought about a
different end to that which they had expected, for the
people, headed by the king's eldest son, had risen against
them in great force, had killed many, and had driven the
rest from the island, placing the king's son upon the
throne, who had become the deadly enemy of the Portu
guese, and was now preparing an expedition to drive
them from Tidore. The religion of these people was that
of the Mussulmans, and the rigour with which they fasted
— it being, at the time of the English visit, one of their
festivals — greatly astonished those who saw them, for
during the whole time they would eat nothing between
morning and night; but the appetite with which they
devoured many meals throughout the night almost equally
astonished the British.

While the Golden Hind lay in the harbour of Ternate
they received a visit from a Chinese gentleman of high
station, and who was assuredly the first Chinaman who
ever came in contact with one of our race. His reason
for being at the Moluccas was singular. He had been a
man of great rank in his own country, but was accused
of a capital crime of which, though innocent, he was

San Francisco Bay 291

unable to free himself. He then implored the emperor
to allow him to leave the country, placing the proof of
his innocence in the hands of Providence; it being1 a
bargain that if he could bring back to the emperor strange
and wonderful tidings of things new to him, such as he
had never heard of, he should be restored to his place
and honours, and held to be acquitted of that crime. If
such news could not be gained by him he was to remain
in exile and to be accounted guilty of that of which
he was accused. Coming on board, he very earnestly
entreated the admiral to give him the account of his
adventures from the time of leaving his country. This
Captain Drake willingly did, and the Chinaman in great
delight exclaimed that this was fully sufficient for him to
bear back to the emperor. He gave a very warm and
pressing invitation to Sir Francis to bring the ship to
China, where he assured him of a welcome at the hands
of the emperor. Had Captain Drake been able to accede
to this proposition it is probable that our dealings with
the East on a large scale might have begun some cen
turies earlier than they did; but the Golden Hind was
much battered by the voyage she had gone through,
being, indeed, not a new ship when she started. The
crew, too, were all longing to get home, and the treasure
which had been gathered from the Spaniards was ample
for all their desires. The admiral, therefore, although
truly he longed to see this country, and to open relations
between it and the Queen, was yet forced to decline the
invitation, and so to depart on his westward voyage.

The Golden Hind now made slow progress through the
water, her bottom being foul with weeds and other things
which had attached themselves to it during its long
voyage. The captain therefore determined to enter the

292 Under Drake's Flag

first harbour in an uninhabited island that he came to,
for at none of the places at which he had hitherto touched
had he ventured to take this step. However friendly the
inhabitants might have appeared, some causes of quarrel
might have arisen, and with the ship hauled up and bent
over it might have fallen into the hands of the natives,
and so been destroyed, and all return to England cut off
from him. Five days after leaving Ternate he found such
a place, and fetching up in a small harbour the whole
party landed, pitched tents, and entrenched themselves.
Then they took the casks and water vessels ashore and
thoroughly repaired them, trimmed the ship, and scraped
her bottom, and so put her in a state to perform the rest
of the voyage.

Greatly here were the crew astonished by the first
sight of fireflies, creatures which were new to them all.
This island swarmed with crayfish of a size sufficient to
satisfy four hungry men at dinner. These creatures
never went into the sea, but kept themselves on land,
digging holes in the roots of the trees, and there lodging
numbers together. Strangely enough, too, these crayfish,
when they found themselves cut off from their natural
retreats, climbed up trees, and there concealed themselves
in the branches.

On December the i2th they again set sail, being now
among the Celebes, where they found the water shoal
and coasting very dangerous. The wind, too, was high
and contrary, and their difficulties greater than anything
they had found. On January the gth the wind, however,
came aft, and they appeared to have found a passage
out of these dangers, sailing then at full speed. They
were, at the first watch at night, filled with consternation
at a crash, followed by silence, and the vessel was found

San Francisco Bay 293

to have run high upon a reef of which the surface had
presented no indication. Not since the Golden Hind had
left England had her strait been as sore as this. The
force with which she had run upon the reef seemed to
have carried her beyond all hope of extrication. All con
sidered that death was at hand, for they hardly hoped
that the ship could hold long together. The admiral at
once, to still the confusion which reigned, ordered all to
prayers, and the whole, kneeling on the deck, prayed for
mercy, preparing themselves for imminent death. Pre
sently, having finished praying, the admiral addressed
them in a consoling speech, and then, their courage being
much raised, all bestirred themselves to regard the posi
tion. The pumps were first tried and the ship freed of
water, and to their great joy they found that the leakage
was no greater than before, and that the rocks had not
penetrated through the planks. This appeared to all on
board to be an absolute miracle wrought in their favour,
for it seemed impossible to them that, running at so high
a rate of speed, the vessel could have failed to break her
self against the rocks. It is probable that, in fact, the
ship had struck upon a newly-formed coral reef, and that
the coral — which, when first made, is not very hard — had
crashed to pieces under the shock, and so she lay in safety
upon the bed of pounded fragments.

CHAPTER XIX

South Sea Idols

WHEN order and tranquillity were perfectly restored the
admiral ordered a boat to be lowered and soundings to
be taken, intending" to put out the anchors ahead, and to
get her off by working upon them with the windlass. It
was found, however, that under the forefoot of the vessel
the water deepened so rapidly that at a distance of a few
fathoms no soundings could be obtained. This plan,
therefore, was abandoned. The prospect seemed dark
indeed. The ship's boats would, at most, only carry
half the men on board, and if the ship had to be aban
doned the whole of her treasures must be lost, as well
as many lives.

" There is an island far away to the south," the admiral
said. " If the worst come, we must seek refuge on that.
It will be well to send a boat to examine it, and see what
capabilities it offers for the purpose. Then if the weather
holds fair we can make several trips, and land our men,
and a portion at least of our valuables."

"Will you let me go, sir, with my three friends?" Ned
asked. "The canoe which we took from our last halting-
place will carry the four of us, and as she paddles swiftly
we may be back before many hours."

"The idea is a good one," Captain Drake said.
" Make for the island. It is, I should say, fifteen miles

South Sea Idols 295

off. When you have reached it see if there be water,
fuel, and other necessaries, and whether the landing be
good. If you should come upon any natives, parley with
them. Take a few articles as presents, and explain to
them, if they will come out here with their canoes and
aid to bring the things ashore we will give them presents
which will make them wealthy beyond their grandest
dreams. Be careful, my boys. I know that you will be
brave if necessary; but care and caution are the great
things, and remember that our safety depends upon
yours."

The young men speedily lowered the canoe under the
shelter of the lee side of the ship, took some beads,
calicoes, and other articles, and then, seating themselves
in the boat, paddled rapidly away. At first they felt a
little awkward in using the paddles, in which they had
had no practice whatever. But being powerful men,
and accustomed to the use of oars, they soon fell into
regular stroke, and the light boat danced rapidly over
the waters. The distance was further than Captain
Drake had imagined, the clearness of the air making
the land appear nearer than it really was; and it was
only after three hours of hard work that they neared it.
It turned out to be an island of about a mile in length
so far as they could judge. A reef of coral ran round it.
The centre of the island was somewhat elevated, and was
covered with cocoa-nut trees ; and it was this alone which
had enabled it to be seen from so great a distance from
the deck of the Golden Hind. Paddling round the reef,
they came to an opening, and entering this found them
selves in perfectly smooth water, and were soon on
shore.

"Our best way to look for water," Ned said, "will

296 Under Drake's Flag

be to follow the beach all round the island. If there is
any stream we must then come upon it. We had better
take our arms, and haul up the canoe."

Ned, although the youngest of the party, being an
officer of the ship, was naturally in command.

"It will be hard," Reuben said, "if we do not meet
with some adventure. This is the first time that I have
been out with you, Ned. The others have had their
share, and it will be hard upon me if, when I get home,
I have not some tale to tell my friends."

"I hope that it will not be so," Ned said, "for more
than story-telling depends upon our success. I fear the
Golden Hind is fixed fast, and that all the fruits of our
expedition are lost, even if our lives be saved. Every
thing depends upon the report we may make when we
return, and anything that should occur to delay us or to
prevent our bearing back tidings of this place to the
admiral, would be bad fortune indeed."

"I don't mean," Reuben said, "anything that would
prevent our returning. But we might do something, and
yet return safely."

A walk round the island showed no signs of water, nor,
although they searched for some hours, walking back
wards and forwards across it, could they find any sign
of a pool. It was clear that there were no fresh-water
springs on the island, and that the vegetation depended
entirely upon the rain that fell in the regular season. But
they discovered from the top of the island another and
much larger one lying still again some fifteen miles to the
south. After much deliberation they determined to make
for this, as it was of importance that they should have
some news of a place to which the goods could be trans
ported, to carry back to the ship. This island was much

South Sea Idols 297

higher, and there appeared every probability that water
and all they required would be found there. Accordingly,
taking their place in the canoe, they again paddled out
through the entrance to the reef, and steered their course
for their new discovery. This was a large island, measur
ing at least, as they judged from the view of the one side,
twenty miles round. The shores were steep, and they
rowed for some time before they succeeded in finding a
place where a landing could be effected. Then a deep
bay suddenly opened out, and into this they rowed.

Scarcely had they fairly entered it when from some
bushes near the shore two large war canoes, crowded
with natives, shot out and made towards them. The
lads at first grasped their muskets, but Ned said, " Let
the arms be. We are here to make peace with the
natives, and must take our chance."

They stood up in the canoe, holding up their arms in
token of amity. The canoes came alongside at racing
pace, the natives uttering yells of joy. The canoe had
evidently been seen approaching the island, and pre
parations had been made to seize it immediately on its
arrival. Ned held up in his hand the beads and pieces
of cloth. But the natives were too excited for pause or
negotiation. In an instant the boys were seized and
placed on board the canoes, two in each. They were
tenderly handled, and were clearly objects of veneration
rather than of hostility. The moment that they were on
board, the contents of the canoe were transferred to the
large boat, and it was then cast adrift, and the two war-
boats at full speed made out through the passage. Ned
endeavoured in vain to attract the attention of the leaders
of the savages to his gestures, and to explain to them
that there was a vessel from which he had come at a

298 Under Drake's Flag

short distance off, and that if they would accompany him
thither they would obtain large quantities of the beads
and cloth which he showed them. The natives, however,
were too much excited to pay any attention to his efforts,
and with a sigh of despair he sat down by the side of
Reuben, who was in the same boat with him, as the
canoes on emerging" from the bay turned their heads to
the south-west and paddled steadily and rapidly away
from the island.

11 Whither can they be going to take us?" Reuben said.

"They must belong to some other island," Ned an
swered, "and be a war party which has come on plunder
ing purposes here. What a misfortune 1 What terribly
bad luck! They have clearly never seen white men be
fore, and regard us as superior beings, and so far as we
are concerned it is probable that our lives are safe. But
what will the admiral think when night comes on and we
do not return? What will become of our comrades?"

And at the thought of their messmates left without
help in so perilous a position Ned fairly broke down and
cried.

For some hours the natives continued their course with
out intermission, and gradually an island, which had at
first seemed liked a low cloud on the horizon, loomed up
nearer and nearer, and at last, just as night fell, they
landed upon its shores. Here, in a bay, a village of
huts constructed of the boughs of trees had been raised,
and the arrival of the war canoes was greeted with wild
and prolonged cries by the women and children. All
prostrated themselves in wonder and astonishment when
the white men in their strange attire were brought on
shore, and Ned saw that his suspicions were correct, and
that they were regarded by their captors as gods. Further

South Sea Idols 299

proof was given of this when they were escorted to a large
shed composed of a roof of thatch supported on four up
right posts which stood in the centre of the village. Under
this were placed some of the hideous effigies which the
South Sea Islanders worship, and which are affixed to
the prow of their boats, and may be seen in the British
Museum, and in other places where collections of Indian
curiosities are exhibited. These effigies were carved in
the shape of human beings, with enormous goggle eyes,
splashes of bright paint, and strange and immense head
dresses of brilliant colours. Here the lads were motioned
to sit down, and the natives brought them offerings of
cocoas and other fruits.

The boys could hardly help laughing at their strange
position, surrounded by these hideous idols.

" You wanted an adventure, Reuben, and you have got
one indeed," Ned said. "You are translated into a
heathen god, and, if you ever get home, will have your
story to tell, which will astonish the quiet firesides in
Devonshire."

" Ought we not to refuse to accept this horrid worship?"
Gerald said.

" I think not," Ned replied. " It can do no harm, and
we are at least better than these wooden idols. So long
at least as we are taken for gods our lives are safe. But
I would not say as much if they once became convinced,
by our actions, that we are men like themselves."

" But we cannot sit here all our lives among these
idols," Reuben said.

"I agree with you there, Reuben; but patience does
wonders, and I am not troubled in the least about our
selves. Sooner or later a way of escape will present
itself, and when it does, be assured that we will use it.

300 Under Drake's Flag

Patience is all that we require now. It is of our poor
shipmates that I am thinking."

As night fell great bonfires were lighted. The natives
indulged in wild dances round them, and feasting and
festivities were kept up all through the night. Four
watches were stationed, one at each post of the temple,
and the boys saw that, for the present at least, all thought
of escape was out of the question. And therefore, stretch
ing themselves at full length on the sand they were speedily
asleep.

For some days the position remained unchanged. The
boys were well fed and cared for. Offerings of fruit, fish,
and other eatables were duly presented. A perfumed
wood which, according to the native ideas, personified
incense, was burned in large quantities round the temple,
and nearly choked the boys with its smoke.

Upon the fifth day it was clear that some expedition
was being prepared. Four large war canoes were dragged
down and placed in the water, and the great idols which
stood in the bow of each were removed and carried up to
the temple, and placed there in position. Then the boys
were motioned to come down to the beach.

"I do believe," said Tom, bursting into a shout of
laughter, "that they are going to put us in the bows of
their canoes in place of their old gods."

The others joined in the laughter, for to act as the
figurehead of a canoe was indeed a comical, if an un
pleasant situation. When they reached the boats the
boys saw that their suspicions were correct, and that the
natives were preparing to lash them to the lofty prows
which rose some twelve feet above the water, in a sweep
inwards.

"This will never do," Tom said; "if we are fastened

South Sea Idols 301

like that our weight will cut us horribly. Let us show
them how to do it."

Whereupon, with great gravity he took a large piece
of flat wood, and motioned to the savages to lash this
in front of the bow of one of the boats at a height of
three feet above the water, so as to afford a little plat
form upon which he could stand. The natives at once
perceived the drift of what he was doing, and were de
lighted that their new deities should evince such readi
ness to fall in with their plans. The additions were made
at once to the four canoes; but while this was being done,
some of the leading chiefs, with every mark of deference,
approached the boys with coloured paints, and motioned
to them that they would permit them to deck them in
this way. Again the boys indulged in a hearty laugh,
and stripping off their upper garments, to the immense
admiration of the natives, they themselves applied paint
in rings, zigzags, and other forms to their white shirts,
painted a large saucer-like circle round the eyes with ver
milion, so as to give themselves something the appear
ance of the great idols, and having thus transmogrified
themselves, each gravely took his place upon his perch,
where, leaning back against the prow behind them, they
were by no means uncomfortable.

" If these fellows are going, as I expect, upon a war
expedition," Ned shouted to his friends, as the boats,
keeping regularly abreast, rowed off from the island
amidst a perfect chaos of sounds, of yells, beatings of
rough drums made of skins stretched across hollow trunks
of trees, and of the blowing of conch shells, " our position
will be an unpleasant one. But we must trust to circum
stances to do the best. At any rate^e must wish that
our friends conquer, for the next party, if we fall into

302 Under Drake's Flag

their hands, might take it into their heads that we are
devils instead of gods, and it might fare worse with us."

It was manifest, as soon as they started, that the object
of the expedition was not the island upon which they had
been captured, but one lying away to the south. It was
a row of several hours before they approached it. As
they did so they saw columns of smoke rise from several
points of the shore, and knew that their coming there was
observed by the islanders. Presently six canoes, equally
large with their own and crowded with men, were ob
served pulling out, and yells of defiance came across the
water.

" It is clear," Tom said, "that this island is stronger
than our own, and that it is only on the strength of our
miraculous presence that the islanders expect to conquer
their foes, for they would never, with four canoes, venture
to attack a place of superior force, unless they deemed
that their victory was certain."

With wild yells, which were answered boldly from thei-
own canoes, the enemy approached, and the combat began
with a general discharge of arrows. Then the canoes
rowed into each other, and a general and desperate hand-
to-hand combat commenced. The enthusiasm with which
the inmates of the boys' canoes were animated at first gave
them the superiority, and they not only beat back the
attacks of their foes, but leaping into their enemy's boats
succeeded in clearing two of them of their occupants.
Numbers, however, told, and the enemy were, with very
heavy clubs and spears, pointed with sharp shells, gradu
ally forcing the adventurers back, when Ned saw that a
little supernatural interference was desirable to bring mat
ters straight again. Giving the word to his friends, he
stood up on his perch, and swinging himself round,

South Sea Idols 303

alighted in the boat, giving as he did so a loud British
cheer, which was answered by that of his comrades.
Then with his arms erect he began to move along the
benches of the canoe towards the conflict which was
raging on either side. The sudden interference of the
four deities at the head of the boat was received with a
yell of terror by the natives who were attacking them,
which was increased when the boys, each seizing a club
from the hands of a native, jumped into the enemy's
canoes and began to lay about them with all their
strength. This was, however, required but for a mo
ment. The sight of so terrible and unexampled an
apparition appalled the islanders, who, springing over
board with yells of despair, swam rapidly towards land,
leaving their boats in the hands of the victors. These
indulged in wild yells of triumph, knelt before their good
geniuses, and then, taking their places, paddled towards
the shore. Before they had reached it, however, the de
feated savages had landed, and running up to their village
had borne the news of the terrible apparitions which had
taken part against them. The conquerors on reaching
the village found it deserted; plundered it of a few
valuables ; carried down all their enemy's gods in triumph
into the canoes; and then, having fired the huts, started
again with the ten canoes towards their own island.

Their triumphant arrival at the village was received
with frantic excitement and enthusiasm. The sight of
six canoes towed in by the four belonging to the place
was greeted with something of the same feeling which in
Nelson's time Portsmouth more than once experienced
upon an English vessel arriving with two captured French
frigates of size superior to herself. And when the warriors
informed their relatives of the interposition of the white

304 Under Drake's Flag

gods in their favour the latter rose to an even higher
estimation in public opinion than before. They were
escorted to their shrine with wild dancing and gesticu
lation, and great heaps of fruit, fish, and other luxuries
were offered to them, in token of the gratitude of the
people. But this was not all. A few hours later a
solemn council was held on the seashore, and after a
time a great hurrying to and fro was visible in the vil
lage. Then, to the sound of their wild music, with danc
ing, brandishing of spears, and the emission of many
wild yells, the whole population moved up towards the
shrine.

"What can they be going to do now?" Tom said.
"Some fresh piece of homage, I should guess. I do
wish they would leave us alone. It is annoying enough
to be treated as a god, without being disturbed by these
constant worshippings."

When the crowd arrived before the shed they separated,
and in the midst were discovered four girls. On their
heads were wreaths of flowers, and their necks and arms
were loaded with necklaces and shells and other ornaments.

"Don't laugh, you fellows," said Ned. "I do believe
that they have brought us four wives in token of their
gratitude."

The lads had the greatest difficulty in restraining them
selves from marring the effect of the solemnity by ill-
timed laughter. But they put a great restraint upon
themselves, and listened gravely while the chief made
them a long harangue, and pointed to the four damsels,
who, elated at the honour of being selected, but some
what shy at being the centre ot the public gaze, evidently
understood that the village had chosen them to be the
wives of the gods. Although the boys could not under-

South Sea Idols 305

stand the words of the speaker, there was no question
as to his meaning, and they consulted together as to the
best steps to be taken under the circumstances.

"We must temporize," said Tom. "It would never
do for them to consider themselves slighted."

After a short consultation they again took their places
in a solemn row in front of the shed. Reuben, who was
the tallest and most imposing of the set, and who was
evidently considered by the villagers to be the leading
deity, then addressed a long harangue to the chief and
villagers. He beckoned to the four girls, who timidly
advanced, and one knelt at the feet of each of the whites.
Then Reuben motioned that a hut must be built close to
the shrine, and pointing to the sun, he traced its way
across the sky, and made a mark upon the ground.
This he repeated fourteen times, signifying that the girls
must be shut up in the hut and guarded safely for that
time, after which the nuptials would take place.

"You are quite sure, Ned," he said, pausing and turn
ing round to his friend, "that we shall be able to make
our attempt to escape before the end of the fourteen days,
because it would be fearful indeed if we were to fail, and
to find ourselves compelled to marry these four heathen
women.*'

"We will certainly try before the fourteen days are up,
Reuben ; but with what success, of course we cannot say.
But if we lay our plans well we ought to manage to get
off."

The villagers readily understood the harangue of
Reuben, and without delay the whole scattered into the
wood, and returning with bundles of palm leaves and
some strong posts, at once began to erect the hut. Fires
were lighted as the evening came on, and before they

(162) 20

306 Under Drake's Flag

ceased their labour the hut was finished. During this
time the girls had remained sitting patiently in front of
the shrine. The lads now offered them their hand and
escorted them with grave ceremony to the hut. The
palm leaves which did service as a door were placed be
fore it, and the boys proceeded to dance one after the
other in solemn order fourteen times round the hut. They
then signified to the natives that provisions, fruit, and
water must be daily brought for the use of their future
wives; and having made another harangue, thanking the
natives for their exertions and signifying future protection
and benefits, they retired under the shelter of the shed,
and the village subsided to its ordinary state of tranquillity.
"There are two difficulties in the way of making our
escape," Ned said. " In the first place it is useless to
think of leaving this island until we have a sufficient
stock of provisions and water to put in a canoe to last
us until we can get back to Ternate. Did we put into
any island on the way our position might be ten times
as bad as it now is. Here at least we are well treated
and honoured, and, did we choose, could no doubt live
here in a sort of heathen comfort for the rest of our lives,
just as many white sailors on the western isles have
turned natives, and given up all thought of ever return
ing to their own country. The Golden Hind was four
days on her journey from Ternate to the place where she
refitted ; another two to the spot where she went on the
reef. The wind was very light, and her speed was not
above five knots an hour. We should be able to paddle
back in the course of ten days, and must take provisions
sufficient for that time. The first point, of course, will
be to find whether the old ship is still on the reef. If
she is not there she may have succeeded in getting off,

South Sea Idols 307

or she may have gone to pieces. I trust, however, that
the admiral, who is full of resource, has managed to get
her off in safety. He will no doubt have spent a day or
two in looking for us; but finding no signs of us in the
island to which we were sent, or in the other lying in
sight to the southward, he will have shaped his way for
the Cape. The first difficulty then is to procure sufficient
provisions; the next is to make our escape unseen. The
four natives who night and day watch at the corners of
this shed mean it as a great honour, no doubt; but, like
many other honours, it is an unpleasant one. Our only
plan will be to seize and gag them suddenly, each pounc
ing upon one. Then there is the fear that the natives,
who are, I must say, the most restless sleepers I ever
saw, may in their wanderings up to look at us find that
we have gone before we are fairly beyond reach of pursuit,
for one of their great canoes will travel at least two feet
to our one. Hitherto we have only taken such provisions
from the piles they have offered us as were sufficient for
our day's wants, and left the rest for them to take away
again next morning, In future we had best each day
abstract a considerable quantity, and place it conspicu
ously in the centre of this shed. The people will perhaps
wonder, but will probably conclude that we are laying it
by to make a great feast upon our wedding day. As to
water, we must do with the calabashes which they bring
the day before, and with the milk which the cocoas con
tain, and which is to the full as quenching as water.
With a good number of cocoas we ought to be able to
shift for some days without other food, and there is
indeed an abundance of juice in many of the other fruits
which they offer us."

This programme was carried out. Every morning the

308 Under Drake's Flag

lads danced in solemn procession round the hut, lessen
ing their rounds by one each day. Daily the heap of
fruit, dried fish, and vegetables under the shed increased,
and the natives, who believed that their new deities were
intent upon the thoughts of marriage, had no suspicion
whatever of any desire on their part to escape.

Having settled how to prevent their escape being de
tected before morning, they accustomed themselves to go
to sleep with the cloths, woven of the fibre of the palm,
with which the natives had supplied them, pulled over
their heads.

Seven days after the fight with the other islanders the
lads judged that the pile of provisions was sufficiently
large for their purpose, and determined upon making the
attempt that night. A canoe of about the size that they
desired, which had been used during the day for fishing,
lay on the shore close to the water's edge. They waited
until the village was fairly hushed in sleep. An hour
later they believed that the four guards or worshippers,
for it struck them that their attendants partook partly
of both characters, were beginning to feel drowsy, and
each of the boys having furnished himself with a rope
of twisted cocoa-nut fibre, stole quietly up to one of these
men. To place their hands over their mouths, to seize
and throw them upon their faces, was but the work of a
moment, and was accomplished without the least noise,
the natives being paralysed by the sudden and unexpected
assault. A piece of wood was shoved into the mouth
of each as a gag, and secured by a string passing round
the back of the head and holding it in its place. Their
arms and legs were tied, and they were set up against
the posts in the same position they had before occupied.
Four of the great effigies were then taken from their

South Sea Idols 309

places and laid down upon the ground and covered over
with the mats, so that to any casual observer they pre
sented exactly the same appearance as the boys sleeping"
there. Then, loading themselves with provisions, the
boys stole backwards and forwards quietly to the boat.
Once they had to pause, as a sleepless native came out
from his hut, walked up to the shrine, and bowed himself
repeatedly before the supposed deities. Fortunately he
perceived nothing suspicious, and did not notice the con
strained attitude of the four guardians. When he retired
the boys continued their work, and soon had the whole
of the store of cocoas and other provisions in the canoe,
together with some calabashes of water. Then with
some difficulty they launched the boat, and taking their
places, paddled quietly away from the island.

Once fairly beyond the bay they laid themselves to their
work, and the light boat sped rapidly across the waters.
In order that they might be sure of striking the point
where they had left the ship they made first for the island
where they had been captured, and when day broke were
close beside it. They then shaped their course north
wards, and after two hours' paddling were in sight of the
low island which they had first visited. By noon they
reached the spot where, as they judged, the Golden Hind
had gone on the reef; but no sign whatever of her was
to be discovered. By the position in which the island
they had left lay, they were sure that, although they
might be two or three miles out in their direction, they
must be within sight of the vessel were she still remain
ing as they had left her. There had been no great storm
since she had grounded, and it was unlikely, therefore,
that she could have gone entirely to pieces. This afforded
them great ground for hope that she had beaten off the

310 Under Drake's Flag

reef and proceeded on her voyage. Hitherto they had been
buoyed up with the expectation of again meeting their
friends, but they now felt a truly unselfish pleasure at the
thought that their comrades and admiral had escaped the
peril which threatened the downfall of their hopes, and
the termination of an enterprise fairly and successfully
carried out so far.

There was nothing now for them but to make for
Ternate. They found no difficulty whatever in doing
without water, their thirst being amply quenched by the
milk of the cocoas and the juice of the guavas and other
fruits. They paddled for two days longer, working
steadily all day and far into the night, and passed one
or two islands. In the course of the next day's passage
they went within a short distance of another, and were
horrified at seeing from the narrow bay a large war canoe
put out and make rapidly towards them.

They had already talked over what would be their best
course in such a contingency, and proceeded at once to
put their plans into execution. They had, at starting,
taken with them a supply of the paints used in their
decoration, and with these they proceeded to touch up
the colouring on their faces and white shirts, and on the
strange ornaments which had been affixed to their heads.
Two of them now took their place, one at the stern and
the other at the bow of the canoe. The other two stood
up and paddled very quietly and slowly along, and as the
canoe approached rapidly the four broke into a song —
one of the old Devonshire catches which they had often
sung together on board ship. The war canoe as it ap
proached gradually ceased paddling. The aspect of this
small boat paddling quietly along and taking no heed of
their presence filled its occupants with surprise. But

South Sea Idols 311

when the way on their canoe drifted them close to it, and
they were enabled to see the strange character of the
freight, a panic of astonishment and alarm seized them.
That a boat, navigated by four gods, should be seen
proceeding calmly along the ocean alone was a sight for
which Indian legend gave them no precedent whatever,
and after gazing for a while in superstitious dread at the
strange spectacle they turned their boats' head and
paddled rapidly back to shore.

For an hour or two the boys continued their course in
the same leisurely manner; but when once convinced that
they were out of sight of their late visitors they again
sat down, and the four stretched themselves to their work.
On the evening of that day there was a heavy mist upon
the water. The stars were with difficulty seen through
it, and the lads were all convinced that a change of
weather was at hand. Before nightfall had set in, an
island had been seen at a short distance to the north,
and they decided at once to make for this, as if caught
in mid-ocean by a storm they had little hope of weather
ing it in a craft like that in which they were placed,
although the natives, habituated to them, were able to
keep the sea in very rough weather in these little craft,
which, to an English eye, appeared no safer than cockle
shells. The boys rowed with all their strength in the
direction in which the island lay, but before they reached
it sharp puffs of wind struck the water and the steerage
of the canoe became extremely difficult. Presently, how
ever, they heard the sound of a dull roar, and knew that
this was caused by the slow heaving swell, of which they
were already sensible, breaking upon a beach. Ten
minutes later they were close to the shore. Had it been
daylight they would have coasted round the island to

312 Under Drake's Flag

search for a convenient spot for landing, but the wind
was already rising1 so fast that they deemed it better to
risk breaking up their canoe than to run the hazard of
being longer upon the sea. Waiting, therefore, for a
wave, they sped forward with all their strength. There
was a crash, and then they all leaped out together, and
seizing the canoe, ran her up on the beach before the
next wave arrived.

" I fear she has knocked a great hole in her bottom,"
Reuben said.

" Never mind," Ned replied. "We shall be able to
make a shift to mend it. The great point now is to drag
it up so high among the bushes that it will not be noticed
in the morning by any natives who may happen to be
about. Until this storm is over, at any rate, we have
got to shelter here."

The canoe, laden as she still was with provisions, was
too heavy to drag up; but the boys, emptying her out,
lifted her on their shoulders and carried her inland, until
at a distance of some sixty or seventy yards they entered
a grove of cocoanut trees. Here they laid her down,
and made two journeys back to the beach to fetch up
their provisions, and then took refuge in the grove, thank
ful that they had escaped on shore in time, for scarcely
had they landed when the hurricane which had been brew
ing burst with terrific force. Seas of immense height
came rolling in upon the shore. The trees of the grove
waved to and fro before it, and shook the heavy nuts
down with such force that the boys were glad to leave
it and to lie down on the open beach, rather than to run
the risk of having their skulls fractured by these missiles
from above. The sound of the wind deadened their
voices, and even by shouting they could not make them-

South Sea Idols 3*3

selves heard. Now and then, above the din of the storm,
was heard the crash of some falling1 tree, and even as they
lay they were sometimes almost lifted from the ground by
the force of the wind.

For twenty-four hours the hurricane continued, and
then cleared as suddenly as it had commenced. The lads
crept back to the grove, refreshed themselves with the
contents of two or three cocoas apiece, and then, lying
down under the canoe, which they had taken the pre
caution of turning bottom upwards, enjoyed a peacefuJ
sleep till morning.

CHAPTER XX

A Portuguese Settlement

THE day broke bright and sunny. The first care of the
boys was to examine their canoe, and they found, as they
had feared, that a huge hole had been made in her bottom
by the crash against the rocks on landing. They looked
for some time with rueful countenances at it, and then,
as usual, turned to Ned to ask him what he thought had
best be done.

"There can be no doubt," he said, "that the natives
make a sort of glue out of some trees or shrubs growing
in these islands, and we shall have to endeavour to dis
cover the tree from which they obtain it. We can, of
course, easily pull off the bark from some tree which will
do to cover the hole. The great point is to find some
substance which will make it water-tight."

The grove was a very large one, and appeared to ex
tend along the whole coast. Seaward, it was formed
entirely of cocoa trees, but inland a large number of
other trees were mingled with the palms. All day the
boys attempted to find some semblance of gum oozing
from these trees. With sharp pieces of shell they made
incisions in the bark of each variety that they met with
to see if any fluid exuded which might be useful for this
purpose, but in vain.

81*

A Portuguese Settlement 315

" If we can kill some animal or other," Ned said, " we
might boil down its sinews and skin and make glue, as
Tom and myself did, to mend our bows with, among the
Indians on the pampas. But even then I question whether
the glue would stand the action of the water. "

As to their subsistence they had no uneasiness. Besides
the cocoas, fruit of all sorts abounded. In the woods
parrots and other birds flew screaming among the branches
at their approach, and although at present they had no
means of shooting or snaring these creatures, they agreed
that it would be easy to construct bows and arrows should
their stay be prolonged. This, however, they shrank from
doing as long as any possible method of escape presented
itself. Were it absolutely necessary, they agreed that
they could burn down a tree and construct a fresh canoe;
but they were by no means sanguine as to their boat
building capabilities, and were reluctant to give up the
idea of continuing their voyage in their present craft as
long as a possibility of so doing remained. So they
passed four days; but succeeded in finding no gum or
other substance which appeared likely to suit their pur
pose.

" I should think," Reuben said one day, "that it would
be possible to make the canoe so buoyant that she would
not sink, even if filled with water."

"How would you do that?" Tom asked. "There are
many light woods, no doubt, among the trees that we
see, but they would have to remain a long time to dry
to be light enough to be of any use."

"I was thinking," Reuben said, "that we might use
cocoanuts. There are immense quantities upon the trees,
and the ground is covered with them from the effects of
the late gale. If we strip off the whole of the outside

316 Under Drake's Flag

husk and then make holes in the little eyes at the top
and let out the milk, using young ones in which the flesh
has not yet formed, and cutting sticks to fit tightly into
the holes, they would support a considerable weight in the
water. I should think that if we treated several hundred
nuts in this way, put them in the bottom of the canoe,
and kept them in their places by a sort of net which we
might easily make from the fibres of the cocoas, the boat
would be buoyant enough to carry us."

The idea struck all as being feasible, and Reuben was
much congratulated upon his inventive powers. Without
delay they set to work to carry out the plan. A piece
of thin bark was first taken, and by means of a long
thorn used as a needle, was sewn over the hole in the
canoe with the fibres of the cocoa. Then a large pile of
nuts was collected, and the boys set to work at the task
of emptying them of their contents. It took them some
hours' work to make and fit the pegs. Another two days
were spent in manufacturing a net to stretch across the
boat above them. The nuts were then placed in the boat,
the net put into shape, and choosing a calm night for their
trial — for they feared during the daytime to show them
selves beyond the margin of the forest — they placed it
in the water, and paddled a short distance out.

They found that their anticipations were justified, and
that the flotation of the cocoas was amply sufficient to
keep the boat afloat. She was, of course, far lower in
the water than she had before been, and her pace was
greatly deteriorated. This, however, they had expected,
and returning to shore they watched for the next night.
Then, taking in a load of provisions, they started at once
upon their way. It was weary work now, for the water
logged canoe was a very different boat to the light bark

A Portuguese Settlement 317

which had yielded so easily to their strokes. Fortunately,
however, they met with no misadventure. The weather
continued calm. They were unseen, or at least not fol
lowed, from any of the islands that they passed on their
way. But it was ten days after their final start before
a large island, which they all recognized as Ternate, was
seen rising above the water.

"Easy all," Ned said. "We may be thankful indeed
that we have arrived safely in sight of the island. But
now that we are close, and there is no fear of tempests,
had we not better talk over whether, after all, we shall
land at Ternate?"

"Not land at Ternate?" the others exclaimed in con
sternation, for, indeed, the work during the last few
days had been very heavy, and they were rejoicing at
the thought of an end to their labours. " Why, we
thought it was arranged all along we should stop at
Ternate."

" Yes, but we arranged that because at Ternate alone
there seemed a certainty of a welcome. But, as you know,
Tidore only lies twelve miles away from Ternate, and
from the position we are now in it will not be more than
five or six miles farther. You see when we were there
the king was preparing for a war with the Portuguese in
Tidore, and he would certainly expect us to assist him,
and probably to lead his fighting men."

"But we should have no objection to that," Reuben
said.

"Not in the least," Ned replied. "But you see if we
are ever to get back to England it must be through the
Portuguese. Their ships alone are to be found in these
seas, and were we to join the King of Ternate in an attack
upon them, whether successful or not, we could never hope

318 Under Drake's Flag

to be received in Portuguese ships, and should probably,
indeed, be taken to Goa, and perhaps burned there as
heretics, if we were to seek an asylum on board. What
do you think?"

Viewed in this light it certainly appeared more prudent
to go to Tidore, and after some little discussion the boat's
head was turned more to the west, and the lads continued
their weary work in paddling- the water-logged canoe. So
slowly did she move that it was late at night before they
approached the island. They determined not to land till
morning, as they might be mistaken for natives and
attacked. They, therefore, lay down in the canoe and
went to sleep, when within about a mile of the island;
and the next morning paddled along its shore until they
saw some canoes hauled up together with an English boat,
and supposed that they were at the principal landing-place
of the island.

On either side of the landing-place the cliffs rose steeply
up at a short distance from the beach. But at this point
a sort of natural gap existed, up which the road ascended
into the interior of the island. There were several natives
moving about on the beach as the boys approached, and
one of these was seen at once to start at a run up the
road. The lads had carefully removed all vestige of the
paint from their faces and hands, and having put on their
doublets, concealed the strange appearance presented be
fore by their white shirts. No resistance was opposed to
their landing; but the natives motioned to them that they
must not advance inland until a messenger returned from
the governor. The boys were only too glad to throw
themselves down full length on the soft sand of the beach,
and to dry their clothes in the sun, as for ten days they
had been constantly wet, and were stiff and tired.

A Portuguese Settlement 319

Presently a native came down at a run, and announced
that the governor was at hand. Rising- to their feet
and making the best show they could in their faded
garments, the lads soon saw a Portuguese gentleman
attended by four soldiers coming down the road between
the cliffs.

" Who are you?" he asked in Portuguese as he reached
them, "and whence come you?"

"We are Englishmen," Ned said in Spanish. "We
belong to the ship of Captain Drake, which passed by
here in its voyage of circumnavigation. By an accident
we in the canoe were separated from the ship and left
behind. We have come to seek your hospitality and
protection."

"We heard of an English vessel at Ternate," the
governor said sternly, " some weeks since, and heard
also that its captain was making an alliance with the
king there against us."

"It was not so," Ned said. "The admiral stopped
there for a few days to obtain supplies such as he needed;
but we are not here either to make alliances or to trade.
Captain Drake on starting intended to voyage round the
coast of America, and to return, if possible, by the north.
After coasting up the western shores of that continent he
found that it would be impossible to pass round the north,
as the coast extended so rapidly toward the north of Asia.
He, therefore, started to return by the Cape, and on his
way passed through these islands. Had it been part of
his plan to make alliances with the King of Ternate or
any other potentate he would have stopped and done so,
and would have given his armed assistance to the king.
But his object was simply to return as quickly as possible.
Had there been any alliance made, we should naturally

$20 Under Drake's Flag

have made for Ternate instead of this island. But as we
have no relations with the king, and seek only means of
returning' to Europe, we preferred, of course, to come
here, where we knew that we should find Christians, and,
we hoped, friends."

There was palpable truth in what Ned said, and the
governor, unbending, expressed his readiness to receive
and help them. He then asked a few more questions
about the manner in which they had become separated
from their friends; and seeing no advantage in concealing
the truth, and thinking perhaps that it would be well, if
an opportunity should offer, that the governor should send
a vessel to search among the islands near where the
wreck took place, and see if any of the crew had sought
refuge there, they told him frankly the circumstances under
which they had left the Golden Hind.

"It would be sad indeed," said the Portuguese, "if so
grand an expedition under so noble a commander should
have been wrecked after accomplishing such a work. We
in these parts are not friendly to any European meddling.
His Holiness the Pope granted us all discoveries on this
side of the Cape, and we would fain trade in peace and
quiet without interference. But we can admire the great
deeds and enterprise of your countrymen, and indeed," he
said smiling — for the Portuguese are as a rule a very small
race — and looking at the bulk of the four young men,
which was, indeed, almost gigantic by the side of himself
and his soldiers, " I am scarcely surprised, now I see you,
at the almost legendary deeds which I hear that your
countrymen have performed on the Spanish Main. But
now, follow me to my castle, and I will there provide
you with proper appliances. What position did you hold
In the ship?"

A Portuguese Settlement 321

"We are gentlemen of Devonshire," Ned said, "and
bore a share in the enterprise, sailing as gentlemen ad
venturers under Captain Drake. I myself held the rank
of third officer in the ship."

"Then, senors," the Portuguese said bowing, "I am
happy to place myself and my house at your disposal. It
may be that you will be able to render me services which
will far more than repay any slight inconvenience or
trouble to which I may be put, for we hear that the King
of Ternate is preparing a formidable expedition against us,
and as my garrison is a very small one and the natives
are not to be relied upon to fight against those of the
other island, the addition of four such experienced soldiers
as yourselves will, in no slight degree, strengthen us."

The boys replied that their swords were at the service
of their host ; and, well content with the turn things had
taken, they proceeded with him up the road into the in
terior of the island. Upon gaining the higher land they
were surprised at the aspect of the island. In place of
the almost unbroken forest which they had beheld in other
spots at which they had landed, here was fair cultivated
land. Large groves of spice trees grew here and there,
and the natives were working in the fields with the regu
larity of Europeans. The Portuguese method of culti
vating the islands which they took differed widely from
that of the English. Their first step was to compel the
natives to embrace Christianity; their second to make of
them docile and obedient labourers, raising spice and
other products, for which they received in payment calico,
beads, and European goods.

The castle, which stood in the centre of a small plain,
was built of stone roughly hewn and was of no strength
which would have resisted any European attack, but was

(162) 21

322 Under Drake's Flag

well calculated for the purpose for which it was designed.
It consisted of a pleasant house standing in an enclosure,
round which was a wall some fifteen feet in height, with
a platform running behind it to enable its garrison to
shoot over the top. A ditch of some ten feet in depth
and fifteen feet wide surrounded it, so that without scaling
ladders to ascend the walls or cannon to batter holes in
them, the place could be well held against any attack that
the natives might make upon it. The garrison was not
a formidable one, consisting only of some thirty Portu
guese soldiers, whose appearance did not speak much for
the discipline maintained. Their uniforms were worn and
rusty in the extreme. They were slovenly in appearance,
and wore a look of discontent and hopelessness. A large
portion of them, indeed, had been criminals, and had been
offered the choice of death or of serving for ten years,
which generally meant for life, in the eastern seas. Ned
judged that no great reliance could be placed upon this
army of scarecrows in the event of an attack of a serious
character.

" My men would scarcely show to advantage at home,"
the governor said, noting the glance of surprise with
which the boys had viewed them. " But in a country
like this, with such great heat and no real occasion for
more than appearances, it is hopeless to expect them to
keep up the smartness which would at home be necessary.
The natives are very docile and quiet and give us no
trouble whatever, and were it not for interference from
Ternate, where the people are of a much more warlike
nature, the guard which I have would be ample for any
purposes. I am expecting a vessel which calls here
about once in six months, very shortly, and anticipate
that she will bring me some twenty more soldiers for

A Portuguese Settlement 323

whom I wrote to the viceroy at Goa when she last called
here."

"What is your latest news from Ternate?" Ned
asked.

"I have no direct news," he said. "What we know
we gather from the natives, who, by means of canoes
and fishing boats, are often in communication with those
of the opposite island. They tell me that great prepara
tions are being made, that several of the largest sized
canoes have been built, and that they believe when it is
full moon, which is generally the era at which they com
mence their adventures, there will be a descent upon this
island."

"Then you have seven days in which to prepare," Ned
said. " Have you been doing anything to enable you to
receive them hotly?"

" I have not," the governor said. " But now that you
gentlemen have come I doubt not that your experience
in warfare will enable you to advise me as to what steps
I had better take. I stand at present alone here. The
officer who, under me, commanded the garrison died two
months since, and I myself, who was brought up in a
civil rather than a military capacity, am, I own to you,
strange altogether to these matters."

Ned expressed the willingness of himself and his friends
to do all in their power to advise and assist the governor;
and with many mutual compliments they now entered the
house, where a goodly room was assigned to them; some
natives told off as their servants; and the governor at
once set two native seamsters to work to manufacture
garments of a proper cut for them from materials which
he had in a storehouse for trading with the neighbouring
chiefs, who, like all savages, were greatly given to finery.

324 Under Drake's Flag

Thus by the end of the week the boys were able once more
to make a show which would have passed muster in a
European capital. At the governor's request they had
at once proceeded to drill the soldiers, Ned and Gerald
taking each the command of a company of fifteen men,
as they understood Spanish and could readily make them
selves understood in Portuguese; whereas Tom and
Reuben knew but little of the Spanish tongue.

" I think," Tom said the first morning to the governor
after the friends had discussed the prospect together, "it
would be well to throw up some protection at the top of
the road leading from the shore. I should order some
large trees to be cut down and dragged by a strong force
of natives to the spot, and there so arranged that their
branches will point downward and form a chevaux de /rise
in the hollow way, leaving until the last moment a pas
sage between them, but having at hand a number of
young saplings to fill up the gap. There are, I suppose,
other places at which the enemy could land?"

"Oh, yes!" the governor said. "On the other side
of the island the land slopes gradually down to the shore,
and indeed it is only for a few miles at this point that the
cliffs rise so abruptly that they could not be ascended.
Yet even here there are many points which a native could
easily scale, although we in our accoutrements would find
it impossible."

While Ned and Gerald drilled their men with great
assiduity, astonishing the Portuguese soldiers with their
energy and authoritative manner, Tom and Reuben occu
pied themselves in superintending the felling of the trees,
and their carriage, by means of a large number of natives,
to the top of the road. Preparations were also made for
blocking up the lower windows of the house, so that in

A Portuguese Settlement 325

case of the enemy succeeding in carrying the outer wall
a stout resistance could be made within. Large piles
of provisions were stored in the building, and great jars
of water placed there.

M Are you sure," Ned asked the governor one evening,
"of the natives here? for I own that there appears to me
to be a sullen defiance in their manner, and I should not
be surprised to see them turn upon us immediately those
from the other island arrive. If they did so, of course
our position at the top of the road would be untenable,
as they would take us in the rear. However, if they do
so, I doubt not that we shall be able to cut our way
back to the castle without difficulty. I think that it
would be in any case advisable to leave at least ten
men to hold the castle, while the rest of us oppose the
landing."

There were in store four small culverins and several
light wall-pieces. Two of the culverins were placed on
the cliff, one at each side of the path, so as to command
the landing. Two others were placed on the roof of the
castle, which was flat and terraced. The wall -pieces
were also cleaned and placed in position at the corners
of the walls, and the boys, having seen that the mus-
ketoons and arquebuses of the garrison were in excellent
order and .ready for service, felt that all had been done
that was possible to prepare for an attack.

The day before the full moon a sentinel was placed at
the cliff with orders to bring word instantly to the castle
in case any craft were seen coming from Ternate, the
distance from the cliff to the house being about a mile.
A short time after daybreak next morning the sentry
arrived at full speed, saying that a great fleet of canoes
was visible. Hurrying to the spot with the governor, the

326 Under Drake's Flag

lads made out that the approaching- flotilla consisted of
eighteen great war canoes, each of which, crowded as it
was, might contain a hundred men; and in addition to
these were a large number of smaller craft. The invading
force, therefore, would considerably exceed two thousand
men. Reuben had the command of a gun at one side,
Tom at the other, and these now loaded and sighted
their pieces so as to pour a volley of case-shot into the
canoes when they arrived within a quarter of a mile from
shore.

The canoes came along in a dense body, as close to
gether as they could paddle, their rowers filling the air
with defiant yells. When they reached the spot upon
which the guns had been trained Tom fired his piece, and
its roar was answered by wild screams and yells from the
crowded fleet. Reuben followed suit, and the destruction
wrought by the guns was at once manifest. Three of the
great canoes were broken to pieces, and their occupants
swimming in the water climbed into the others, among
which also a great many men had been wounded. The
effect of this reception upon the valour of the natives was
very speedy. Without a moment's delay they backed off,
and were soon seen making out of range of the guns,
like a troop of wild fowl scattered by the shot of a
fowler.

"They have a horror of cannon," the governor said
exultingly, as he witnessed their departure. " If we
had a few more pieces I should have no fear of the
result."

The dispersal of the canoes continued only until they
thought that they were out of range; for although the
lads now sent several round shot at them, these did not
produce any effect, the canoes being but small objects

A Portuguese Settlement 327

to hit at a distance when on the move, and the culverins
being old pieces, and but little adapted for accurate
shooting.

The fleet were soon seen to gather again, and after a
little pause they started in a body as before along the
coast.

"They are going to make a landing elsewhere," Ned
said, "and we shall have to meet them in the open. It
is a pity that we have no beasts of burden to which to
harness our pieces; for as these are only ships' guns it
is impossible for us to drag them at a speed which would
enable us to oppose their landing. Where are all the
natives?"

At the first alarm a large body of the islanders had
assembled upon the cliff, but in the excitement of watch
ing the approaching enemy their movements had not been
noticed. It was now seen that the whole of them had
left the spot, and not a single native was in sight.

"I think," Ned said, "we had better fall back and
take up a position near the house, and repel their attack
with the assistance of the guns mounted there. With
muskets only we should not have much chance of pre
venting their landing, and indeed they will row much
faster along the coast than we could run to keep up with
them."

The governor agreed in the justice of Ned's view, and
the whole force were now ordered to fall back towards
the castle. As they proceeded they saw large bodies of
the natives. These, however, kept at a distance; but
their exultant shouts showed that they must be considered
to have gone over to the enemy.

" I will make you pay for this," the governor said,
stamping his foot and shaking his fist angrily in their

328 Under Drake's Flag

direction. " Each man shall have to furnish double the
amount of spice for half the amount of calico for the next
five years. Ungrateful dogs! when we have done so
much for them!"

Ned could scarcely help smiling to himself at the
thought of the many benefits which the Portuguese had
bestowed upon these unfortunate islanders, whom they
had reduced from a state of happy freedom to one
which, whatever it might be called, was but little short
of slavery.

It was late in the evening before great numbers of the
enemy were seen approaching, and these, swelled as they
were by the population of the island, appeared a formid
able body indeed by the side of the handful of white men
who were drawn up to defend the place. The enemy,
numerous as he was, appeared indisposed to commence
a fight at once, but began, to the fierce indignation of
the governor, to cut down the groves of spice trees and
to build great fires with them.

" I don't think that they will attack until to-morrow,"
Ned said, "and it would be well, therefore, to withdraw
within the walls, to plant sentries, and to allow the men
to rest. We shall want all our strength when the battle
begins."

" Do you think," the governor asked when they were
seated in his room, and had finished the repast which had
been prepared, " that it will be well to sally out to meet
them in the open? Thirty white men ought to be able
to defeat almost any number of these naked savages."

" If we had horses I should say yes," Ned said, " be
cause then by our speed we could make up for our lack
of numbers, and, wheeling about, could charge through
and through them. But they are so light and active in

A Portuguese Settlement 329

comparison to ourselves that we should find it difficult,
if not impossible, to bring- them to a hand-to-hand con
flict. We have, indeed, the advantage of our musketoons;
but I observed at Ternate that many of the men have
muskets, and the sound of firearms would therefore in no
way alarm them. With their bows and arrows they can
shoot more steadily at short distances than we can, and
we should be overwhelmed with a cloud of missiles, while
unable to bring to bear the strength of our arms and the
keenness of our swords against their clubs and rough
spears. I think that we could hold the house for a year
against them ; but if we lost many men in a fight outside
it might go hard with us afterwards."

When morning dawned the garrison beheld to their
dismay that the Indians had in the night erected a battery
at a quarter of a mile in front of the gate, and that in
this they had placed the culverins left on the cliff, and a
score of the small pieces carried in their war canoes.

"This is the work of the two white men we saw at
Ternate," Gerald exclaimed. "No Indian could have
built a battery according fo this fashion."

As soon as it was fairly light the enemies' fire opened,
and was answered by the culverins on the roof of the
house. The latter were much more quickly and better
directed than those of the Indians, but many of the balls
of the latter crashed through the great gates.

"Shall we make a sortie?" the governor asked
Ned.

"I think that we had better wait for nightfall," he
replied. " In passing across this open ground we should
lose many men from the cannon shots, and with so small
a force remaining, might not be able to resist the onrush
of so great numbers. Let us prepare, however, to prop

330 Under Drake's Flag

up the gates should they fall, and to-night we will silence
their guns."

At nightfall the gates, although sorely bruised and
battered and pierced in many places, still stood, being
shored up with beams from behind. At ten o'clock twenty
of the garrison were let down by ropes at the back of the
castle, for Ned thought that scouts might be lurking near
the gates to give notice of any sortie. With great pre
caution and in perfect silence they made a way round, and
were within a hundred yards of the battery before their
approach was discovered. Then, headed by the governor,
who was a valiant man by nature, and the four English,
they ran at great speed forward, and were inside the
battery before the enemy could gather to resist them.
The battle was indeed a hard one, for the Indians with
their clubs fought valorously. Reuben and Tom, having
been furnished with hammer and long nails, proceeded to
spike the guns, which they did with great quickness,
their doings being covered alike by their friends and by
darkness. When they had finished their task they gave
the signal, and the Portuguese, being sorely pressed, fell
back fighting strongly to the castle, where the gates were
opened to receive them. In this sortie they lost eight
men. The next morning at dawn the natives, being
gathered in large numbers, came on to the assault utter
ing loud and fierce cries. The cannon on the roof, which
were under the charge of Tom and Reuben, at once
opened fire upon them, while the soldiers upon the walls
shot briskly with their musketoons. The natives, how
ever, appeared determined to succeed, and firing a cloud
of arrows pushed forward towards the gate. Among
them were borne, each by some thirty natives, long trees,
and this party, surrounded by the main body, proceeded

A Portuguese Settlement 331

rapidly towards the gate, which, damaged as it was, they
hoped easily to overthrow.

The fire of the two culverins was, however, so deadly,
and the concentrated discharge of the musketoons upon
them as they advanced so fatal, that after trying several
times to approach close to the gate, the natives dropped
the great logs and fled

CHAPTER XXI

Wholesale Conversion

THAT day and the three which followed passed without
adventure. The natives were seen ravaging the fields,
destroying" the plantations, and doing terrible damage,
to the intense exasperation of the Portuguese governor.
But they did not show any signs of an intention to attack
the castle.

" I believe," Ned said on the fourth day, "that they
have determined to starve us out. They must know that,
however large our stock of provisions, they will not last for
ever, and indeed they will have learned from the men who
bore them in something of the amount of stock which we
have. It will last, you say, for two months, which would
be little enough were it not that we are expecting the ship
you spoke of. If that comes shortly we shall, with the
additional force which it is bringing, and the crew, who
will no doubt aid, be able to attack them in the open.
But were it not for that our position would be a bad one."

"I fear," Tom said, "that even when the ship arrives
evil may come of it."

" How is that, Tom?" Ned asked.

"The captain will know nothing of what is passing on
shore, and if he lands his men incautiously upon the beach,
and advances in this direction, the natives will fall upon

332

Wholesale Conversion 333

them, and, taking them by surprise, cut them to pieces,
and our last hope will then be gone."

" But we might sally out and effect a diversion," Reuben
said.

"Yes," Tom replied; "but, unfortunately, we should
not know of the arrival of the ship until all is over."

It was clear to all that Tom's view was the correct one,
and that the position was much more serious than they
had anticipated. For some time the governor and the
four young men looked at each other blankly. The de
struction of the reinforcements, which would be followed
no doubt by the capture of the ship by the war canoes
and the massacre of all on board, would indeed be fatal
to their hopes. After what they had seen of the deter
mination with which the enemy had come up to attack
the gate, they were sure that they would fight valiantly
outside. The question of sallying forth was again dis
cussed, and all were of opinion that, unequal as the fight
would be, it were better to attempt to defeat the enemy
than to remain quiet and allow them to triumph over the
coming reinforcements.

" Upon what day do you think the ship will arrive?"
Ned said after considerable thought.

"I cannot say to a day," the governor replied; "but
she should be here this week. There is no exact time,
because she has to touch at several other islands. She
leaves Goa always on a certain day; but she takes many
weeks on her voyage even if the wind be favourable. She
might have been here a week since. She may not be here
for another fortnight. But unless something unforeseen
has occurred she should be here by that time, for the
winds are steady in these regions and the rate of sailing
is regular."

334 Under Drake's Flag

"The one chance, it appears to me," Ned said after
thinking1 for some time, "is to give them warning of
what is happening here."

" But how is that to be done?" asked the governor.

"The only possible plan," Ned said, " would be for one
of us — and I should be ready to accept the duty, knowing
more perhaps of the ways of natives than the others — to
steal forth from the castle, to make for the shore, and
to lie concealed among the woods until the vessel is in
sight. If then I could find a canoe, to seize it and paddle
off to the ship; if not, to swim."

The other lads eagerly volunteered to undertake the
work; but Ned insisted that he was better suited to it,
not only from his knowledge of the natives, but from his
superior powers in swimming1.

" I may have," he said, " to keep myself up in the water
for a long time, and perhaps to swim for my life if the
natives see me. It is even desirable, above all things,
that whosoever undertakes the work should be a good
swimmer, and although you have long ago given up calling
me 'the Otter', I do not suppose that my powers in the
water have diminished."

After long consultation, it was agreed that this plan
offered more chances of success than any other.

"It would be most desirable," Gerald said, "that we
should have some notice here of the ship being in sight,
in order that we might sally out and lend a hand to our
friends on their arrival. I will, therefore, if you will allow
me, go with Ned, and when the ship is in sight I will
make my way back here while he goes off to the vessel."

"But it will be impossible," Ned said, "to make your
way back here in the daytime. I can steal out at night;
but to return unnoticed would be difficult indeed."

Wholesale Conversion 335

" But when you see the ship, Ned, and get on board,
you might warn them to delay their landing until the
next morning, and in the night I might enter here with
the news, and we might sally out at daybreak."

This plan appeared to offer more advantages than any
other, and it was agreed at last that the two lads should,
having darkened their skins and put on Indian dress, steal
out that night from the castle and make for the shore.
Tom and Reuben regretted much that they could not take
part in the enterprise; but the governor assured them
that even were it desirable that four should undertake
the mission, they could not be spared, since their presence
would be greatly needed in the castle should the natives,
before the arrival of the ship, make an attack upoil it.

That night Ned and Gerald, according to the arrange
ment, stole out from the castle. Their skins had been
darkened from head to foot. Round their waists they
wore short petticoats, reaching to their knees, of native
stuff. They had sandals on their feet, for, as Ned said,
if they were seen close by the natives they were sure to
be detected in any case, and sandals would not show at
a short distance, while they would enable them to run at
full speed, which they certainly could not do barefooted.
They took with them a bag of provisions, and each carried
a sword. Reuben had pressed upon them to take pistols
also; but Ned said, that if cut off and detected, pistols
would be of no use, as nothing but running would carry
them through, while should a pistol be fired inadvertently
it would call such a number of assailants upon them that
their escape would be impossible. A thrust with a sword
did its work silently, and just as well as a pistol bullet.

The natives apparently had no fear of any attempt at
a sally from the castle, for there was nothing like a watch

336 Under Drake's Flag

set round it, although near the entrance a few men were
stationed to give warning should the garrison sally out
to make a sudden attack upon the invaders. The natives
were, for the most part, scattered about in small parties,
and once or twice the lads nearly fell in with these; but
by dint of keeping their ears and eyes open they steered
through the dangers, and arrived safely upon the coast
at a point two miles to the west of the landing-place.

Here the cliff had nearly sloped away, the height being
only some twenty or thirty feet above the water, and being
practicable in many cases for descent; while behind lay
a large wood in which concealment was easy, except in
the case of an organized search, of which they had no
fear whatever. The next morning they made along the
shore as far as the point where the native war canoes
had been pulled up, in hopes of finding some canoe small
enough for Ned to use for rowing off to the ship. But
none of them rowed less than twelve or fourteen paddles,
and so cumbrous a boat as this would be overtaken in
a very short time should it be seen making out from
shore. Ned therefore determined to swim out, especially
as they observed that a watch was kept both day and
night near the canoes. Five days passed in concealment.
The cocoanuts afforded them both food and drink. Occa
sionally they heard the boom of the culverins at the castle,
and knew that the natives were showing within range;
but as these shots were only heard at times, they were
assured that no persistent attack was being made.

It was late in the afternoon of the fifth day that the
lads observed a sail in the distance. It was indeed so
far away that, as the light was fading, they could not
say with absolute certainty that it was the longed-for
ship. They both felt convinced, however, that they had

THE MESSAGE FROM THE GOVERNOR

Pags 33S

Wholesale Conversion 337

seen a sail, and watched intently as night darkened for
some sign of its passage. It was four hours later when
they saw passing along at a distance of about half a mile
a light on the ocean which could be no other than that
on board a ship.

" Now is the time," Ned said. " I will keep along the
shore under the cliff until I get nearly to the landing and
will then strike out. Do you make for the castle, and tell
them that the ship has arrived, and that we will attack
to-morrow, but not at daybreak, as we proposed, but
at noon."

As Ned proceeded on his way along the shore he Saw
suddenly blaze up far ahead at the landing-place a small
bonfire.

"Ah!" he muttered to himself. "The natives have
seen the ship too, and are following the usual custom
here of making a fire to show them where to land. I
trust that they will not fall into the share."

When, however, he had reached within a quarter of a
mile of the landing he saw a small boat corri6 suddenly
within its range of light, and two white men Step out
of it. They were received apparently With much respect
by the natives assembled there, and at once advanced
up the road, while the boat, putting off, disappeared in
the darkness.

"They will be murdered," Ned said to himself, "before
they have gone a hundred yards. The natives were crafty
enough to allow them to land without hindrance in order
that no suspicion might arise among those on board ship."

In the stillness of the night he thought that he heard
a distant cry. But he was not sure that his ears had not
deceived him. Far out he could see a faint light, and
knowing that this marked the place where the ship was

338 Under Drake's Flag

moored he prepared to strike out for it. It was a long-
swim and farther than he had expected, for in the dark
ness the captain, unable to see the land, had prudently
anchored at a considerable distance from it. Even, how
ever, had it been several times as far Ned could have
swum the distance without difficulty; but the whole way
he could not forget that those seas swarmed with sharks,
and that any moment he might have to encounter one
of those hideous monsters. He had left his sword behind
him, but carried a dagger, and, as he swam, kept his
eyes in all directions in order that he should not be
attacked unprepared. The ocean was, however, fortu
nately, at that time, deserted by these beasts; or if they
were in the neighbourhood, the quiet, steady, noiseless
stroke of the swimmer did not reach their ears. As he
neared the ship his heart rose, and he sang out blithely,
"Ship ahoy!"

" Hullo!" was the reply. " Where are you? I cannot
see your boat."

" I am swimming," Ned answered. "Throw me a rope
to climb up the side. I have a message from the governor
for the captain of the ship."

A minute later Ned stood upon the deck of the Portu
guese vessel, the soldiers and sailors looking on wonder-
ingly at him, his body being white, but his face still
coloured by the preparation.

The captain himself soon appeared.

" I am the bearer of a message to you, senor, from the
governor," Ned said. " It is here in this hollow reed.
He gives you but few particulars, but I believe tells you
that you may place every confidence in me, and that I
have detailed instructions from him."

The captain split open the little reed which Ned handed

Wholesale Conversion 339

to him, and taking out a paper coiled within it, opened
it, and by the light of a lantern read: "We are m a
very critical position, and it will need at once courage
and prudence to come out of it. I have sent my friend
Don Eduardo Hearne, an English gentleman of repute,
to warn you against the danger which threatens, and to
advise you on your further proceedings. He will give
you all particulars."

The captain invited Ned to follow him to his cabin, and
calling in the officers, asked for an explanation of this
singular visit. Ned briefly entered into an account of
the landing of the natives of Ternate, and of the present
situation, and the captain rejoiced at the escape which he
had had from falling into an ambuscade; this he would
assuredly have done had he landed the troops in the
morning as he had intended, and marched them inland,
fearing no danger, and unprepared for attack.

Ned explained that the plan was that the troops on
board the ship should land and fight their way into the
interior, and that simultaneously the garrison should sally
out and attack the natives in the rear, and fight their
way towards each other, until they effected a junction.
They could then retire into the castle, where their future
plans could be arranged.

" I have, however," Ned said, "ventured to modify that
plan, and have sent word to the governor that we shall
not attack until noon, instead of landing at daybreak, as
before arranged. We have been examining the position
where the canoes are lying. They are all hauled up on
the beach in a compact body. It is in a quiet creek whose
mouth you would sail past without suspectmg its exist
ence. I cannot say, of course, the depth of water, but
these creeks are generally deep, and I should think that

340 Under Drake's Flag

there would be enough water for the ship to float. At
any rate, should you not like to venture this, your pinnace
might row in, carrying a gun in her bow, and might play
havoc among the canoes. Or, better still, if you could
send two boatloads of men there to-night and could
manage to land and destroy a portion of the canoes and
launch and tow out the others, I think that we should
have a fair chance of getting peace. The natives would
be terrified at the loss of their canoes, and would be likely
to make any terms which would ensure their return to
their island."

The captain at once agreed to the proposition. The
three boats of the ship were lowered, and the sailors and
soldiers took their places, only two or three being left on
board ship, as there was no fear whatever of an attack
from the shore during the night. Ned took his place in
the leading boat of the captain, and acted as guide. They
coasted along at a short distance from the land, until Ned
told them to cease rowing.

"We must," he said, "be close to the spot now; but
it is needful that one boat should go forward and find
the exact entrance to the creek."

Rowing very quietly, the boat in which he was advanced
until within a few yards of the shore, and then proceeded
quietly along for a distance of a few hundred yards, when
the black line of shore disappeared, and a streak of water
was seen stretching inland. Quietly they rowed back to
the other two boats, and the three advancing, entered the
creek together. Before starting, each officer had been
assigned his work. The crew of one of the boats, con
sisting principally of soldiers, were to land, to advance
a short distance inland and to repulse any attacks that
the natives might make upon them, Another party were

Wholesale Conversion 341

to stave in all the small canoes, and this done, they <vere
to assist the third boat's crew in launching the war canoes
into the water.

As they approached the spot they were hailed in the
Indian tongue by someone on shore. No reply was
given, and the hail was repeated louder. Then, as the
boats rowed rapidly up to the place where the canoes
were hauled up, a shrill yell of alarm was given, which
was re-echoed in several directions near, and could be
heard growing fainter and fainter as it was caught up
by men inland.

The moment the boats touched the shore the men leaped
out. The soldiers advanced, and took up the position
assigned to them to defend the working parties, while the
rest set to vigorously to carry out their portion of the work.
The war canoes were heavy, and each required the efforts
of the whole of the crew to launch her into the water. It
was therefore a work of considerable time to get fifteen of
them afloat, and long ere this had been done the natives,
called together by the alarm, were flocking down in great
numbers. They were, however, in entire ignorance as to
the number of their assailants, and the fire which the
soldiers opened with their arquebuses checked them in
their advance. Feeling sure that their canoes were being
destroyed, they filled the air with yells of lamentation and
rage, discharging such volleys of arrows at random in the
direction of the Portuguese, that a great number of these
were wounded. Indeed, the natives pressed on with such
audacity that a considerable portion of the workers had to
go forward to assist the soldiers in holding them at bay.

At last, however, the whole of the canoes were in the
water, and every other boat disabled. The canoes were
tied together, five abreast, and one of the boats towed

34* Under Drake's Flag

these out of the harbour, while the crews of the others
remained keeping the natives at bay, for it was felt that if
the whole were to embark at once while still encumbered
with the canoes they would be able to get out of the creek
but slowly, and would for the most part be destroyed by
the arrows of the natives.

When the boat had towed the canoes well out to sea it
cast them adrift and returned up the creek. Then, covered
by the muskets of the soldiers, the others took their places
in good order and regularity until at last all were in the
boats. The soldiers were ordered to stand up and to keep
up a steady fire upon the shore, while the sailors laid to
with a hearty goodwill. The natives rushed down to the
shore in great numbers, and although many of them must
have fallen under the fire of the soldiers, they yet waded
into the water in their anxiety to seize the boats, and
poured large numbers of arrows into them. When the
three boats gained the open sea there were few indeed of
the Portuguese who had not received wounds more or less
severe by the arrows, and several had been killed in addi
tion to others who had fallen on shore. The soldiers had
suffered much less severely than the sailors, for although
they had been more hotly engaged, their breast-pieces and
steel caps had protected them, and they were principally
wounded in the limbs.

The canoes were now picked up, and with these in tow
the party returned to the ship. Here their wounds were
dressed by a priest who accompanied the vessel in her
voyages, landing at the different stations and ministering
to the garrisons of the islands. He had some knowledge
of the healing art, and poured soothing oils into the wounds
inflicted by the arrows. The men were much alarmed lest
these arrows should be poisoned, but Ned assured them

Wholesale Conversion 343

that none of those who had been wounded during the
attacks on shore had died from the effects, and that,
although it was the custom in many of these islands to
use poisoned weapons, the people of Ternate at least did
not practise this barbarous usage.

Morning was just breaking as the party gained the ship,
and the captain was glad that Ned had postponed the
landing until mid-day, as it gave the tired men time to
rest and prepare themselves for fresh labours. As soon
as the shore could be seen it was evident that the destruc
tion and carrying off of the canoes had created an immense
impression. The cliff was lined with natives, whose ges
ticulations as they saw their canoes fastened to the stern
of the ship were wild and vehement.

A little before noon the boats were hauled up alongside,
the soldiers took their places in them with loaded arque
buses, and as many sailors as could be spared also entered
to assist in their advance. The ship carried several pieces
of artillery, and these were loaded so as to open fire before
the landing was effected, in order to clear the shore of the
enemy. This was soon accomplished, and the natives
who had assembled on the beach were seen streaming up
the road through the cliff. This was the most dangerous
part that the advancing party would have to traverse, as
they would be exposed to a heavy fire from those standing
above them on both flanks. They would have suffered
indeed very severely had not the captain turned his guns
upon the masses gathered on the high ground, and, by
one or two lucky shots plumped into the middle of them,
created such an effect that the fire of arrows kept up upon
the troops as they advanced was wild and confused.
Several of the sailors were severely wounded, but the
soldiers, well sheltered by their mail, pressed on and

344 Under Drake's Flag

gained the level ground, their blood being fired as they
went, by the spectacle of the dead Bodies of their first
officer and supercargo, who had landed the night before.

Here the natives were assembled in great force, and as
they were now out of sight of those on board ship the
guns could no longer render assistance to the little party.
These showed a good front as the masses of the enemy
approached them, and charged boldly at them. The
natives, however, maddened by the loss of their canoes,
and feeling that their only hope was in annihilating their
enemies, came on with such force, wielding heavy clubs,
that the array of the Portuguese was broken, and in a
short time each was fighting desperately for himself.
Several had been stricken down, and although large num
bers of the natives had been killed it was plain that the
victory would in a few minutes be decided, when suddenly
a great shout was heard, and a volley of musketry was
poured into the rear of the natives. The hard-pressed
whites gave a cheer, for they knew that assistance had
arrived from the castle. The natives, whose attention
had been directed to the attack in front, were taken com
pletely by surprise, and as both the parties of whites
simultaneously charged, large numbers were unable to
escape and were cut down, while the rest fled precipitately
from the spot.

Very hearty were the congratulations of the Portuguese
as the forces came together. Gerald had safely reached
the castle after some narrow escapes; he, having fallen
among som,e sleeping natives, had been attacked and
forced to trust to his speed.

After a short consultation it was decided to press the
enemy, and to leave them no time to recover from the
demoralization caused by the loss of their boats and the

Wholesale Conversion 345

junction of the two parties of white men. The forces
were, therefore, divided into two equal parts, and these
started in different directions. Clump after clump of trees
was searched, and the enemy driven from them. At first
some resistance was made; but gradually the natives
became completely panic-stricken and fled without striking
a blow.

Until nightfall the two parties continued to hunt and
shoot down a large number of the natives. Then they
returned to the castle. They now had a consultation as
to the terms which they should grant the natives, for they
had no doubt that victory had declared itself finally in their
favour. Sortie were for continuing the strife until the
enemy were exterminated ; but the governor of the island
was opposed to this.

" In the first place," he said, "mixed up with the Ter-
nate people are all the natives of this island, and to exter
minate them would be to leave us without labour and to
ruin the island. In the next place, the havoc which has
been already wrought in our plantations is such that it
will take years to repair, and the longer this fighting goes
on the more complete will be the destruction. I think,
then, that we should grant them the easiest terms possible.
They will be only too glad to escape and to get back to
their own land, and will be long before they invade us
again."

11 1 think," the officer who had arrived with the reinforce
ments of soldiers said, "it would be well, senor, if you
were to consult with the priest wfio is on board. He is a
man who has the ear of the council at Goa. He was but
recently arrived, and knows but little of the natives; but
he is full of zeal, and it would be well, I think, were we
to make an arrangement of which he would perfectly

346 Under Drake's Flag

approve, so that his report when he reached Goa should
be altogether favourable."

The governor agreed to this proposal, and decided to
send a party down to the shore in the morning to bring
the priest up to the castle.

Early in the morning a large crowd of natives were seen
at a short distance. In their hands they held boughs of
trees, and waved them to express their desire to enter into
negotiations. The governor, however, fired two or three
shots over their heads as a signal to them to keep farther
away, as their advances would not be received. Then,
while a party went down to the shore to fetch the priest,
he again sallied out and drove the natives before him.

When the holy father arrived another council was held,
and he was informed that the people were ready to treat,
and asked what in his opinion should be the terms imposed
upon them. He heard the arguments of the governor in
favour of allowing them to return to their island; but he
said, " In my opinion it is essential above all things that
they should be forced to accept Christianity."

At this the Englishmen, and indeed the two Portuguese
officers, could with difficulty repress a smile; but the
governor at once saw that a wholesale conversion of this
sort would do him much good with the authorities at Goa,
and he therefore willingly fell into the priest's views. The
next morning the natives again appeared with their green
boughs, and the governor, with the officer, the priest, and
a body of ten soldiers, went out to meet them. The King
of Ternate advanced and bowed himself submissively to
the ground and expressed his submission, and craved for
pardon and for permission to return with his people to
Ternate, promising solemnly that never again would they
meddle with the Portuguese settlement.

Wholesale Conversion 347

The governor, who spoke the language fluently, having
been there for some years, uttered an harangue reproach
ing him with his folly and wickedness in wantonly declar
ing war against the Portuguese. He pointed to the de
stroyed plantations, and asked if any punishment could be
too great for the ruin caused. The king and his council
lors offered to pay large tributes annually of spice and
other products until the ruined plantations were again
in bearing.

" This will not repay us for the losses we have suffered,
and for the evil spirit which you have introduced into this
island. We have, however," the governor said, "only
your interests at heart, and therefore we have decided to
pardon you, and to allow you to return to your island,
upon the condition that you and all your people embrace
Christianity, and pay such a tribute as we may impose."

The king had no understanding of the meaning of what
was proposed to him, and the governor said that he and
his people were, in the morning, to assemble before the
castle, and that the holy father, who had been sent on
purpose to turn them from the wickedness of their ways,
would then explain the doctrines of Christianity to them ;
that if they accepted and believed what he said, pardon
would be theirs ; if not, they would be hunted down until
all were destroyed.

Next morning the assembly took place in front of the
castle gate. The King of Ternate, surrounded by all his
principal councillors and warriors, took his place, while
the fighting men stood around him. The priest mounted
on the platform of the wall, the governor standing beside
him to interpret. The Englishmen, much amused at the
ceremony, stood at a short distance off. They did not
wish to be recognized by any of the people of Ternate, as

348 Under Drake's Flag

it was possible that some English vessels might again
come into these seas, and they did not desire that the
pl'easant remembrance of the visit of the Golden Hind
should be obliterated by the sight of some of its crew in
alliance with the Portuguese.

The priest began an elaborate explanation of the Chris
tian religion, which he continued for the space of two
hours, to the surprise and astonishment of the natives,
who could not, of course, comprehend a single word that
he said. Then he paused, and turning to the governor
said, "Will you translate this for the benefit of these
benighted heathens?"

" I fear," said the governor, "that it will be impossible
for me to do full justice to your eloquent words, and,
indeed, that these poor wretches would scarcely take in
so much learning and wisdom all at once; but in a few
words I will give them the sense of what you have been
telling them."

Then, lifting up his voice, he addressed the king.

" There is only one Qod. These idols of yours are help
less and useless. We have brought ashore those from your
war canoes, which my men will now proceed to burn, and
you will see that your gods will be unable to help them
selves. Indeed, they are not gods, and have no power.
God is good and hates wickedness. All men are wicked.
Therefore He would hate all men; but He has sent His
Son down, and for His sake pardons all who believe in
Him. Now, if you believe in Him as I tell you, you will
be pardoned both by us and by God. If you do not
believe, we shall kill you all and you will be punished
eternally. Now you have the choice what to do."

The matter thus pithily put did not require much con
sideration. After a short consultation between the chiefs,

Wholesale Conversion 349

the king demanded what ceremonies would have to be
gone through to become Christians, and was informed by
the governor that the only ceremony would be that he
would have to declare himself a Christian ; that the priest
would make upon him the sign of a cross With his finger,
and would sprinkle him with Water; and that, when this
was done, he would be a Christian.

Much relieved to find that the entry into this new
religion was so easy, the king and his people at once
agreed to accept Christianity. The governor informed
them that the priest thought that they were hardly yet
prepared, but that on the morrow the ceremony should
take place after a further explanation. The next day a
great altar was erected outside the walls of the castle,
gay with banners and waxlights. Before this the King
of Ternate and his people assembled, the gunners on the
walls standing with lighted matches by their cannon in
case of trouble. The priest then made another long
oration, which was again briefly and emphatically trans
lated by the governor. The king and all his people then
knelt, and according to the instruction of the priest made
the sign of the cross. The priest then went along be
tween the lines of the people sprinkling thefri with holy
water, a^nd this being done the ceremony was declared
complete, and the King of Ternate and his people were
received into the bosom of the Church. Then, escorted
by the soldiers, they Were taken down to the seashore.
The two white men were permitted to depart with them.
The governor had at first insisted that these should be put
to death. They pleaded, however, that they had acted
under force, and Ned interceding for them their lives were
granted on the condition that they should, on reaching
Ternate, at once embark for some cither island, and never

350 Under Drake's Flag

return to Ternate. The canoes were brought alongside,
and there being now no fear of any attempt at resistance,
as the entire body of invaders had given up their arms,
they were allowed to enter the canoes and to paddle away
to their own island, with numbers greatly diminished from
those which had landed to the attack of Tidore a week
before.

The governor and the priest were alike delighted at
the termination of the war, the former because he was
really anxious for the good of the colony which had been
entrusted to him, and believed that it would now progress
peaceably and without disturbance. He believed, too,
that his successful resistance to so large a body of
enemies would ensure him the approval of the viceroy
at Goa, and that the report of the priest would also ob
tain for him the valuable protection and patronage of the
ecclesiastics, whose power in the eastern seas was even
greater than it was at home.

Tidore was the furthest of the Portuguese settlements,
find the ship, having now made her round, was to return
direct to Goa. The priest hesitated whether to remain
or to return in her. He had made it one of the conditions
of peace with Ternate that a missionary should be received
there, a place of worship erected, and that he should be
allowed to open schools and to teach the tenets of his
religion to all, and he hesitated whether he would him
self at once take up that post, or whether he would report
the matter at Goa, where perhaps it might be decided to
send a priest who had acquired something of the language
of the Southern Seas. He finally decided upon the latter
course.

The governor furnished the lads with letters recom
mending them most warmly to the viceroy, and stating

Wholesale Conversion 351

the great services which they had rendered to him in the
defence of the island, saying, indeed, that had it not been
for their prudence and valour it was probable that the
natives would have succeeded in destroying the small
body of Portuguese and in massacring the reinforcements
landed from the vessel. The priest also, while viewing
the young men with the natural horror of a Portuguese
ecclesiastic for heretics, was yet impressed with the
services that they had rendered, and considered their own
shortcomings to be in a great measure atoned for by the
wholesale conversion which had to some extent been
effected by their means.

Bidding a hearty adieu to the governor, they took their
places on board ship and sailed for Goa. It was a six
weeks' voyage; but the vessel was well furnished with
provisions, and after their hardships the boys greatly
enjoyed the rest and tranquillity on board. In due time
they found themselves lying off the mouth of the river
up which, at a short distance from its mouth, the capital
of Portuguese India was situated.

CHAPTER XXII

Home

THE captain, Who was accompanied by the priest, rowed
up the river to report the arrival of the ship and the
events of his voyage to the authorities, and to place in
their hands the letter of the governor of Tidore. Twenty-
four hours later the captain returned with orders for the
ship to sail up the river, and that on their arrival the
young Englishmen were to be landed and conducted to
the presence of the viceroy himself.

The young adventurers, much as they had travelled,
were greatly struck with the appearance of Goa. It was,
Indeed, a city of palaces, most solidly built of stone, and
possessing an amount of magnificence and luxury which
surpassed anything they had ever seen. In the streets
a few Portuguese magnificently dressed and escorted by
guards moved among a throng of gaily attired natives,
whose slight figures, upright carriage, and intelligent
faces struck the boys as most pleasing after their ex
perience of the islanders of the South Seas. The immense
variety of turbans and headgear greatly astonished them,
as well as the magnificence of the dresses of some of those
who appeared to be men of importance and who were
attended by a retinue of armed followers.

The young men were escorted by two officers of the
viceroy, who had come on board ship as soon as she

352

Home 353

dropped anchor, to conduct them to his presence. At
the sight of these officials the natives hastily cleared the
way, and made every demonstration of respect as the
party passed through them. The viceregal palace was
a magnificent building, surpassing any edifice the boys
had ever seen, and they were still more struck by the
luxury of the interior. They were led through several
vestibules, until at last they arrived in a large chamber.
At a table here the viceroy was seated, while around him
were a large number of the councillors and leading men
of the place. The viceroy rose as the young men ad
vanced and bowed profoundly.

"You are, I hear, Englishmen, and I am told, but I
can scarcely believe it, that you belong to the ship of the
Captain Drake whose exploits in the West Indies against
the Spaniards have made him so famous. But how, be
longing to him, you came to be cast on an island in the
South Seas is more than we are able to understand."

No news of the expedition had reached the Portuguese,
and the surprise of the viceroy was only natural.

"The Golden Hind> sir, the vessel in which we were
gentlemen adventurers, rounded Cape Horn, sailed up
the American coast, and then, keeping west, crossed
through the islands, and has, we trust, long since
rounded the Cape of Good Hope and arrived in England,
having circumnavigated the globe."

An expression of surprise broke from the assembled
Portuguese. But a frown passed over the face of the
viceroy.

" What was the object of your captain in visiting these
seas?" he asked. "They are the property of Portugal,
and without the permission of his majesty no ship of any
other nation may pass through our waters."

(162) 23

354 Under Drake's Flag

"I can assure you," Ned said, "that there was no
object either of conquest or of trade on the part of our
admiral in visiting- these seas. When he rounded the
Cape his object was to discover, if possible, a passage
round the northern coast of America back to England.
But when we went north we found the cold was great,
and that the land stretched away so that it would join
with Asia to the north. Being convinced, then, that no
passage could be obtained in that way, he sailed for Eng
land round the Cape of Good Hope, fearing the dangers
of a passage round the Horn, by which he lost on our
passage out two of his ships, and was wellnigh wrecked
himself. He only abode in the islands of the South Seas
for a few days to get provisions and water, and then
sailed straight for home."

Assured by this explanation the viceroy now begged
the boys to sit down, and he and his council listened
with admiration and astonishment to the records of the
expedition, and especially to the passage across America
of two of the young men before him. The depredations
which had been committed upon the Spaniards excited
no indignation among the Portuguese, for these nations
were rivals, and although they did not put their conten
tions to the test of the sword, each was glad enough to
hear of any misfortune befalling the other.

The viceroy now assured the young men that he was
proud to welcome the members of so gallant a crew as
that of the great English navigator. "England and
Portugal," he said, "did not clash, and were always
natural allies. He trusted they would always remain so,
and in the meantime he should be glad to treat the boys
with all honour, and to forward them home by the first
ship which might be sailing." Apartments were now

Home 355

assigned to them in the palace, and here they were
delighted to find a stock of clothes suited for them.

For the next fortnight they passed a pleasant time at
Goa. They were the objects of much attention on the
part of the Portuguese, and all vied in the attempt to
make their stay pleasant to them. They found that the
town of Goa occupied but a small space, and that it was
strongly fortified, and the Portuguese made no attempt
to conceal their very high estimate of the fighting power
of the natives. One young officer, who was specially
told off to accompany the lads, and who spoke Spanish
fluently, was particularly frank in his description of the
state of affairs.

"All these gaily dressed natives that one sees in the
streets are, I suppose, Christians?" Ned asked.

"No, indeed," the other said, surprised. "What
should make you think so?"

Ned replied that in America he had found that the
Spaniards insisted on all the natives at once embracing
Christianity on pain of death.

"The Spaniards," the young Portuguese said, "are
lords and masters there. The natives are weak and timid,
and able to offer no resistance whatever. That is very
far from being our position here. We are, I can assure
you, only here on sufferance. You can have no idea of
the power of some of these native sovereigns of India.
The Mahrattas who live beyond the mountains you see
on the horizon could pour down such hosts of armed men,
that if they combined against us no resistance that we
could offer would be likely to be successful. And yet they
are but one among a score of warlike peoples. So long
as we do not attempt to proselytize, and are content to
appear as merchants and traders, no general feeling exists

356 Under Drake's Flag

against our residence here. But I can assure you that
if it became known in India that we were forcing the
natives to accept Christianity, the footing which we have
obtained here would be speedily lost. These people have
regular armies. They may not indeed be trained as are
ours at home ; but, individually, they are very brave. They
have artillery of heavy calibre. In the South Seas, as
you know, we endeavour to convert the heathen. The
people there are degraded savages by the side of these
Indians. But we do not adopt the strong methods which
the Spaniards have done. We have in Portugal a good
deal of your English freedom of opinion, and the Inquisi
tion has never gained any firm footing amongst us."

Upon one occasion the boys had the satisfaction of
seeing a grand Indian durbar, for the chief, on the corner
of whose territory the Portuguese had built their town
with his permission, came in to see the viceroy. The
boys were surprised at the magnificence of his cavalcade,
in which elephants, camels, and other animals took part,
and in which the trappings and appointments were
gorgeous indeed; while the dresses of the chiefs ab
solutely shone with jewels. The attendants, however,
made but a poor show according to European ideas.

There was at this time in European armies no attempt
at regular uniform, but there was a certain resemblance
between the attire and arms of the men who fought side
by side. When upon the march regularity and order
were maintained, and the men kept together in step.
Nothing of this kind was apparent among the troops who
accompanied the Indian chief. They marched along by
the side of the elephants, and in groups ahead and in
rear of them, in a confused disorder; and it seemed to
the lads that a mere handful of European troops would

Home 357

rout such a rabble as this. They said as much to their
Portuguese friend; but he told them that the people on
the coast could scarcely be considered as a fair sample
of those who dwelt in the hill country behind. " The
climate here," he said, "is much more relaxing". Vegeta
tion is extremely abundant, and all the necessities of life
can be obtained in the easiest manner. Consequently the
people here are enervated, and cannot be compared to the
horsemen of the plains. The seat of the Indian power
lies at Agra and Delhi — sometimes one and sometimes
the other. The emperors there can take the field with
two hundred thousand men if necessary, and even these,
with all their power, have difficulty in maintaining their
authority throughout India. You may judge, therefore,
of the power of the various territorial chiefs."

A fortnight later, to their great delight, the lads heard
that a vessel would start in three days for Lisbon. She
was taking home a large cargo of spice and articles of
Indian manufacture, and a number of invalided soldiers.
She was said to be a slow sailer, but as no other was
likely to start for some months the lads did not hesitate
to avail themselves of the offer of the viceroy. At parting
he presented them each with a sword set with diamonds,
and also purses of money, in token of his appreciation
of the valour displayed by them in the defence of
Tidore.

"It is," the viceroy said, "an honour to us to honour
the members of the greatest marine expedition which has
yet Ibeen made. We Portuguese may boast that we have
been among the foremost in maritime discovery, and we
can therefore the more admire the feats of your valiant
Captain Drake."

The ship, the Maria Ptat was a large one, far greater,

358 Under Drake's Flag

indeed, than the Golden Hind, and the boys felt that in
a floating" castle of this description their voyage ought
to be a safe and pleasant one. The captain had received
instructions to do all in his power to make the voyage
agreeable to them. A handsome cabin had been placed
at their disposal, and their position on board was alto
gether an honourable one.

The result justified their expectations. The voyage,
although long, passed without incident. The Maria Pia
experienced fine weather round the Cape, and, catching
the trade winds, made her course northward, and arrived
off the mouth of the Tagus without accident or adventure
of any kind.

Sailing up the river, she fired a salute with her guns,
which was answered by those of the fort at the entrance.
The news had been signalled to the capital of the arrival
of a ship from the Indies, and officials boarded her as soon
as she cast anchor. The captain at once went on shore
and reported to the minister of the Indies the news which
he had brought from Goa, and gave an account of his
voyage. He delivered a letter from the viceroy, stating
that he had given a passage to four English gentlemen,
who had formed part of Captain Drake's equipage, and who
had rendered very great services in defeating an attack
upon the island of Tidore by the people of Ternate, of
which matters, the viceroy added, the gentlemen would
themselves give a full account. The minister at once sent
on board an official to request the young men to land, and
upon their so doing he received them with great courtesy,
and gave a grand banquet the next day, at which the
British minister was present.

The lads were delighted upon landing to receive the
news that the Golden Hind had arrived safely in England

Home 359

four months before, and that all Europe was ringing with
the great feat which she had accomplished. The lads
found that they were received by the distinguished com
pany which met them at the table of the minister with
much honour and respect, and this was heightened upon
their giving a detailed account of the adventures which
had befallen them since leaving England. The British
minister offered them a passage to England in one of
the Queen's ships ; and having provided them amply with
money, they were enabled to make a good appearance,
and to enter with zest into the round of festivities of
which they were made the objects during their stay. They
were presented to the king, who received them most
graciously, and presented each with a sword of honour.

Three weeks later they sailed up the Thames, and upon
landing in London at once enquired for the residence of
Captain Drake. This they had no difficulty in discover
ing, as he was the hero of the hour. It was with great
pleasure that they were received by the commander. He
expressed but little surprise at seeing them, for, as he
told them, he made sure that sooner or later they would
arrive, and had given orders that upon the division of the
greal: sums which had been gained by the Golden Hind
on her voyage their shares should be scrupulously set
aside.

"You had twice before," he said to Ned, "appeared
after we had all given you up as dead, and I could not
believe that the four of you together could all have
succumbed. We got off the reef the next day, shifting
her cargo all upon one side and hoisting some sail, so
that the wind bore her down, her keel lifted from the
reef upon which she had fastened, and without damage
she went into deep water. We spent four days in looking

360 Under Drake's Flag

for you. We landed at the island to which you had been
directed, and searched it thoroughly. We then went to an
island further to the south, and spent three days in cruising
round its shores. We landed and captured some natives,
but could not learn from them that they had seen any
traces of you whatever. Most on board conceived that
the canoe must have upset, and that you must have
been drowned; but I never believed this, and felt con
vinced that from some unknown reason you had been unable
to return to the ship, but that sooner or later you would
arrive. From that point all went well with us. We had
a rapid voyage down to the Cape, and coasted along it
at a short distance. The weather was fair, and we turned
our head north without loss of time; and so, by the help
of Providence and a fair wind we made our course to
England, where our gracious sovereign has been pleased
to express her approval of our doings. I told her some
thing of your journey across the south of the American
continent, and she was pleased to express her sorrow at
the loss of such gallant and promising gentlemen. I am
sure that her majesty will receive with pleasure the news
of your return. Now tell me all that has happened since
I last saw you."

Ned recited the history of their adventures, and Captain
Francis approved of the course which they had taken in
making for Tidore instead of Ternate. He was greatly
amused at their experiences as South Sea deities, and
said that henceforth, let them be lost where they would,
or for as long as they might be, he would never again
feel any uneasiness as to their fate. He invited them to
take up their abode with him while they stayed in London;
and although they were eager to return to Devonshire, he
told them that he thought they ought to wait until he had

Home 361

communicated with the Queen, and had seen whether she
would wish to see the gentlemen in whom she had kindly
expressed interest.

Captain Drake had received the honour of knighthood
from the Queen's hand on his return from his voyage,
and was now Sir Francis Drake, and was for the time
the popular idol of the people, whose national pride was
deeply gratified at the feat of circumnavigation, now for
the first time performed by one of their countrymen.

Captain Drake dispatched a letter to her majesty at
Westminster, and the following day a royal messenger
arrived with an order that he should bring the four
gentlemen adventurers with him, and present them to
her majesty. The young men felt not a little awed at the
thought of being received by Queen Elizabeth. But upon
their presentation by Sif Francis, the Queen received them
with so much condescension and grace that their fears were
speedily removed.

" I thought," she said to Captain Drake, " that I should
see four huge and bearded paladins. You told me indeed
that they were young, but I had not pictured to myself
that they were still beardless striplings, although in point
of size they do credit to their native country. I love to
listen to tales of adventure," she continued, "and beg
that you will now recite to me the story of those portions
of your voyage and journeyings of which I have not heard
from the lips of Sir Francis." •

Then modestly Ned recited the story of their journey
across America, and afterwards took up the narrative at
the point when they, left the ship, and her majesty was
pleased to laugh hugely at the story of their masquerading
as gods. When they had finished she invited them to a
banquet to be given at Greenwich on the following day,

362 Under Drake's Flag

gave them her hand to kiss, and presented each with a
diamond ring in token of her royal favour.

The following day they went down in the barge of
Sir Francis Drake, which formed part of the grand cortege
which accompanied her majesty on her water passage to
Greenwich. There a royal banquet was held with much
splendour and display, after which a masque, prepared by
those ingenious authors Mr. Beaumont and Mr. Fletcher,
was enacted before her.

Three days later they embarked upon a country ship
bound for Plymouth, and after a rough tossing in the
Channel, landed there. They were received with much
honour by the mayor and dignitaries of Plymouth, for
Sir Francis had already written down, giving a brief
account of their adventures and of the marks of esteem
which the Queen had been pleased to bestow upon them;
and Plymouth, as the representative of the county of
Devon, rejoiced in giving a hearty welcome to her sons
who had brought so much credit upon them.

After a stay of a few hours the lads separated, Tom
and Reuben each starting for their respective homes, while
Ned, who had no family of his own, accompanied Gerald,
in whose home he was looked upon almost as a son, and
where the welcome which awaited him was as cordial as
that given to Gerald. The share of each of the adven
turers in the Golden Hind was a very large one, and Ned
purchased a nice little property and settled down upon
it, having had enough of the dangers of the seas, and
resolving no more to leave his native country unless his
duty to his Queen should demand his services.

That time was not long in arriving, for towards the
end of 1586 all Europe rang with the preparations which
Philip of Spain was making to invade England. The

Home 363

Devonshire gentlemen who had fought on the Spanish
Main, and who but lightly esteemed Spanish valour at
sea, at first scoffed at the news, but soon no doubt could be
entertained. Early in 1587 Sir Francis Drake wrote to his
friends who had fought under him that her majesty had
honoured him with a commission to beat up the Spanish
coast, and invited them to accompany him. The four
friends hastened with many others to obey the summons,
and on joining him at Plymouth he was pleased to appoint
each to the command of a ship. Some weeks were spent
in earnest preparation, and in March a fleet of thirty
vessels set forth, full manned and equipped. Accustomed
as the young men were to see great Spanish ships taken by
single boats, and a whole fleet submissive before one ship,
it seemed to them that with such an armament they could
destroy the whole navies of Spain, and even then that
little glory would be divided between each vessel. Upon
the i8th of April the fleet was off Cadiz, and Sir Francis
made the signal for the captains of the fleet to go on
board the flagship. There he unfolded to them his plan
of forcing the entrance to the port, and destroying the
Spanish fleet gathered there. Cadiz was one of the
strongest places of Spain, and the enterprise would to
most men have seemed a desperate one. But to men
who had fought in the Spanish Main it seemed but a
light thing. As they left the admiral's cabin Ned invited
his three friends to dine on board his ship the Sovereign^
and a right merry gathering it was, as they talked over
their past adventures, and marvelled to find themselves
each commanding a ship about to attack the fleet of
Spain in its own harbour.

Upon the following day the fleet sailed boldly towards the
port of Cadiz, where the people could scarce believe that

364 Under Drake's Flag

the British intended to force the entrance to the fort. When
they saw that such was indeed their purpose they opened
fire with all their batteries, great and small. The English
ships sailed on, unheeding their reception, and delivering
their broadsides as they neared the port. Although they
had been in many fights this was the first great battle
at which the friends had been present, and the roar and
din of the combat, the sound of their own guns and those
of the enemy, the crash and rending of wood, and the
cheers of the sailors in no little surprised them. The
Spanish gunners in their haste shot but badly, and with
Sir Francis Drake's ship leading the way the fleet forced
the entrance into the port. As they entered they were
saluted by the cannon of the Spanish vessels within, but
without more ado they lay these aboard. So mightily
were the Spaniards amazed by the valour and boldness
of the English that they fought but feebly, jumping over
for the most part or making their way in their boats to
shore. Then Sir Francis caused fire to be applied to
the Spanish ships, and thirty great war vessels were de
stroyed before the eyes of the townspeople, while the
English fleet sailed triumphantly away. Then following
the line of coast as far as St. Vincent the admiral captured
and burned a hundred other ships, and destroyed four
great land forts. Looking into the Tagus, the King of
Portugal having been forced by Spain to aid her, Captain
Drake captured the S/. Philip^ the largest ship of their
navy, which was, to the gratification of the sailors, laden
with a precious cargo. After these exploits, the fleet re
turned to England in triumph, having for the time crippled
the forces of Spain. Philip, however, redoubled his pre
parations, the fleets of Naples and Sicily, of Venice and
Genoa, were added to those of Spain, the dockyards

Home 365

worked night and day, and by the end of the year all
was in readiness.

In England men had not been idle. A great army was
raised of people of every rank and condition, Catholics as
well as Protestants uniting in the defence of the country;
while in every port round, the din of preparation was
heard. The army was destined to combat the thirty thou
sand Spanish soldiers commanded by the Duke of Parma
in the Netherlands, where a fleet of transports had been
prepared to bring them across when the Great Armada
should have cleared the sea of English ships. By dint of
great efforts a hundred and ninety-one English ships of
various sizes, these mostly being small merchantmen —
mere pigmies in comparison with the great Spanish gal
leons — were collected, while the Dutch dispatched sixty
others to aid in the struggle against Spain. On the 2gth
of May the Spanish Armada sailed from the Tagus, but
being delayed by a storm it was not till the iQth of June
that its advance was first signalled by the lookout near
Plymouth.

Then from every hill throughout England beacon fires
blazed to carry the tidings, and every Englishman betook
himself to his arms and prepared to repel the invaders.
Instead, however, of attempting to land at once, as had
been expected, the Spanish fleet kept up Channel, the
orders of the king being that it should make first for
Flanders, there form junction with the fleet of the Duke
of Parma, and so effect a landing upon the English coast.
As the great fleet, numbering a hundred and thirty large
war vessels, and extending in the form of a crescent nine
miles in length from horn to horn, sailed up Channel, the
spectacle, although terrible, was magnificent indeed.

The ships at Plymouth at once slipped anchor and set

366 Under Drake's Flag

out in pursuit. Sir Francis Drake led, and close by him
were the vessels commanded by the four friends. Paltry
indeed did the squadron appear by the side of the great
fleet, but from every port as they passed along came rein
forcements, until in numbers they equalled those of the
great ships of Spain. These reinforcements were com
manded by Admirals Hawkins, Frobisher, and other gallant
seamen, while Lord Howard, lord high-admiral of Eng
land, was in chief command. There was no general action
attempted, for the floating Spanish castles could have
ridden over the light ships of England; but each com
mander fell upon the enemy like dogs upon the flank of
an array of lions. Sir Francis threw himself into the centre
of the Spanish lines, followed by many other English
ships, and thus separated several of the great galleons
from their consorts, and then fell to work battering them.

The Spaniards fought valiantly, but at a disadvantage,
for the smaller ships of the English were so quickly handled
that they were able to take up positions to rake their
enemy without exposing themselves to the broadsides,
which would have sunk them. When at last they had
crippled their foes they would either close upon them and
carry them by boarding, or, leaving them helpless wrecks
upon the water, would hoist all sail and again overtake
the Spanish fleet.

The battle continued day and night for five days with
scarce an intermission ; the various English admirals some
times attacking all together, sometimes separately. The
same tactics ever prevailed, the Spaniards sailing on and
striving to keep in a compact body, the English hovering
round them, cutting off every ship which lagged behind,
breaking the ranks of the enemy, and separating vessels
from their consorts. Hard was it to say that in that long

Home 367

struggle one man showed more valour than another, but
the deeds of the ships commanded by the Devonshire
gentlemen were second to none. On the 2yth their ships
were signalled to sail to join those assembled near Dun
kirk, to check the progress of the Duke of Parma's fleet.
They reached the English fleet in time, and soon the
Spaniards were seen approaching. They kept in a com
pact mass which the English ships could not break.
For a while the fight went badly, and then a number of
fire ships were launched at the Spaniards. Seized with
panic these at once scattered, and the English falling
upon them a series of desperate conflicts ensued, ending
almost always in the capture or destruction of the enemy.
The Duke of Medina-Sidonia, who commanded the main
Spanish fleet, sailed north intending to coast round the
north of Scotland and so return to Spain. The English
ships followed for a while, but were, from the shortness
of the supplies which had been placed on board, forced to
put into harbour; and a great storm scattering the Span
ish fleet and wrecking many, only sixty vessels, and these
with their crews disabled by hardship and fatigue, ever
returned to Spain.

As a consequence of their gallantry in these battles, and
upon the urgent recommendations of Sir Francis Drake,
her majesty was pleased to bestow the honour of knight
hood upon each of the four young Devonshire gentlemen,
as upon many other brave captains.

After this they went no more to sea, nor took any part
in the disastrous expedition which Admirals Drake and
Hawkins together made to the Spanish Main, when the
brave Sir Francis lost his life from fever and disappoint
ment.

Soon after their return from the defeat of the Armada

368 Under Drake's Flag

Sir Edward Hearne married the only sister of his friend
Gerald, and lived with her happily to a green old age.
The friendship between the four friends never diminished,
but rather increased as they grew in years, and many
marriages took place between their children and grand
children.

Four times a year, upon the occasion of special events
in their lives, great family gatherings were held at the
house of one or other. Sir Gerald generally held festival
on the anniversary of the defeat of the Spanish attack on
the forest fortress in Porto Rico; Tom upon that of his
escape from the prison of the Inquisition ; Reuben gene
rally celebrated the day when in the character of a South
Sea idol he aided to defeat the hostile islanders; while
Ned kept up the anniversary of their return to England.
As to the victory over the Armada, they always had to
draw lots as to the house in which that great event should
be celebrated. Upon all these occasions stories were told
at great length, and their children, grandchildren, and
great-grandchildren, for all lived to see these growing up,
were never tired of listening to tales of the Spanish Main.

PRINTED IN GREAT BRITAIN
By Blackie & Son, Limited, Glasgow

THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE
STAMPED BELOW

BOOKS REQUESTED BY ANOTHER BORROWER
ARE SUBJECT TO RECALL AFTER ONE WEEK.
RENEWED BOOKS ARE SUBJECT TO
IMMEDIATE RECALL

LIBRARY, UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, DAVIS

Book Slip-Series 45,1

311179

Henty, G.A.

Under Drake's flag.

Call Number:

PZ?
HU

311179